Currently, in read committed transaction isolation mode (default), we have the
following sequence of actions when tuple_update()/tuple_delete() finds
the tuple updated by the concurrent transaction.
1. Attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete(), which
returns TM_Updated.
2. Lock tuple with tuple_lock().
3. Re-evaluate plan qual (recheck if we still need to update/delete and
calculate the new tuple for update).
4. Second attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete().
This attempt should be successful, since the tuple was previously locked.
This commit eliminates step 2 by taking the lock during the first
tuple_update()/tuple_delete() call. The heap table access method saves some
effort by checking the updated tuple once instead of twice. Future
undo-based table access methods, which will start from the latest row version,
can immediately place a lock there.
Also, this commit makes tuple_update()/tuple_delete() optionally save the old
tuple into the dedicated slot. That saves efforts on re-fetching tuples in
certain cases.
The code in nodeModifyTable.c is simplified by removing the nested switch/case.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdua-YFw3XTprfutzGp28xXLigFtzNbuFY8yPhqeq6X5kg%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Pavel Borisov, Vignesh C, Mason Sharp
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Chris Travers
It's now possible to specify a table access method via
CREATE TABLE ... USING for a partitioned table, as well change it with
ALTER TABLE ... SET ACCESS METHOD. Specifying an AM for a partitioned
table lets the value be used for all future partitions created under it,
closely mirroring the behavior of the TABLESPACE option for partitioned
tables. Existing partitions are not modified.
For a partitioned table with no AM specified, any new partitions are
created with the default_table_access_method.
Also add ALTER TABLE ... SET ACCESS METHOD DEFAULT, which reverts to the
original state of using the default for new partitions.
The relcache of partitioned tables is not changed: rd_tableam is not
set, even if a partitioned table has a relam set.
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Author: Soumyadeep Chakraborty <soumyadeep2007@gmail.com>
Author: Michaël Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: The authors themselves
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAE-ML+9zM4wJCGCBGv01k96qQ3gFv4WFcFy=zqPHKeaEFwwv6A@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210308010707.GA29832%40telsasoft.com
The new combined WAL record is now used for pruning, freezing and 2nd
pass of vacuum. This is in preparation for changing VACUUM to write a
combined prune+freeze record per page, instead of separate two
records. The new WAL record format now supports that, but the code
still always writes separate records for pruning and freezing.
This reserves separate XLOG_HEAP2_* info codes for when the pruning
record is emitted for on-access pruning or VACUUM, per Peter
Geoghegan's suggestion. The record format is identical, but having
separate info codes makes it easier analyze pruning and vacuuming with
pg_waldump.
The function to emit the new WAL record, log_heap_prune_and_freeze(),
is in pruneheap.c. The existing heap_log_freeze_plan() and its
subroutines are moved to pruneheap.c without changes, to keep them
together with log_heap_prune_and_freeze().
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAAKRu_azf-zH%3DDgVbquZ3tFWjMY1w5pO8m-TXJaMdri8z3933g@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAAKRu_b2oE4GL%3Dq4g9mcByS9yT7wTQvEH9OLpabj28e%2BWKFi2A@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds a new property called last_inactive_time for slots. It is
set to 0 whenever a slot is made active/acquired and set to the current
timestamp whenever the slot is inactive/released or restored from the disk.
Note that we don't set the last_inactive_time for the slots currently being
synced from the primary to the standby because such slots are typically
inactive as decoding is not allowed on those.
The 'last_inactive_time' will be useful on production servers to debug and
analyze inactive replication slots. It will also help to know the lifetime
of a replication slot - one can know how long a streaming standby, logical
subscriber, or replication slot consumer is down.
The 'last_inactive_time' will also be useful to implement inactive
timeout-based replication slot invalidation in a future commit.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Amit Kapila, Shveta Malik
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALj2ACW4aUe-_uFQOjdWCEN-xXoLGhmvRFnL8SNw_TZ5nJe+aw@mail.gmail.com
This teaches build_child_join_sjinfo() to create the dummy
SpecialJoinInfos (those created for inner joins) directly for a given
child join, skipping the unnecessary overhead of translating the
parent joinrel's SpecialJoinInfo.
To that end, this commit moves the code to initialize the dummy
SpecialJoinInfos to a new function named init_dummy_sjinfo() and
changes the few existing sites that have this code and
build_child_join_sjinfo() to call this new function.
Author: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo <guofenglinux@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrey Lepikhov <a.lepikhov@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAExHW5tHqEf3ASVqvFFcghYGPfpy7o3xnvhHwBGbJFMRH8KjNw@mail.gmail.com
Specifically, this commit reduces the memory consumed by the
SpecialJoinInfos that are allocated for child joins in
try_partitionwise_join() by freeing them at the end of creating paths
for each child join.
A SpecialJoinInfo allocated for a given child join is a copy of the
parent join's SpecialJoinInfo, which contains the translated copies
of the various Relids bitmapsets and semi_rhs_exprs, which is a List
of Nodes. The newly added freeing step frees the struct itself and
the various bitmapsets, but not semi_rhs_exprs, because there's no
handy function to free the memory of Node trees.
Author: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo <guofenglinux@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrey Lepikhov <a.lepikhov@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAExHW5tHqEf3ASVqvFFcghYGPfpy7o3xnvhHwBGbJFMRH8KjNw@mail.gmail.com
Coverity complained about the integer handling issue; if we start with
an arbitrary non-negative shift value, the loop may decrement it down
to something less than zero before exiting. This commit adds an
assertion to make sure the 'shift' is always 0 after the loop, and
uses 0 as the shift to get the key chunk in the following operation.
Introduced by ee1b30f12.
Reported-by: Tom Lane as per coverity
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2089517.1711299216%40sss.pgh.pa.us
Until now, UNION queries have often been suboptimal as the planner has
only ever considered using an Append node and making the results unique
by either using a Hash Aggregate, or by Sorting the entire Append result
and running it through the Unique operator. Both of these methods
always require reading all rows from the union subqueries.
Here we adjust the union planner so that it can request that each subquery
produce results in target list order so that these can be Merge Appended
together and made unique with a Unique node. This can improve performance
significantly as the union child can make use of the likes of btree
indexes and/or Merge Joins to provide the top-level UNION with presorted
input. This is especially good if the top-level UNION contains a LIMIT
node that limits the output rows to a small subset of the unioned rows as
cheap startup plans can be used.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo, Andy Fan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpb_63XQodmxKUF8vb9M7CxyUyT4sWvEgqeQU-GB7QFoQ@mail.gmail.com
Add PERIOD clause to foreign key constraint definitions. This is
supported for range and multirange types. Temporal foreign keys check
for range containment instead of equality.
This feature matches the behavior of the SQL standard temporal foreign
keys, but it works on PostgreSQL's native ranges instead of SQL's
"periods", which don't exist in PostgreSQL (yet).
Reference actions ON {UPDATE,DELETE} {CASCADE,SET NULL,SET DEFAULT}
are not supported yet.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
Up to now, all of the "catcache list" objects within a catalog cache
were just chained together on a single dlist, requiring O(N) time to
search. Remarkably, we've not had serious performance problems with
that so far; but we got a complaint of a bad performance regression
from v15 in a case with a large number of roles in the system, which
traced down to O(N^2) total time when we probed N catcache lists.
Replace that data structure with a hashtable having an enlargeable
number of dlists, in an exactly parallel way to the data structure
we've used for years for the plain CatCTup cache members. The extra
cost of maintaining a hash table seems negligible, since we were
already computing a hash value for list searches.
Normally this'd be HEAD-only material, but in view of the performance
regression it seems advisable to back-patch into v16. In the v16
version of the patch, leave the dead cc_lists field where it is and
add the new fields at the end of struct catcache, to avoid possible
ABI breakage in case any external code is looking at these structs.
(We assume no external code is actually allocating new catcache
structs.)
Per report from alex work.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGvXd3OSMbJQwOSc-Tq-Ro1CAz=vggErdSG7pv2s6vmmTOLJSg@mail.gmail.com
This adds the X509 attributes notBefore and notAfter to sslinfo
as well as pg_stat_ssl to allow verifying and identifying the
validity period of the current client certificate. OpenSSL has
APIs for extracting notAfter and notBefore, but they are only
supported in recent versions so we have to calculate the dates
by hand in order to make this work for the older versions of
OpenSSL that we still support.
Original patch by Cary Huang with additional hacking by Jacob
and myself.
Author: Cary Huang <cary.huang@highgo.ca>
Co-author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Co-author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/182b8565486.10af1a86f158715.2387262617218380588@highgo.ca
This changes nodeToString() to not output the actual value of location
fields in nodes, but instead it writes -1. This mirrors the fact that
stringToNode() also does not read location field values but always
stores -1.
For most uses of nodeToString(), which is to store nodes in catalog
fields, this is more useful. We don't store original query texts in
catalogs, so any lingering query location values are not meaningful.
For debugging purposes, there is a new nodeToStringWithLocations(),
which mirrors the existing stringToNodeWithLocations(). This is used
for WRITE_READ_PARSE_PLAN_TREES and nodes/print.c functions, which
covers all the debugging uses.
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAEze2WgrCiR3JZmWyB0YTc8HV7ewRdx13j0CqD6mVkYAW+SFGQ@mail.gmail.com
Till now, the reason for replication slot invalidation is not tracked
directly in pg_replication_slots. A recent commit 007693f2a3 added
'conflict_reason' to show the reasons for slot conflict/invalidation, but
only for logical slots.
This commit adds a new column 'invalidation_reason' to show invalidation
reasons for both physical and logical slots. And, this commit also turns
'conflict_reason' text column to 'conflicting' boolean column (effectively
reverting commit 007693f2a3). The 'conflicting' column is true for
invalidation reasons 'rows_removed' and 'wal_level_insufficient' because
those make the slot conflict with recovery. When 'conflicting' is true,
one can now look at the new 'invalidation_reason' column for the reason
for the logical slot's conflict with recovery.
The new 'invalidation_reason' column will also be useful to track other
invalidation reasons in the future commit.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Amit Kapila, Shveta Malik
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/ZfR7HuzFEswakt/a%40ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALj2ACW4aUe-_uFQOjdWCEN-xXoLGhmvRFnL8SNw_TZ5nJe+aw@mail.gmail.com
Put the fields alias and eref earlier in the struct, so that it
matches the order in _outRangeTblEntry()/_readRangeTblEntry(). This
helps if we ever want to fully automate out/read of RangeTblEntry.
Also, it makes dumps in the debugger easier to read in the same way.
Internally, this makes no difference.
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4b27fc50-8cd6-46f5-ab20-88dbaadca645@eisentraut.org
This is part of an effort to reduce the number of special cases in the
automatically generated node support functions.
This patch removes _jumbleRangeTblEntry() and instead adds per-field
query_jumble_ignore annotations to match the behavior of the previous
custom code. The pg_stat_statements test suite has some coverage of
this. It gets rid of the switch on rtekind; this should be
technically correct, since we do the equal and copy functions like
this also.
The list of fields to jumble has been checked and is considered
correct as of 8b29a119fd.
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4b27fc50-8cd6-46f5-ab20-88dbaadca645@eisentraut.org
This allows us to abstract how/whether table AM uses transaction identifiers.
A custom table AM can use a custom slot, which may not store xmin directly,
but determine the tuple belonging to the current transaction in the other way.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdurb9ycV8udYqM%3Do0sPS66PJ4RCBM1g-bBpvzUfogY0EA%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent, Mark Dilger, Pavel Borisov
Reviewed-by: Nikita Malakhov, Japin Li
This allows table AM to return a native tuple slot even if
VirtualTupleTableSlot is given as an input. Native tuple slots have knowledge
about system attributes, which could be accessed in the future.
table_multi_insert() method already can modify the input 'slots' array.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdurb9ycV8udYqM%3Do0sPS66PJ4RCBM1g-bBpvzUfogY0EA%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent, Mark Dilger, Pavel Borisov
Reviewed-by: Nikita Malakhov, Japin Li
The new table AM method free_rd_amcache is responsible for freeing all the
memory related to rd_amcache and setting free_rd_amcache to NULL. If the new
method is not specified, we still assume rd_amcache to be a single chunk of
memory, which could be just pfree'd.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdurb9ycV8udYqM%3Do0sPS66PJ4RCBM1g-bBpvzUfogY0EA%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent, Mark Dilger, Pavel Borisov
Reviewed-by: Nikita Malakhov, Japin Li
This introduces the following SQL/JSON functions for querying JSON
data using jsonpath expressions:
JSON_EXISTS(), which can be used to apply a jsonpath expression to a
JSON value to check if it yields any values.
JSON_QUERY(), which can be used to to apply a jsonpath expression to
a JSON value to get a JSON object, an array, or a string. There are
various options to control whether multi-value result uses array
wrappers and whether the singleton scalar strings are quoted or not.
JSON_VALUE(), which can be used to apply a jsonpath expression to a
JSON value to return a single scalar value, producing an error if it
multiple values are matched.
Both JSON_VALUE() and JSON_QUERY() functions have options for
handling EMPTY and ERROR conditions, which can be used to specify
the behavior when no values are matched and when an error occurs
during jsonpath evaluation, respectively.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Author: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order):
Andres Freund, Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup,
Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu, Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson,
Justin Pryzby, Álvaro Herrera, Jian He, Anton A. Melnikov,
Nikita Malakhov, Peter Eisentraut, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqHROpf9e644D8BRqYvaAPmgBZVup-xKMDPk-nd4EpgzHw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
Commit cca97ce6a6 allowed dbname in pg_basebackup connstring and in this
commit we allow it to be written in postgresql.auto.conf when -R option is
used. The database name in the connection string will be used by the
logical replication slot synchronization on standby.
The dbname will be recorded only if specified explicitly in the connection
string or environment variable.
Masahiko Sawada hasn't reviewed the code in detail but endorsed the idea.
Author: Vignesh C, Kuroda Hayato
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB8KJ=hdKdg+UeXhReeHpHA6N6v3e0qFF+ZsPFHk9_ThWKf=2A@mail.gmail.com
TIDStore is a data structure designed to efficiently store large sets
of TIDs. For TID storage, it employs a radix tree, where the key is
a block number, and the value is a bitmap representing offset
numbers. The TIDStore can be created on a DSA area and used by
multiple backend processes simultaneously.
There are potential future users such as tidbitmap.c, though it's very
likely the interface will need to evolve as we come to understand the
needs of different kinds of users. For example, we can support
updating the offset bitmap of existing values.
Currently, the TIDStore is not used for anything yet, aside from the
test code. But an upcoming patch will use it.
This includes a unit test module, in src/test/modules/test_tidstore.
Co-authored-by: John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAfOZvmfR0j8VmZorZjL7RhTiQdVttNuC4W-Shdc2a-AA%40mail.gmail.com
In combination with to_regtype, this allows converting a string to
the "canonicalized" form emitted by format_type. That usage requires
parsing the string twice, which is slightly annoying but not really
too expensive. We considered alternatives such as returning a record
type, but that way was notationally uglier than this, and possibly
less flexible.
Like to_regtype(), we'd rather that this return NULL for any bad
input, but the underlying type-parsing logic isn't yet capable of
not throwing syntax errors. Adjust the documentation for both
functions to point that out.
In passing, fix up a couple of nearby entries in the System Catalog
Information Functions table that had not gotten the word about our
since-v13 convention for displaying function usage examples.
David Wheeler and Erik Wienhold, reviewed by Pavel Stehule, Jim Jones,
and others.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DF2324CA-2673-4ABE-B382-26B5770B6AA3@justatheory.com
This way, we can fold the list of lock names to occur in
BuiltinTrancheNames instead of having its own separate array. This
saves two lines of code in GetLWTrancheName and some space in
BuiltinTrancheNames, as foreseen in commit 74a7306310, as well as
removing the need for a separate lwlocknames.c file.
We still have to build lwlocknames.h using Perl code, which initially I
wanted to avoid, but it gives us the chance to cross-check
wait_event_names.txt.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202401231025.gbv4nnte5fmm@alvherre.pgsql
To avoid the compiler warnings:
launch_backend.c:211:39: warning: comparison of constant 16 with expression of type 'BackendType' (aka 'enum BackendType') is always true [-Wtautological-constant-out-of-range-compare]
launch_backend.c:233:39: warning: comparison of constant 16 with expression of type 'BackendType' (aka 'enum BackendType') is always true [-Wtautological-constant-out-of-range-compare]
The point of the assertions was to fail more explicitly if someone
adds a new BackendType to the end of the enum, but forgets to add it
to the child_process_kinds array. It was a pretty weak assertion to
begin with, because it wouldn't catch if you added a new BackendType
in the middle of the enum. So let's just remove it.
Per buildfarm member ayu and a few others, spotted by Tom Lane.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/4119680.1710913067@sss.pgh.pa.us
The builtin C.UTF-8 locale has similar semantics to the libc locale of
the same name. That is, code point sort order (fast, memcmp-based)
combined with Unicode semantics for character operations such as
pattern matching, regular expressions, and
LOWER()/INITCAP()/UPPER(). The character semantics are based on
Unicode simple case mappings.
The builtin provider's C.UTF-8 offers several important advantages
over libc:
* faster sorting -- benefits from additional optimizations such as
abbreviated keys and varstrfastcmp_c
* faster case conversion, e.g. LOWER(), at least compared with some
libc implementations
* available on all platforms with identical semantics, and the
semantics are stable, testable, and documentable within a given
Postgres major version
Being based on memcmp, the builtin C.UTF-8 locale does not offer
natural language sort order. But it is an improvement for most use
cases that might otherwise use libc's "C.UTF-8" locale, as well as
many use cases that use libc's "C" locale.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Daniel Vérité, Peter Eisentraut, Jeremy Schneider
On some systems, calls to pg_popcount{32,64} are indirected through
a function pointer. This commit converts pg_popcount() to a
function pointer on those systems so that we can inline the
appropriate pg_popcount{32,64} implementations into each of the
pg_popcount() implementations. Since pg_popcount() may call
pg_popcount{32,64} several times, this can significantly improve
its performance.
Suggested-by: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrb7MJRB6JuKLDEY2x_LKdFHwVbogpjZBCX547i5%2BrXOQ%40mail.gmail.com
When considering nestloop paths for individual partitions within
a partitionwise join, if the inner path is parameterized, it is
parameterized by the topmost parent of the outer rel, not the
corresponding outer rel itself. Therefore, we need to translate the
parameterization so that the inner path is parameterized by the
corresponding outer rel.
Up to now, we did this while generating join paths. However, that's
problematic because we must also translate some expressions that are
shared across all paths for a relation, such as restriction clauses
(kept in the RelOptInfo and/or IndexOptInfo) and TableSampleClauses
(kept in the RangeTblEntry). The existing code fails to translate
these at all, leading to wrong answers, odd failures such as
"variable not found in subplan target list", or executor crashes.
But we can't modify them during path generation, because that would
break things if we end up choosing some non-partitioned-join path.
So this patch postpones reparameterization of the inner path until
createplan.c, where it is safe to modify the referenced RangeTblEntry,
RelOptInfo or IndexOptInfo, because we have made a final choice of which
Path to use. We do still have to check during path generation that
the reparameterization will be possible. So we introduce a new
function path_is_reparameterizable_by_child() to detect that.
The duplication between path_is_reparameterizable_by_child() and
reparameterize_path_by_child() is a bit annoying, but there seems
no other good answer. A small benefit is that we can avoid building
useless reparameterized trees in cases where a non-partitioned join
is ultimately chosen. Also, reparameterize_path_by_child() can now
be allowed to scribble on the input paths, saving a few cycles.
This fix repairs the same problems previously addressed in the
back branches by commits 62f120203 et al.
Richard Guo, reviewed at various times by Ashutosh Bapat, Andrei
Lepikhov, Alena Rybakina, Robert Haas, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs496+N=UAjOc=rcD3P7B6oJe4rZw08e_TZRUsWbPxZW3Tw@mail.gmail.com
Instead of the rather ugly type=int + name ~= location$, we now have a
marker type for offset pointers or sizes that are only relevant when a
query text is included, which decreases the complexity required in
gen_node_support.pl for handling these values.
Author: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAEze2WgrCiR3JZmWyB0YTc8HV7ewRdx13j0CqD6mVkYAW+SFGQ@mail.gmail.com
Based on comments from Peter Eisentraut.
* Document CREATE DATABASE ... BUILTIN_LOCALE.
* Determine required encoding based on locale name for CREATE
COLLATION. Use -1 for "C" (requires catversion bump).
* initdb output fixups.
* Make ctype_is_c a constant true for now.
* Fixups to ICU 010_create_database.pl test.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4135cf11-206d-40ed-96c0-9363c1232379@eisentraut.org
Introduce new postmaster_child_launch() function that deals with the
differences in EXEC_BACKEND mode.
Refactor the mechanism of passing information from the parent to child
process. Instead of using different command-line arguments when
launching the child process in EXEC_BACKEND mode, pass a
variable-length blob of startup data along with all the global
variables. The contents of that blob depend on the kind of child
process being launched. In !EXEC_BACKEND mode, we use the same blob,
but it's simply inherited from the parent to child process.
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7a59b073-5b5b-151e-7ed3-8b01ff7ce9ef@iki.fi
This just moves the functions, with no other changes, to make the next
commits smaller and easier to review. The moved functions are related
to launching postmaster child processes in EXEC_BACKEND mode.
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7a59b073-5b5b-151e-7ed3-8b01ff7ce9ef@iki.fi
Allocate memory for the error message inside memory owned by the
JsonLexContext and move responsibility away from the caller for
freeing it. This means that we can partially revert b44669b2ca
as this is now safe to use in FRONTEND code. The motivation for
this comes from the OAuth and incremental JSON patchsets but it
also adds value on its own.
Author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOYmi+mWdTd6ujtyF7MsvXvk7ToLRVG_tYAcaGbQLvf=N4KrQw@mail.gmail.com
This allows a RETURNING clause to be appended to a MERGE query, to
return values based on each row inserted, updated, or deleted. As with
plain INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE commands, the returned values are
based on the new contents of the target table for INSERT and UPDATE
actions, and on its old contents for DELETE actions. Values from the
source relation may also be returned.
As with INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE, the output of MERGE ... RETURNING may be
used as the source relation for other operations such as WITH queries
and COPY commands.
Additionally, a special function merge_action() is provided, which
returns 'INSERT', 'UPDATE', or 'DELETE', depending on the action
executed for each row. The merge_action() function can be used
anywhere in the RETURNING list, including in arbitrary expressions and
subqueries, but it is an error to use it anywhere outside of a MERGE
query's RETURNING list.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Isaac Morland, Vik Fearing, Alvaro Herrera,
Gurjeet Singh, Jian He, Jeff Davis, Merlin Moncure, Peter Eisentraut,
and Wolfgang Walther.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCWePEGQR5LBn-vD6SfeLZafzEm2Qy_L_Oky2=qw2w3Pzg@mail.gmail.com
This allows setting attstattarget when a relation is created.
We make use of this by having index_concurrently_create_copy() copy
over the attstattarget values when the new index is created, instead
of having index_concurrently_swap() fix it up later.
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4da8d211-d54d-44b9-9847-f2a9f1184c76@eisentraut.org
DDL code uses tuple descriptors to pass around pg_attribute values
during table and index creation. But tuple descriptors don't include
the variable-length/nullable columns of pg_attribute, so they have to
be handled separately. Right now, the attoptions field is handled in
a one-off way with a separate argument passed to
InsertPgAttributeTuples(). The other affected fields of pg_attribute
are right now not needed at relation creation time.
The goal of this patch is to generalize this to allow handling
additional variable-length/nullable columns of pg_attribute in a
similar manner. For that, create a new struct
FormExtraData_pg_attribute, which is to be passed around in parallel
to the tuple descriptor and optionally supplies the additional
columns. Right now, this struct only contains one field for
attoptions, so no functionality is actually changed by this.
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4da8d211-d54d-44b9-9847-f2a9f1184c76@eisentraut.org
This introduces a new function equalRowTypes() that is effectively a
subset of equalTupleDescs() but only compares the number of attributes
and attribute name, type, typmod, and collation. This is enough for
most existing uses of equalTupleDescs(), which are changed to use the
new function. The only remaining callers of equalTupleDescs() are
those that really want to check the full tuple descriptor as such,
without concern about record or row or record type semantics.
The existing function hashTupleDesc() is renamed to hashRowType(),
because it now corresponds more to equalRowTypes().
The purpose of this change is to be clearer about the semantics of the
equality asked for by each caller. (At least one caller had a comment
that questioned whether equalTupleDescs() was too restrictive.) For
example, 4f622503d6 removed attstattarget from the tuple descriptor
structure. It was not fully clear at the time how this should affect
equalTupleDescs(). Now the answer is clear: By their own definitions,
equalRowTypes() does not care, and equalTupleDescs() just compares
whatever is in the tuple descriptor but does not care why it is in
there.
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/f656d6d9-6660-4518-a006-2f65cafbebd1%40eisentraut.org
destroyStringInfo() is a counterpart to makeStringInfo(), freeing a
palloc'd StringInfo and its data. This is a convenience function to
align the StringInfo API with the PQExpBuffer API. Originally added
in the OAuth patchset, it was extracted and committed separately in
order to aid upcoming JSON work.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOYmi+mWdTd6ujtyF7MsvXvk7ToLRVG_tYAcaGbQLvf=N4KrQw@mail.gmail.com
This function returns the chunk_id of an on-disk TOASTed value. If
the value is un-TOASTed or not on-disk, it returns NULL. This is
useful for identifying which values are actually TOASTed and for
investigating "unexpected chunk number" errors.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed-by: Jian He
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230329105507.d764497456eeac1ca491b5bd%40sraoss.co.jp
The parallel query infrastructure copies the leader backend's active
snapshot to the worker processes. But BitmapHeapScan node also had
bespoken code to pass the snapshot from leader to the worker. That was
redundant, so remove it.
The removed code was analogous to the snapshot serialization in
table_parallelscan_initialize(), but that was the wrong role model. A
parallel bitmap heap scan is more like an independent non-parallel
bitmap heap scan in each parallel worker as far as the table AM is
concerned, because the coordination is done in nodeBitmapHeapscan.c,
and the table AM doesn't need to know anything about it.
This relies on the assumption that es_snapshot ==
GetActiveSnapshot(). That's not a new assumption, things would get
weird if you used the QueryDesc's snapshot for visibility checks in
the scans, but the active snapshot for evaluating quals, for
example. This could use some refactoring and cleanup, but for now,
just add some assertions.
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/5f3b9d59-0f43-419d-80ca-6d04c07cf61a@iki.fi
We don't determine the position at which a process waiting for a lock
should insert itself into the wait queue until we reach ProcSleep(),
and we may at that point discover that we must insert ourselves ahead
of everyone who wants a conflicting lock, in which case we obtain the
lock immediately. Up until now, a no-wait lock acquisition would fail
in such cases, erroneously claiming that the lock couldn't be obtained
immediately. Fix that by trying ProcSleep even in the no-wait case.
No back-patch for now, because I'm treating this as an improvement to
the existing no-wait feature. It could instead be argued that it's a
bug fix, on the theory that there should never be any case whatsoever
where no-wait fails to obtain a lock that would have been obtained
immediately without no-wait, but I'm reluctant to interpret the
semantics of no-wait that strictly.
Robert Haas and Jingxian Li
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobCH-kMXGVpb0BB-iNMdtcNkTvcZ4JBxDJows3kYM+GDg@mail.gmail.com
Currently, pg_visibility computes its xid horizon using the
GetOldestNonRemovableTransactionId(). The problem is that this horizon can
sometimes go backward. That can lead to reporting false errors.
In order to fix that, this commit implements a new function
GetStrictOldestNonRemovableTransactionId(). This function computes the xid
horizon, which would be guaranteed to be newer or equal to any xid horizon
computed before.
We have to do the following to achieve this.
1. Ignore processes xmin's, because they consider connection to other databases
that were ignored before.
2. Ignore KnownAssignedXids, because they are not database-aware. At the same
time, the primary could compute its horizons database-aware.
3. Ignore walsender xmin, because it could go backward if some replication
connections don't use replication slots.
As a result, we're using only currently running xids to compute the horizon.
Surely these would significantly sacrifice accuracy. But we have to do so to
avoid reporting false errors.
Inspired by earlier patch by Daniel Shelepanov and the following discussion
with Robert Haas and Tom Lane.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1649062270.289865713%40f403.i.mail.ru
Reviewed-by: Alexander Lakhin, Dmitry Koval
New provider for collations, like "libc" or "icu", but without any
external dependency.
Initially, the only locale supported by the builtin provider is "C",
which is identical to the libc provider's "C" locale. The libc
provider's "C" locale has always been treated as a special case that
uses an internal implementation, without using libc at all -- so the
new builtin provider uses the same implementation.
The builtin provider's locale is independent of the server environment
variables LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE. Using the builtin provider, the
database collation locale can be "C" while LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE are
set to "en_US", which is impossible with the libc provider.
By offering a new builtin provider, it clarifies that the semantics of
a collation using this provider will never depend on libc, and makes
it easier to document the behavior.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ab925f69-5f9d-f85e-b87c-bd2a44798659@joeconway.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dd9261f4-7a98-4565-93ec-336c1c110d90@manitou-mail.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Daniel Vérité, Peter Eisentraut, Jeremy Schneider
With the makefile rules, the output of genbki.pl was written to
src/backend/catalog/, and then the header files were linked to
src/include/catalog/.
This changes it so that the output files are written directly to
src/include/catalog/. This makes the logic simpler, and it also makes
the behavior consistent with the meson build system. Also, the list
of catalog files is now kept in parallel in
src/include/catalog/{meson.build,Makefile}, while before the makefiles
had it in src/backend/catalog/Makefile.
Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson <andreas@proxel.se>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/21b74bdc-183d-4dd5-9c27-9378d178f459@eisentraut.org
pg_stat_checkpointer contains statistics for checkpoints and restartpoints.
Before 12915a58ee documentation said only about checkpoints implying that
restartpoint is the variation of checkpoint. 12915a58ee introduced
new separate statistics fields for restartpoints. This commit explicitly
documents fields that are relevant for both checkpoints and restartpoints.
Reported-by: Magnus Hagander
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevExav5-SR0x%2BG9kBUMV0G8XsvSUfuyyqmYBBJi6VHns6sw%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Anton A. Melnikov
Roles with MAINTAIN on a relation may run VACUUM, ANALYZE, REINDEX,
REFRESH MATERIALIZE VIEW, CLUSTER, and LOCK TABLE on the relation.
Roles with privileges of pg_maintain may run those same commands on
all relations.
This was previously committed for v16, but it was reverted in
commit 151c22deee due to concerns about search_path tricks that
could be used to escalate privileges to the table owner. Commits
2af07e2f74, 59825d1639, and c7ea3f4229 resolved these concerns by
restricting search_path when running maintenance commands.
Bumps catversion.
Reviewed-by: Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240305161235.GA3478007%40nathanxps13
Before this patch, if you took a full backup on server A and then
tried to use the backup manifest to take an incremental backup on
server B, it wouldn't know that the manifest was from a different
server and so the incremental backup operation could potentially
complete without error. When you later tried to run pg_combinebackup,
you'd find out that your incremental backup was and always had been
invalid. That's poor timing, because nobody likes finding out about
backup problems only at restore time.
With this patch, you'll get an error when trying to take the (invalid)
incremental backup, which seems a lot nicer.
Amul Sul, revised by me. Review by Michael Paquier.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYLZzbSAMM3cAjV4Y+iCRZn-bR9H2+Mdz7NdaJFU1Zb5w@mail.gmail.com
This works just like get_controlfile(), but expects the path to the
control file rather than the path to the data directory that contains
the control file. This makes more sense in cases where the caller
has already constructed the path to the control file itself.
Amul Sul and Robert Haas, reviewed by Michael Paquier
There is a very ancient hack in check_sql_fn_retval that allows a
single SELECT targetlist entry of composite type to be taken as
supplying all the output columns of a function returning composite.
(This is grotty and fundamentally ambiguous, but it's really hard
to do nested composite-returning functions without it.)
As far as I know, that doesn't cause any problems in ordinary
functions. It's disastrous for procedures however. All procedures
that have any output parameters are labeled with prorettype RECORD,
and the CALL code expects it will get back a record with one column
per output parameter, regardless of whether any of those parameters
is composite. Doing something else leads to an assertion failure
or core dump.
This is simple enough to fix: we just need to not apply that rule
when considering procedures. However, that requires adding another
argument to check_sql_fn_retval, which at least in principle might be
getting called by external callers. Therefore, in the back branches
convert check_sql_fn_retval into an ABI-preserving wrapper around a
new function check_sql_fn_retval_ext.
Per report from Yahor Yuzefovich. This has been broken since we
implemented procedures, so back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABz5gWHSjj2df6uG0NRiDhZ_Uz=Y8t0FJP-_SVSsRsnrQT76Gg@mail.gmail.com
In postmaster, use a more lightweight ClientSocket struct that
encapsulates just the socket itself and the remote endpoint's address
that you get from accept() call. ClientSocket is passed to the child
process, which initializes the bigger Port struct. This makes it more
clear what information postmaster initializes, and what is left to the
child process.
Rename the StreamServerPort and StreamConnection functions to make it
more clear what they do. Remove StreamClose, replacing it with plain
closesocket() calls.
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7a59b073-5b5b-151e-7ed3-8b01ff7ce9ef@iki.fi
We used to smuggle it to the child process in the Port struct, but it
seems better to pass it down as a separate argument. This paves the
way for the next commit, which moves the initialization of the Port
struct to the backend process, after forking.
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7a59b073-5b5b-151e-7ed3-8b01ff7ce9ef@iki.fi
There is a hook called ExplainOneQuery_hook that gives modules the
possibility to plug into this code path, but, like utility.c for utility
statement execution, there is no corresponding "standard" routine in
the case of EXPLAIN executed for one Query.
This commit adds a new standard_ExplainOneQuery() in explain.c, which is
able to run explain on a non-utility Query without calling its hook.
Per the feedback received from a couple of hackers, this change gives
the possibility to cut a few hundred lines of code in some of the
popular out-of-core modules as these maintained a copy of
ExplainOneQuery(), adding custom extra information at the beginning or
the end of the EXPLAIN output.
Author: Mats Kindahl
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Jelte Fennema-Nio, Andrei Lepikhov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+14427V_B4EAoC_o-iYYucRdMSOTfpuH9k-QbexffY1HYJBiA@mail.gmail.com
Rename pg_collation.colliculocale to colllocale, and
pg_database.daticulocale to datlocale. These names reflects that the
fields will be useful for the upcoming builtin provider as well, not
just for ICU.
This is purely a rename; no changes to the meaning of the fields.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
... and in particular don't return them as replica identity.
The motivation for this change is letting the primary keys be seen by
code that derives NOT NULL constraints from them, when creating
inheritance children; before this change, if you had a deferrable PK,
pg_dump would not recreate the attnotnull marking properly, because the
column would not be considered as having anything to back said marking
after dropping the throwaway NOT NULL constraint.
The reason we don't want these PKs as replica identities is that
replication can corrupt data, if the uniqueness constraint is
transiently broken.
Reported-by: Amul Sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b94QonkgsbDXofakHDnORQNgafd1y3Oa5QXfpQNJyXyQ7A@mail.gmail.com
You might run out of stack space with recursion, which is not nice in
functions that might be used e.g. at cleanup after transaction
abort. MemoryContext contains pointer to parent and siblings, so we
can traverse a tree of contexts iteratively, without using
stack. Refactor the functions to do that.
MemoryContextStats() still recurses, but it now has a limit to how
deep it recurses. Once the limit is reached, it prints just a summary
of the rest of the hierarchy, similar to how it summarizes contexts
with lots of children. That seems good anyway, because a context dump
with hundreds of nested contexts isn't very readable.
Report by Egor Chindyaskin and Alexander Lakhin.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1672760457.940462079%40f306.i.mail.ru
Author: Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Andres Freund, Alexander Korotkov, Tom Lane
This patch provides a way to ensure that physical standbys that are
potential failover candidates have received and flushed changes before
the primary server making them visible to subscribers. Doing so guarantees
that the promoted standby server is not lagging behind the subscribers
when a failover is necessary.
The logical walsender now guarantees that all local changes are sent and
flushed to the standby servers corresponding to the replication slots
specified in 'standby_slot_names' before sending those changes to the
subscriber.
Additionally, the SQL functions pg_logical_slot_get_changes,
pg_logical_slot_peek_changes and pg_replication_slot_advance are modified
to ensure that they process changes for failover slots only after physical
slots specified in 'standby_slot_names' have confirmed WAL receipt for those.
Author: Hou Zhijie and Shveta Malik
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Ajin Cherian, Nisha Moond, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
Since b0483263dd, this field can be used to store an access method
name for ALTER TABLE, but access methods were not mentioned in the
field's description.
Issue noticed while working on the area.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZeWKgCtk6xiAsDsc@paquier.xyz
Implements Unicode simple case mapping, in which all code points map
to exactly one other code point unconditionally.
These tables are generated from UnicodeData.txt, which is already
being used by other infrastructure in src/common/unicode. The tables
are checked into the source tree, so they only need to be regenerated
when we update the Unicode version.
In preparation for the builtin collation provider, and possibly useful
for other callers.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Daniel Verite, Jeremy Schneider
The inh field of RangeTblEntry was doubly confusingly documented.
Some parts of the code insisted that it was only valid for
RTE_RELATION entries, other parts said the field was valid for all
entries. Neither was quite correct. More correctly, the field is
valid for RTE_RELATION entries but is also used in the planner for
RTE_SUBQUERY entries. So it makes more sense to group it with other
fields that are primarily for RTE_RELATION but borrowed by
RTE_SUBQUERY. (The exact position was chosen so that it is next to
relkind for better struct packing, and next to relid, since relid and
inh are sort of the input fields and the others are filled in later.)
Also add documentation for the planner's use at the struct definition.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/6c1fbccc-85c8-40d3-b08b-4f47f2093711@eisentraut.org
This implements a radix tree data structure based on the design in
"The Adaptive Radix Tree: ARTful Indexing for Main-Memory Databases"
by Viktor Leis, Alfons Kemper, and ThomasNeumann, 2013. The main
technique that makes it adaptive is using several different node types,
each with a different capacity of elements, and a different algorithm
for accessing them. The nodes start small and grow/shrink as needed.
The main advantage over hash tables is efficient sorted iteration and
better memory locality when successive keys are lexicographically
close together. The implementation currently assumes 64-bit integer
keys, and traversing the tree is in general slower than a linear
probing hash table, so this is not a general-purpose associative array.
The paper describes two other techniques not implemented here,
namely "path compression" and "lazy expansion". These can further
reduce memory usage and speed up traversal, but the former would add
significant complexity and the latter requires storing the full key
with the value. We do trivially compress the path when leading bytes
of the key are zeros, however.
For value storage, we use "combined pointer/value slots", as
recommended in the paper. Values of size equal or smaller than the the
platform's pointer type are stored in the array of child pointers in
the last level node, while larger values are each stored in a separate
allocation. This is for now fixed at compile time, but it would be
fairly trivial to allow determining at runtime how variable-length
values are stored.
One innovation in our implementation compared to the ART paper is
decoupling the notion of node "size class" from "kind". The size
classes within a given node kind have the same underlying type, but
a variable capacity for children, so we can introduce additional node
sizes with little additional code.
To enable different use cases to specialize for different value types
and for shared/local memory, we use macro-templatized code generation
in the same manner as simplehash.h and sort_template.h.
Future commits will use this infrastructure for storing TIDs.
Patch by Masahiko Sawada and John Naylor, but a substantial amount of
credit is due to Andres Freund, whose proof-of-concept was a valuable
source of coding idioms and awareness of performance pitfalls, and
who reviewed earlier versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAfOZvmfR0j8VmZorZjL7RhTiQdVttNuC4W-Shdc2a-AA%40mail.gmail.com
This reverts commit eae7be600b, following a discussion with Tom Lane,
due to concerns that this impacts the decisions made by the planner for
the number of workers spawned based on the inlining and const-folding of
index expressions and predicate for cases that would have worked until
this commit.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/162802.1709746091@sss.pgh.pa.us
Backpatch-through: 12
Provide functions to test for Unicode properties, such as Alphabetic
or Cased. These functions use tables derived from Unicode data files,
similar to the tables for Unicode normalization or general category,
and those tables can be updated with the 'update-unicode' build
target.
Use Unicode properties to provide functions to test for regex
character classes, like 'punct' or 'alnum'.
Infrastructure in preparation for a builtin collation provider, and
may also be useful for other callers.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ff4c2f2f9c8fc7ca27c1c24ae37ecaeaeaff6b53.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite, Peter Eisentraut, Jeremy Schneider
The first argument of vshrq_n_s8 needs to be a signed vector type,
but it was passed unsigned. Clang is more lax with conversion, but
gcc needs a cast.
Fix by me, tested by Masahiko Sawada
Per buildfarm members splitfin, batta, widowbird, snakefly, parula,
massasauga
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240306074106.mg6w4koohdlworbs%40alap3.anarazel.de
As coded, the planner logic that calculates the number of parallel
workers to use for a parallel index build uses expressions and
predicates from the relcache, which are flattened for the planner by
eval_const_expressions().
As reported in the bug, an immutable parallel-unsafe function flattened
in the relcache would become a Const, which would be considered as
parallel-safe, even if the predicate or the expressions including the
function are not safe in parallel workers. Depending on the expressions
or predicate used, this could cause the parallel build to fail.
Tests are included that check parallel index builds with parallel-unsafe
predicate and expressions. Two routines are added to lsyscache.h to be
able to retrieve expressions and predicate of an index from its pg_index
data.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Author: Tender Wang
Reviewed-by: Jian He, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHewXN=UaAaNn9ruHDH3Os8kxLVmtWqbssnf=dZN_s9=evHUFA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12
The copy_file_range() system call is available on at least Linux and
FreeBSD, and asks the kernel to use efficient ways to copy ranges of a
file. Options available to the kernel include sharing block ranges
(similar to --clone mode), and pushing down block copies to the storage
layer.
For automated testing, see PG_TEST_PG_UPGRADE_MODE. (Perhaps in a later
commit we could consider setting this mode for one of the CI targets.)
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKe7Hb0-UNih8VD5UNZy5-ojxFb3Pr3xSBBL8qj2M2%3DdQ%40mail.gmail.com
When perminfoindex was added, it was just added at the end of the
block. It would make sense to keep it closer to more related fields.
In passing, also add an inline comment, like the other fields have.
(Other field reorderings and documentation improvements in
RangeTblEntry are being discussed, but it's better not to mix them
together.)
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/6c1fbccc-85c8-40d3-b08b-4f47f2093711%40eisentraut.org
pg_constraint.conwithoutoverlaps was recently added to support primary
keys and unique constraints with the WITHOUT OVERLAPS clause. An
upcoming patch provides the foreign-key side of this functionality,
but the syntax there is different and uses the keyword PERIOD. It
would make sense to use the same pg_constraint field for both of
these, but then we should pick a more general name that conveys "this
constraint has a temporal/period-related feature". conperiod works
for that and is nicely compact. Changing this now avoids possibly
having to introduce versioning into clients. Note there are still
some "without overlaps" variables left, which deal specifically with
the parsing of the primary key/unique constraint feature.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
Use GUC_ACTION_SAVE rather than GUC_ACTION_SET, necessary for working
with parallel query.
Now that the call requires more arguments, wrap the call in a new
function to avoid code duplication and offer a place for a comment.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E1rhJpO-0027Wf-9L@gemulon.postgresql.org
Presently, if an archive module's check_configured_cb callback
returns false, a generic WARNING message is emitted, which
unfortunately provides no actionable details about the reason why
the module is not configured. This commit introduces a macro that
archive module authors can use to add a DETAIL line to this WARNING
message.
Co-authored-by: Tung Nguyen
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4109578306242a7cd5661171647e11b2%40oss.nttdata.com
Auto-generated array types, multirange types, and relation rowtypes
are treated as dependent objects: they can't be dropped separately
from the base object, nor can they have their own ownership or
permissions. We previously felt that, for objects that are in an
extension, only the base object needs to be listed as an extension
member in pg_depend. While that's sufficient to prevent inappropriate
drops, it results in undesirable answers if someone asks whether a
dependent type belongs to the extension. It looks like the dependent
type is just some random separately-created object that happens to
depend on the base object. Notably, this results in postgres_fdw
concluding that expressions involving an array type are not shippable
to the remote server, even when the defining extension has been
whitelisted.
To fix, cause GenerateTypeDependencies to make extension dependencies
for dependent types as well as their base objects, and adjust
ExecAlterExtensionContentsStmt so that object addition and removal
operations recurse to dependent types. The latter change means that
pg_upgrade of a type-defining extension will end with the dependent
type(s) now also listed as extension members, even if they were
not that way in the source database. Normally we want pg_upgrade
to precisely reproduce the source extension's state, but it seems
desirable to make an exception here.
This is arguably a bug fix, but we can't back-patch it since it
causes changes in the expected contents of pg_depend. (Because
it does, I've bumped catversion, even though there's no change
in the immediate post-initdb catalog contents.)
Tom Lane and David Geier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4a847c55-489f-4e8d-a664-fc6b1cbe306f@gmail.com
The adminpack extension was only used to support pgAdmin III, which
in turn was declared EOL many years ago. Removing the extension also
allows us to remove functions from core as well which were only used
to support old version of adminpack.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACUmL5TraYBUBqDZBi1C+Re8_=SekqGYqYprj_W8wygQ8w@mail.gmail.com
The pid was originally used in error context of messages propagated
from parallel workers, but commit 292794f82b removed that. If the need
arises in the future, you can also get the pid with
"shm_mq_get_sender(pcxt->worker[i].error_mqh)->pid".
Remove IsBackgroundWorker, IsAutoVacuumLauncherProcess(),
IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess(), and IsLogicalSlotSyncWorker() in favor of
new Am*Process() macros that use MyBackendType. For consistency with
the existing Am*Process() macros.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/f3ecd4cb-85ee-4e54-8278-5fabfb3a4ed0@iki.fi
Now that BackendId was just another index into the proc array, it was
redundant with the 0-based proc numbers used in other places. Replace
all usage of backend IDs with proc numbers.
The only place where the term "backend id" remains is in a few pgstat
functions that expose backend IDs at the SQL level. Those IDs are now
in fact 0-based ProcNumbers too, but the documentation still calls
them "backend ids". That term still seems appropriate to describe what
the numbers are, so I let it be.
One user-visible effect is that pg_temp_0 is now a valid temp schema
name, for backend with ProcNumber 0.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/8171f1aa-496f-46a6-afc3-c46fe7a9b407@iki.fi
Previously, backend ID was an index into the ProcState array, in the
shared cache invalidation manager (sinvaladt.c). The entry in the
ProcState array was reserved at backend startup by scanning the array
for a free entry, and that was also when the backend got its backend
ID. Things become slightly simpler if we redefine backend ID to be the
index into the PGPROC array, and directly use it also as an index to
the ProcState array. This uses a little more memory, as we reserve a
few extra slots in the ProcState array for aux processes that don't
need them, but the simplicity is worth it.
Aux processes now also have a backend ID. This simplifies the
reservation of BackendStatusArray and ProcSignal slots.
You can now convert a backend ID into an index into the PGPROC array
simply by subtracting 1. We still use 0-based "pgprocnos" in various
places, for indexes into the PGPROC array, but the only difference now
is that backend IDs start at 1 while pgprocnos start at 0. (The next
commmit will get rid of the term "backend ID" altogether and make
everything 0-based.)
There is still a 'backendId' field in PGPROC, now part of 'vxid' which
encapsulates the backend ID and local transaction ID together. It's
needed for prepared xacts. For regular backends, the backendId is
always equal to pgprocno + 1, but for prepared xact PGPROC entries,
it's the ID of the original backend that processed the transaction.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Reid Thompson
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/8171f1aa-496f-46a6-afc3-c46fe7a9b407@iki.fi
In the past, FileRead() and FileWrite() used types based on the Unix
read() and write() functions from before C and POSIX standardization,
though not exactly (we had int for amount instead of unsigned). In
commit 2d4f1ba6 we changed to the appropriate standard C types, just
like the modern POSIX functions they wrap, but again not exactly: the
return type stayed as int. In theory, a ssize_t value could be returned
by the underlying call that is too large for an int.
That wasn't really a live bug, because we don't expect PostgreSQL code
to perform reads or writes of gigabytes, and OSes probably apply
internal caps smaller than that anyway. This change is done on the
principle that the return might as well follow the standard interfaces
consistently.
Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1672202.1703441340%40sss.pgh.pa.us
This commit switches pg_enc2gettext_tbl[] in encnames.c to use a
C99-designated initializer syntax.
pg_bind_textdomain_codeset() is simplified so as it is possible to do
a direct lookup at the gettext() array with a value of the enum pg_enc
rather than doing a loop through all its elements, as long as the
encoding value provided by GetDatabaseEncoding() is in the correct range
of supported encoding values. Note that PG_MULE_INTERNAL gains a value
in the array, pointing to NULL.
Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQT3caUbcCcszNewCCmMbCuyP7XNAm60J3ybd6PN5kH2Dw@mail.gmail.com
Writing correct code using atomic variables is often difficult due
to the memory barrier semantics (or lack thereof) of the underlying
operations. This commit introduces atomic read/write functions
with full barrier semantics to ease this cognitive load. For
example, some spinlocks protect a single value, and these new
functions make it easy to convert the value to an atomic variable
(thus eliminating the need for the spinlock) without modifying the
barrier semantics previously provided by the spinlock. Since these
functions may be less performant than the other atomic reads and
writes, they are not suitable for every use-case. However, using a
single atomic operation with full barrier semantics may be more
performant in cases where a separate explicit barrier would
otherwise be required.
The base implementations for these new functions are atomic
exchanges (for writes) and atomic fetch/adds with 0 (for reads).
These implementations can be overwritten with better architecture-
specific versions as they are discovered.
This commit leaves converting existing code to use these new
functions as a future exercise.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Yong Li, Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231110205128.GB1315705%40nathanxps13
This allows the target relation of MERGE to be an auto-updatable or
trigger-updatable view, and includes support for WITH CHECK OPTION,
security barrier views, and security invoker views.
A trigger-updatable view must have INSTEAD OF triggers for every type
of action (INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE) mentioned in the MERGE command.
An auto-updatable view must not have any INSTEAD OF triggers. Mixing
auto-update and trigger-update actions (i.e., having a partial set of
INSTEAD OF triggers) is not supported.
Rule-updatable views are also not supported, since there is no
rewriter support for non-SELECT rules with MERGE operations.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Jian He and Alvaro Herrera.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCVcB1g0nmxuEc-A+gGB0HnfcGQNGYH7gS=7rq0u0zOBXA@mail.gmail.com
This updates the following lookup arrays to use C99-designated
initializer syntax, indexed based on the enum pg_enc:
pg_enc2icu_tbl[]
pg_enc2name_tbl[]
pg_wchar_table[]
This is more readable, and removes problems with ordering mistakes as
this removes dependencies between the arrays and their lookup index in
the enum pg_enc. So, adding new encodings becomes easier, even if this
does not happen often.
Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio
Reviewed-by: Jian He, Japin Li
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQT3caUbcCcszNewCCmMbCuyP7XNAm60J3ybd6PN5kH2Dw@mail.gmail.com
More precisely, what we do here is make the SLRU cache sizes
configurable with new GUCs, so that sites with high concurrency and big
ranges of transactions in flight (resp. multixacts/subtransactions) can
benefit from bigger caches. In order for this to work with good
performance, two additional changes are made:
1. the cache is divided in "banks" (to borrow terminology from CPU
caches), and algorithms such as eviction buffer search only affect
one specific bank. This forestalls the problem that linear searching
for a specific buffer across the whole cache takes too long: we only
have to search the specific bank, whose size is small. This work is
authored by Andrey Borodin.
2. Change the locking regime for the SLRU banks, so that each bank uses
a separate LWLock. This allows for increased scalability. This work
is authored by Dilip Kumar. (A part of this was previously committed as
d172b717c6f4.)
Special care is taken so that the algorithms that can potentially
traverse more than one bank release one bank's lock before acquiring the
next. This should happen rarely, but particularly clog.c's group commit
feature needed code adjustment to cope with this. I (Álvaro) also added
lots of comments to make sure the design is sound.
The new GUCs match the names introduced by bcdfa5f2e2 in the
pg_stat_slru view.
The default values for these parameters are similar to the previous
sizes of each SLRU. commit_ts, clog and subtrans accept value 0, which
means to adjust by dividing shared_buffers by 512 (so 2MB for every 1GB
of shared_buffers), with a cap of 8MB. (A new slru.c function
SimpleLruAutotuneBuffers() was added to support this.) The cap was
previously 1MB for clog, so for sites with more than 512MB of shared
memory the total memory used increases, which is likely a good tradeoff.
However, other SLRUs (notably multixact ones) retain smaller sizes and
don't support a configured value of 0. These values based on
shared_buffers may need to be revisited, but that's an easy change.
There was some resistance to adding these new GUCs: it would be better
to adjust to memory pressure automatically somehow, for example by
stealing memory from shared_buffers (where the caches can grow and
shrink naturally). However, doing that seems to be a much larger
project and one which has made virtually no progress in several years,
and because this is such a pain point for so many users, here we take
the pragmatic approach.
Author: Andrey Borodin <x4mmm@yandex-team.ru>
Author: Dilip Kumar <dilipbalaut@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amul Sul, Gilles Darold, Anastasia Lubennikova,
Ivan Lazarev, Robert Haas, Thomas Munro, Tomas Vondra,
Yura Sokolov, Васильев Дмитрий (Dmitry Vasiliev).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2BEC2B3F-9B61-4C1D-9FB5-5FAB0F05EF86@yandex-team.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-vzDvNz=ExGXz6gdyjtzGixKSqs0mKHMmaQ8sOSEFZ33A@mail.gmail.com
There isn't a lot of user demand for AIX support, we have a bunch of
hacks to work around AIX-specific compiler bugs and idiosyncrasies,
and no one has stepped up to the plate to properly maintain it.
Remove support for AIX to get rid of that maintenance overhead. It's
still supported for stable versions.
The acute issue that triggered this decision was that after commit
8af2565248, the AIX buildfarm members have been hitting this
assertion:
TRAP: failed Assert("(uintptr_t) buffer == TYPEALIGN(PG_IO_ALIGN_SIZE, buffer)"), File: "md.c", Line: 472, PID: 2949728
Apperently the "pg_attribute_aligned(a)" attribute doesn't work on AIX
for values larger than PG_IO_ALIGN_SIZE, for a static const variable.
That could be worked around, but we decided to just drop the AIX support
instead.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20240224172345.32@rfd.leadboat.com
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Noah Misch, Thomas Munro
The new names are intended to match those in an upcoming patch that adds
a few GUCs to configure the SLRU buffer sizes.
Backwards compatibility concern: this changes the accepted names for
function pg_stat_slru_rest(). Since this function recognizes "any other
string" as a request to reset the entry for "other", this means that
calling it with the old names would silently reset "other" instead of
doing nothing or throwing an error.
Reviewed-by: Andrey M. Borodin <x4mmm@yandex-team.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202402261616.dlriae7b6emv@alvherre.pgsql
A recent commit added a copy_function member to the
dshash_parameters struct, but it missed updating a couple of
comments that refer to the function pointer members of this struct.
One of those comments also refers to a tranche_name member and non-
arg variants of the function pointer members, all of which were
either removed during development or removed shortly after dshash
table support was committed.
Oversights in commits 8c0d7bafad, d7694fc148, and 42a1de3013.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240227045213.GA2329190%40nathanxps13
object_classes[] provided unnecessary indirection between catalog OIDs
and the enum ObjectClass when calling add_object_address(). This array
has been originally introduced in 30ec31604d and was useful because not
all relation OIDs were compile-time constants back then, which has not
been the case for a long time now for all the elements of ObjectClass.
This commit removes object_classes[], switching to the catalog OIDs
when calling add_object_address(). This shaves some code while saving
in maintenance because it was necessary to maintain the enum ObjectClass
and the array in sync when adding new object types.
Reported-by: Jeff Davis
Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio
Reviewed-by: Jian He, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQT3caUbcCcszNewCCmMbCuyP7XNAm60J3ybd6PN5kH2Dw@mail.gmail.com
Many modern compilers are able to optimize function calls to functions
where the parameters of the called function match a leading subset of
the calling function's parameters. If there are no instructions in the
calling function after the function is called, then the compiler is free
to avoid any stack frame setup and implement the function call as a
"jmp" rather than a "call". This is called sibling call optimization.
Here we adjust the memory allocation functions in mcxt.c to allow this
optimization. This requires moving some responsibility into the memory
context implementations themselves. It's now the responsibility of the
MemoryContext to check for malloc failures. This is good as it both
allows the sibling call optimization, but also because most small and
medium allocations won't call malloc and just allocate memory to an
existing block. That can't fail, so checking for NULLs in that case
isn't required.
Also, traditionally it's been the responsibility of palloc and the other
allocation functions in mcxt.c to check for invalid allocation size
requests. Here we also move the responsibility of checking that into the
MemoryContext. This isn't to allow the sibling call optimization, but
more because most of our allocators handle large allocations separately
and we can just add the size check when doing large allocations. We no
longer check this for non-large allocations at all.
To make checking the allocation request sizes and ERROR handling easier,
add some helper functions to mcxt.c for the allocators to use.
Author: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210719195950.gavgs6ujzmjfaiig@alap3.anarazel.de
Presently, string keys are not well-supported for dshash tables.
The dshash code always copies key_size bytes into new entries'
keys, and dshash.h only provides compare and hash functions that
forward to memcmp() and tag_hash(), both of which do not stop at
the first NUL. This means that callers must pad string keys so
that the data beyond the first NUL does not adversely affect the
results of copying, comparing, and hashing the keys.
To better support string keys in dshash tables, this commit does
a couple things:
* A new copy_function field is added to the dshash_parameters
struct. This function pointer specifies how the key should be
copied into new table entries. For example, we only want to copy
up to the first NUL byte for string keys. A dshash_memcpy()
helper function is provided and used for all existing in-tree
dshash tables without string keys.
* A set of helper functions for string keys are provided. These
helper functions forward to strcmp(), strcpy(), and
string_hash(), all of which ignore data beyond the first NUL.
This commit also adjusts the DSM registry's dshash table to use the
new helper functions for string keys.
Reviewed-by: Andy Fan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240119215941.GA1322079%40nathanxps13
Similarly to tables and indexes, these functions are able to open
relations with a sequence relkind, which is useful to make a distinction
with the other relation kinds. Previously, commands/sequence.c used a
mix of table_{close,open}() and relation_{close,open}() routines when
manipulating sequence relations, so this clarifies the code.
A direct effect of this change is to align the error messages produced
when attempting DDLs for sequences on relations with an unexpected
relkind, like a table or an index with ALTER SEQUENCE, providing an
extra error detail about the relkind of the relation used in the DDL
query.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZWlohtKAs0uVVpZ3@paquier.xyz
The new facility makes it easier to optimize bulk loading, as the
logic for buffering, WAL-logging, and syncing the relation only needs
to be implemented once. It's also less error-prone: We have had a
number of bugs in how a relation is fsync'd - or not - at the end of a
bulk loading operation. By centralizing that logic to one place, we
only need to write it correctly once.
The new facility is faster for small relations: Instead of of calling
smgrimmedsync(), we register the fsync to happen at next checkpoint,
which avoids the fsync latency. That can make a big difference if you
are e.g. restoring a schema-only dump with lots of relations.
It is also slightly more efficient with large relations, as the WAL
logging is performed multiple pages at a time. That avoids some WAL
header overhead. The sorted GiST index build did that already, this
moves the buffering to the new facility.
The changes to pageinspect GiST test needs an explanation: Before this
patch, the sorted GiST index build set the LSN on every page to the
special GistBuildLSN value, not the LSN of the WAL record, even though
they were WAL-logged. There was no particular need for it, it just
happened naturally when we wrote out the pages before WAL-logging
them. Now we WAL-log the pages first, like in B-tree build, so the
pages are stamped with the record's real LSN. When the build is not
WAL-logged, we still use GistBuildLSN. To make the test output
predictable, use an unlogged index.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/30e8f366-58b3-b239-c521-422122dd5150%40iki.fi
By enabling slot synchronization, all the failover logical replication
slots on the primary (assuming configurations are appropriate) are
automatically created on the physical standbys and are synced
periodically. The slot sync worker on the standby server pings the primary
server at regular intervals to get the necessary failover logical slots
information and create/update the slots locally. The slots that no longer
require synchronization are automatically dropped by the worker.
The nap time of the worker is tuned according to the activity on the
primary. The slot sync worker waits for some time before the next
synchronization, with the duration varying based on whether any slots were
updated during the last cycle.
A new parameter sync_replication_slots enables or disables this new
process.
On promotion, the slot sync worker is shut down by the startup process to
drop any temporary slots acquired by the slot sync worker and to prevent
the worker from trying to fetch the failover slots.
A functionality to allow logical walsenders to wait for the physical will
be done in a subsequent commit.
Author: Shveta Malik, Hou Zhijie based on design inputs by Masahiko Sawada and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Bertrand Drouvot, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Ajin Cherian, Nisha Moond, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
This is part of an effort to reduce the number of special cases in the
automatically generated node support functions.
Allegedly, only certain fields of the Constraint node are valid based
on contype. But this has historically not been kept up to date in the
read/write functions. The Constraint node is only used for debugging
DDL statements, so there are no strong requirements for its output,
and there is no enforcement for its correctness. (There was no read
support before a6bc3301925.) Commits e7a552f303 and abf46ad9c7 are
examples of where omissions were fixed.
This patch just removes the custom read/write implementations for the
Constraint node type. Now we just output all the fields, which is a
bit more than before, but at least we don't have to maintain these
functions anymore. Also, we lose the string representation of the
contype field, but for this marginal use case that seems tolerable.
This patch also changes the documentation of the Constraint struct to
put less emphasis on grouping fields by constraint type but rather
document for each field how it's used.
Reviewed-by: Paul Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4b27fc50-8cd6-46f5-ab20-88dbaadca645@eisentraut.org
This commit switches the handling of the conflict cause strings for
replication slots to use a table rather than being explicitly listed,
using a C99-designated initializer syntax for the array elements. This
makes the whole more readable while easing future maintenance with less
areas to update when adding a new conflict reason.
This is similar to 74a7306310, but the scale of the change is smaller
as there are less conflict causes than LWLock builtin tranche names.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACUxSLA91QGFrJsWNKs58KXb1C03mbuwKmzqqmoAKLwJaw@mail.gmail.com
Commit 6b80394781 introduced integer comparison functions designed
to be as efficient as possible while avoiding overflow. This
commit makes use of these functions in many of the in-tree qsort()
comparators to help ensure transitivity. Many of these comparator
functions should also see a small performance boost.
Author: Mats Kindahl
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Fabrízio de Royes Mello
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2B14426g2Wa9QuUpmakwPxXFWG_1FaY0AsApkvcTBy-YfS6uaw%40mail.gmail.com
This commit adds integer comparison functions that are designed to
be as efficient as possible while avoiding overflow. A follow-up
commit will make use of these functions in many of the in-tree
qsort() comparators. The new functions are not better in all cases
(e.g., when the comparator function is inlined), so it is important
to consider the context before using them.
Author: Mats Kindahl
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas, Andres Freund, Thomas Munro, Andrey Borodin, Fabrízio de Royes Mello
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2B14426g2Wa9QuUpmakwPxXFWG_1FaY0AsApkvcTBy-YfS6uaw%40mail.gmail.com
A child table can specify a compression or storage method different
from its parents. This was previously an error. (But this was
inconsistently enforced because for example the settings could be
changed later using ALTER TABLE.) This now also allows an explicit
override if multiple parents have different compression or storage
settings, which was previously an error that could not be overridden.
The compression and storage properties remains unchanged in a child
inheriting from parent(s) after its creation, i.e., when using ALTER
TABLE ... INHERIT. (This is not changed.)
Before this change, the error detail would mention the first pair of
conflicting parent compression or storage methods. But with this
change it waits till the child specification is considered by which
time we may have encountered many such conflicting pairs. Hence the
error detail after this change does not include the conflicting
compression/storage methods. Those can be obtained from parent
definitions if necessary. The code to maintain list of all
conflicting methods or even the first conflicting pair does not seem
worth the convenience it offers. This change is inline with what we
do with conflicting default values.
Before this commit, the specified storage method could be stored in
ColumnDef::storage (CREATE TABLE ... LIKE) or ColumnDef::storage_name
(CREATE TABLE ...). This caused the MergeChildAttribute() and
MergeInheritedAttribute() to ignore a storage method specified in the
child definition since it looked only at ColumnDef::storage. This
commit removes ColumnDef::storage and instead uses
ColumnDef::storage_name to save any storage method specification. This
is similar to how compression method specification is handled.
Author: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/24656cec-d6ef-4d15-8b5b-e8dfc9c833a7@eisentraut.org
This commit adds timeout that is expected to be used as a prevention
of long-running queries. Any session within the transaction will be
terminated after spanning longer than this timeout.
However, this timeout is not applied to prepared transactions.
Only transactions with user connections are affected.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAhFRxiQsRs2Eq5kCo9nXE3HTugsAAJdSQSmxncivebAxdmBjQ%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Andrey Borodin <amborodin@acm.org>
Author: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com>
Author: Junwang Zhao <zhjwpku@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Nikolay Samokhvalov <samokhvalov@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: bt23nguyent <bt23nguyent@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Yuhang Qiu <iamqyh@gmail.com>
Thanks to commit 3b00fdba9f, this check in the SIGTERM handler for
the startup process is now obsolete and can be removed. Instead of
leaving around the dead function write_stderr_signal_safe(), I've
opted to just remove it for now.
This partially reverts commit 97550c0711.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Noah Misch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231121212008.GA3742740%40nathanxps13
This commit introduces a new SQL function pg_sync_replication_slots()
which is used to synchronize the logical replication slots from the
primary server to the physical standby so that logical replication can be
resumed after a failover or planned switchover.
A new 'synced' flag is introduced in pg_replication_slots view, indicating
whether the slot has been synchronized from the primary server. On a
standby, synced slots cannot be dropped or consumed, and any attempt to
perform logical decoding on them will result in an error.
The logical replication slots on the primary can be synchronized to the
hot standby by using the 'failover' parameter of
pg-create-logical-replication-slot(), or by using the 'failover' option of
CREATE SUBSCRIPTION during slot creation, and then calling
pg_sync_replication_slots() on standby. For the synchronization to work,
it is mandatory to have a physical replication slot between the primary
and the standby aka 'primary_slot_name' should be configured on the
standby, and 'hot_standby_feedback' must be enabled on the standby. It is
also necessary to specify a valid 'dbname' in the 'primary_conninfo'.
If a logical slot is invalidated on the primary, then that slot on the
standby is also invalidated.
If a logical slot on the primary is valid but is invalidated on the
standby, then that slot is dropped but will be recreated on the standby in
the next pg_sync_replication_slots() call provided the slot still exists
on the primary server. It is okay to recreate such slots as long as these
are not consumable on standby (which is the case currently). This
situation may occur due to the following reasons:
- The 'max_slot_wal_keep_size' on the standby is insufficient to retain
WAL records from the restart_lsn of the slot.
- 'primary_slot_name' is temporarily reset to null and the physical slot
is removed.
The slot synchronization status on the standby can be monitored using the
'synced' column of pg_replication_slots view.
A functionality to automatically synchronize slots by a background worker
and allow logical walsenders to wait for the physical will be done in
subsequent commits.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Shveta Malik, Ajin Cherian based on an earlier version by Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Bertrand Drouvot, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Nisha Moond, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
This reverts commit 95fb5b4902, for reasons similar to what led to
1aa8324b81. In this case, the callback was called once per row, which
is less worse than the previous callback introduced for COPY TO called
once per argument for each row, still the patch set discussed to plug in
custom routines to the COPY paths would be able to know which subroutine
to use depending on its CopyFromState, so this led to a suboptimal
approach at the end.
For now, this part is reverted to consider better which approach to use.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240206014125.qofww7ew3dx3v3uk@awork3.anarazel.de
If available, read directly from WAL buffers, avoiding the need to go
through the filesystem. Only for physical replication for now, but can
be expanded to other callers.
In preparation for replicating unflushed WAL data.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXKKK%3DwbiG5_t6dGao5GoecMwRkhr7GjVBM_jg54%2BNa%3DQ%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Nathan Bossart, Dilip Kumar, Nitin Jadhav, Melih Mutlu, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Commit 5579388d removed code that supplied a fallback implementation of
getaddrinfo(), which was dead code on modern systems. One tiny piece of
the removed code was still doing something useful on Windows, though:
that OS's own gai_strerror()/gai_strerrorA() function returns a pointer
to a static buffer that it overwrites each time, so it's not
thread-safe. In rare circumstances, a multi-threaded client program
could get an incorrect or corrupted error message.
Restore the replacement gai_strerror() function, though now that it's
only for Windows we can put it into a win32-specific file and cut it
down to the errors that Windows documents. The error messages here are
taken from FreeBSD, because Windows' own messages seemed too verbose.
Back-patch to 16.
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKz%2BF9d2PTiXwfYV7qJw%2BWg2jzACgSDgPizUw7UG%3Di58A%40mail.gmail.com
Commit 5b2f4afffe refactored find_other_exec() and in the process
created pipe_read_line() into a static routine for reading a single
line of output, aimed at reading version numbers. Commit a7e8ece41
later exposed it externally in order to read a postgresql.conf GUC
using "postgres -C ..". Further, f06b1c598 also made use of it for
reading a version string much like find_other_exec(). The internal
variable remained "pgver", even when used for other purposes.
Since the function requires passing a buffer and its size, and at
most size - 1 bytes will be read via fgets(), there is a truncation
risk when using this for reading GUCs (like how pg_rewind does,
though the risk in this case is marginal).
To keep this as generic functionality for reading a line from a pipe,
this refactors pipe_read_line() into returning an allocated buffer
containing all of the line to remove the risk of silent truncation.
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: John Naylor <johncnaylorls@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DEDF73CE-D528-49A3-9089-B3592FD671A9@yesql.se
Various int variables were compared to macros that are of type size_t,
which caused -Wsign-compare warnings in cpluspluscheck. Change those
to size_t, which also better describes their purpose.
Per report from Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/486847dc-6de5-464a-938e-bac98ec2438b%40eisentraut.org
The new concurrency model proposed for slru.c to improve performance
does not include any single lock that would coordinate processes
doing concurrent reads/writes on SlruShared->latest_page_number.
We can instead use atomic reads and writes for that variable.
Author: Dilip Kumar <dilipbalaut@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrey M. Borodin <x4mmm@yandex-team.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-vzDvNz=ExGXz6gdyjtzGixKSqs0mKHMmaQ8sOSEFZ33A@mail.gmail.com
The standalone functions fasthash{32,64} use length for two purposes:
how many bytes to hash, and how to perturb the internal seed.
Developers using the incremental interface may not know the length
ahead of time (e.g. for C strings). In this case, it's advised to
pass length to the finalizer, but initialization still needed some
length up front, in the form of a placeholder macro.
Separate the concerns by having the standalone functions perturb the
internal seed themselves from their own length parameter, allowing
to remove "len" from fasthash_init(), as well as the placeholder macro.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANWCAZbTUk2LOyhsFo33gjLyLAHZ7ucXCi5K9u%3D%2BPtnTShDKtw%40mail.gmail.com
This patch provides support for regular (non-replication) connections in
libpqrcv_connect(). This can be used to execute SQL statements on the
primary server without starting a walsender.
A new API libpqrcv_get_dbname_from_conninfo() is also added to extract the
database name from the given connection-info.
Note that this patch doesn't change any existing functionality but later
patches implementing the slot synchronization will use this functionality
to connect to the primary server to fetch required slot information.
Author: Shveta Malik, Hou Zhijie, Ajin Cherian
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Dilip Kumar, Masahiko Sawada, Nisha Moond, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
CopyReadAttributes{CSV,Text}() are used to parse lines for text and CSV
format. This reduces the number of "if" branches that need to be
checked when parsing fields in CSV and text mode when dealing with a
COPY FROM, something that can become more noticeable with more
attributes and more lines to process.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same author.
Author: Sutou Kouhei
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231204.153548.2126325458835528809.kou@clear-code.com
After calling smgropen(), it was not clear how long you could continue
to use the result, because various code paths including cache
invalidation could call smgrclose(), which freed the memory.
Guarantee that the object won't be destroyed until the end of the
current transaction, or in recovery, the commit/abort record that
destroys the underlying storage.
smgrclose() is now just an alias for smgrrelease(). It closes files
and forgets all state except the rlocator, but keeps the SMgrRelation
object valid.
A new smgrdestroy() function is used by rare places that know there
should be no other references to the SMgrRelation.
The short version:
* smgrclose() is now just an alias for smgrrelease(). It releases
resources, but doesn't destroy until EOX
* smgrdestroy() now frees memory, and should rarely be used.
Existing code should be unaffected, but it is now possible for code that
has an SMgrRelation object to use it repeatedly during a transaction as
long as the storage hasn't been physically dropped. Such code would
normally hold a lock on the relation.
This also replaces the "ownership" mechanism of SMgrRelations with a
pin counter. An SMgrRelation can now be "pinned", which prevents it
from being destroyed at end of transaction. There can be multiple pins
on the same SMgrRelation. In practice, the pin mechanism is only used
by the relcache, so there cannot be more than one pin on the same
SMgrRelation. Except with swap_relation_files XXX
Author: Thomas Munro, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CA%2BhUKGJ8NTvqLHz6dqbQnt2c8XCki4r2QvXjBQcXpVwxTY_pvA@mail.gmail.com
This commit introduces a new subscription option named 'failover', which
provides users with the ability to set the failover property of the
replication slot on the publisher when creating or altering a
subscription.
This uses the replication commands introduced by commit 7329240437 to
enable the failover option for a logical replication slot.
If the failover option is set to true, the associated replication slots
(i.e. the main slot and the table sync slots) in the upstream database are
enabled to be synchronized to the standbys. Note that the capability to
sync the replication slots will be added in subsequent commits.
Thanks to Masahiko Sawada for the design inputs.
Author: Shveta Malik, Hou Zhijie, Ajin Cherian
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Dilip Kumar, Masahiko Sawada, Nisha Moond, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
This function requires simd.h, which is a rather large dependency
for a widely-used header file like pg_wchar.h. Furthermore, there
is a report of a third-party tool that is struggling to use
pg_wchar.h due to its dependence on simd.h (presumably because
simd.h uses several intrinsics). Moving the function to the much
less popular ascii.h resolves these issues for now.
This commit is back-patched for the benefit of the aforementioned
third-party tool. The simd.h dependency was only added in v16,
but we've opted to back-patch to v15 so that is_valid_ascii() lives
in the same file for all versions where it exists. This could
break existing third-party code that uses the function, but we
couldn't find any examples of such code. It should be possible to
fix any code that this commit breaks by including ascii.h in the
file that uses is_valid_ascii().
Author: Jubilee Young
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, John Naylor, Andres Freund, Eric Ridge
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPNHn3oKJJxMsYq%2BqLYzVJOFrUcOr4OF1EC-KtFT-qh8nOOOtQ%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 15
This adds a new "Memory:" line under the "Planning:" group (which
currently only has "Buffers:") when the MEMORY option is specified.
In order to make the reporting reasonably accurate, we create a separate
memory context for planner activities, to be used only when this option
is given. The total amount of memory allocated by that context is
reported as "allocated"; we subtract memory in the context's freelists
from that and report that result as "used". We use
MemoryContextStatsInternal() to obtain the quantities.
The code structure to show buffer usage during planning was not in
amazing shape, so I (Álvaro) modified the patch a bit to clean that up
in passing.
Author: Ashutosh Bapat
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Andrey Lepikhov, Jian He, Andy Fan
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAExHW5sZA=5LJ_ZPpRO-w09ck8z9p7eaYAqq3Ks9GDfhrxeWBw@mail.gmail.com
This commit implements a new replication command called
ALTER_REPLICATION_SLOT and a corresponding walreceiver API function named
walrcv_alter_slot. Additionally, the CREATE_REPLICATION_SLOT command has
been extended to support the failover option.
These new additions allow the modification of the failover property of a
replication slot on the publisher. A subsequent commit will make use of
these commands in subscription commands and will add the tests as well to
cover the functionality added/changed by this commit.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Shveta Malik
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Dilip Kumar, Masahiko Sawada, Nisha Moond, Kuroda, Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
Since commit a4ccc1cef, the 'node' and 'alloc_tuple_size' fields of
the ReorderBufferTupleBuf structure are no longer used. This leaves
only the 'tuple' field in the structure. Since keeping a single-field
structure makes little sense, the ReorderBufferTupleBuf is removed
entirely. The code is refactored accordingly.
No back-patching since these are ABI changes in an exposed structure
and functions, and there would be some risk of breaking extensions.
Author: Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Masahiko Sawada, Reid Thompson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoCvnuxiXXfRecp7g9+CeC35POQfhuQeJFr7_9u_Q5jc_Q@mail.gmail.com
Formerly, these were only supported in to_char(), but there seems
little reason for that restriction. We should at least have enough
support to permit round-tripping the output of to_char().
In that spirit, TZ accepts either zone abbreviations or numeric
(HH or HH:MM) offsets, which are the cases that to_char() can output.
In an ideal world we'd make it take full zone names too, but
that seems like it'd introduce an unreasonable amount of ambiguity,
since the rules for POSIX-spec zone names are so lax.
OF is a subset of this, accepting only HH or HH:MM.
One small benefit of this improvement is that we can simplify
jsonpath's executeDateTimeMethod function, which no longer needs
to consider the HH and HH:MM cases separately. Moreover, letting
it accept zone abbreviations means it will accept "Z" to mean UTC,
which is emitted by JSON.stringify() for example.
Patch by me, reviewed by Aleksander Alekseev and Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1681086.1686673242@sss.pgh.pa.us
This commit implements ithe jsonpath .bigint(), .boolean(),
.date(), .decimal([precision [, scale]]), .integer(), .number(),
.string(), .time(), .time_tz(), .timestamp(), and .timestamp_tz()
methods.
.bigint() converts the given JSON string or a numeric value to
the bigint type representation.
.boolean() converts the given JSON string, numeric, or boolean
value to the boolean type representation. In the numeric case, only
integers are allowed. We use the parse_bool() backend function
to convert a string to a bool.
.decimal([precision [, scale]]) converts the given JSON string
or a numeric value to the numeric type representation. If precision
and scale are provided for .decimal(), then it is converted to the
equivalent numeric typmod and applied to the numeric number.
.integer() and .number() convert the given JSON string or a
numeric value to the int4 and numeric type representation.
.string() uses the datatype's output function to convert numeric
and various date/time types to the string representation.
The JSON string representing a valid date/time is converted to the
specific date or time type representation using jsonpath .date(),
.time(), .time_tz(), .timestamp(), .timestamp_tz() methods. The
changes use the infrastructure of the .datetime() method and perform
the datatype conversion as appropriate. Unlike the .datetime()
method, none of these methods accept a format template and use ISO
DateTime format instead. However, except for .date(), the
date/time related methods take an optional precision to adjust the
fractional seconds.
Jeevan Chalke, reviewed by Peter Eisentraut and Andrew Dunstan.
This commit adds the failover property to the replication slot. The
failover property indicates whether the slot will be synced to the standby
servers, enabling the resumption of corresponding logical replication
after failover. But note that this commit does not yet include the
capability to sync the replication slot; the subsequent commits will add
that capability.
A new optional parameter 'failover' is added to the
pg_create_logical_replication_slot() function. We will also enable to set
'failover' option for slots via the subscription commands in the
subsequent commits.
The value of the 'failover' flag is displayed as part of
pg_replication_slots view.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Shveta Malik, Ajin Cherian
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bertrand Drouvot, Dilip Kumar, Masahiko Sawada, Nisha Moond, Kuroda, Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/514f6f2f-6833-4539-39f1-96cd1e011f23@enterprisedb.com
9e2d870119 enabled the COPY command to skip malformed data, however
there was no visibility into how many tuples were actually skipped
during the COPY FROM.
This commit adds a new "tuples_skipped" column to
pg_stat_progress_copy view to report the number of tuples that were
skipped because they contain malformed data.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d12fd8c99adcae2744212cb23feff6ed%40oss.nttdata.com
Add WITHOUT OVERLAPS clause to PRIMARY KEY and UNIQUE constraints.
These are backed by GiST indexes instead of B-tree indexes, since they
are essentially exclusion constraints with = for the scalar parts of
the key and && for the temporal part.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
This adds a Node *escontext parameter to it and a bunch of functions
downstream to it, replacing any ereport()s in that path by either
errsave() or ereturn() as appropriate. This also adds code to those
functions where necessary to return early upon encountering a soft
error.
The changes here are mainly intended to suppress errors in the
functions of jsonfuncs.c. Functions in any external modules, such as
arrayfuncs.c, that those functions may in turn call are not changed
here based on the assumption that the various checks in jsonfuncs.c
functions should ensure that only values that are structurally valid
get passed to the functions in those external modules. An exception
is made for domain_check() to allow handling domain constraint
violation errors softly.
For testing, this adds a function jsonb_populate_record_valid(),
which returns true if jsonb_populate_record() would finish without
causing an error for the provided JSON object, false otherwise. Note
that jsonb_populate_record() internally calls populate_record(),
which in turn uses populate_record_field().
Extracted from a much larger patch to add SQL/JSON query functions.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund,
Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers,
Zihong Yu, Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby,
Álvaro Herrera, Jian He, Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqHROpf9e644D8BRqYvaAPmgBZVup-xKMDPk-nd4EpgzHw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
This adjusts the code for CoerceViaIO and CoerceToDomain expression
nodes to handle errors softly.
For CoerceViaIo, this adds a new ExprEvalStep opcode
EEOP_IOCOERCE_SAFE, which is implemented in the new accompanying
function ExecEvalCoerceViaIOSafe(). The only difference from
EEOP_IOCOERCE's inline implementation is that the input function
receives an ErrorSaveContext via the function's
FunctionCallInfo.context, which it can use to handle errors softly.
For CoerceToDomain, this simply entails replacing the ereport() in
ExecEvalConstraintNotNull() and ExecEvalConstraintCheck() by
errsave() passing it the ErrorSaveContext passed in the expression's
ExprEvalStep.
In both cases, the ErrorSaveContext to be used is passed by setting
ExprState.escontext to point to it before calling ExecInitExprRec()
on the expression tree whose errors are to be handled softly.
Note that there's no functional change as of this commit as no call
site of ExecInitExprRec() has been changed. This is intended for
implementing new SQL/JSON expression nodes in future commits.
Extracted from a much larger patch to add SQL/JSON query functions.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund,
Alexander Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers,
Zihong Yu, Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby,
Álvaro Herrera, Jian He, Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqHROpf9e644D8BRqYvaAPmgBZVup-xKMDPk-nd4EpgzHw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
Until now PostgreSQL has not been very smart about optimizing away IS
NOT NULL base quals on columns defined as NOT NULL. The evaluation of
these needless quals adds overhead. Ordinarily, anyone who came
complaining about that would likely just have been told to not include
the qual in their query if it's not required. However, a recent bug
report indicates this might not always be possible.
Bug 17540 highlighted that when we optimize Min/Max aggregates the IS NOT
NULL qual that the planner adds to make the rewritten plan ignore NULLs
can cause issues with poor index choice. That particular case
demonstrated that other quals, especially ones where no statistics are
available to allow the planner a chance at estimating an approximate
selectivity for can result in poor index choice due to cheap startup paths
being prefered with LIMIT 1.
Here we take generic approach to fixing this by having the planner check
for NOT NULL columns and just have the planner remove these quals (when
they're not needed) for all queries, not just when optimizing Min/Max
aggregates.
Additionally, here we also detect IS NULL quals on a NOT NULL column and
transform that into a gating qual so that we don't have to perform the
scan at all. This also works for join relations when the Var is not
nullable by any outer join.
This also helps with the self-join removal work as it must replace
strict join quals with IS NOT NULL quals to ensure equivalence with the
original query.
Author: David Rowley, Richard Guo, Andy Fan
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqg6XZDhYRPz0zgOcevSMo0d3vxA9DvHrZtKfqO30WTnw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17540-7aa1855ad5ec18b4%40postgresql.org
Injection points are a new facility that makes possible for developers
to run custom code in pre-defined code paths. Its goal is to provide
ways to design and run advanced tests, for cases like:
- Race conditions, where processes need to do actions in a controlled
ordered manner.
- Forcing a state, like an ERROR, FATAL or even PANIC for OOM, to force
recovery, etc.
- Arbitrary sleeps.
This implements some basics, and there are plans to extend it more in
the future depending on what's required. Hence, this commit adds a set
of routines in the backend that allows developers to attach, detach and
run injection points:
- A code path calling an injection point can be declared with the macro
INJECTION_POINT(name).
- InjectionPointAttach() and InjectionPointDetach() to respectively
attach and detach a callback to/from an injection point. An injection
point name is registered in a shmem hash table with a library name and a
function name, which will be used to load the callback attached to an
injection point when its code path is run.
Injection point names are just strings, so as an injection point can be
declared and run by out-of-core extensions and modules, with callbacks
defined in external libraries.
This facility is hidden behind a dedicated switch for ./configure and
meson, disabled by default.
Note that backends use a local cache to store callbacks already loaded,
cleaning up their cache if a callback has found to be removed on a
best-effort basis. This could be refined further but any tests but what
we have here was fine with the tests I've written while implementing
these backend APIs.
Author: Michael Paquier, with doc suggestions from Ashutosh Bapat.
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat, Nathan Bossart, Álvaro Herrera, Dilip
Kumar, Amul Sul, Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZTiV8tn_MIb_H2rE@paquier.xyz
When evaluating a query with a multi-column GROUP BY clause, we can minimize
sort operations or avoid them if we synchronize the order of GROUP BY clauses
with the ORDER BY sort clause or sort order, which comes from the underlying
query tree. Grouping does not imply any ordering, so we can compare
the keys in arbitrary order, and a Hash Agg leverages this. But for Group Agg,
we simply compared keys in the order specified in the query. This commit
explores alternative ordering of the keys, trying to find a cheaper one.
The ordering of group keys may interact with other parts of the query, some of
which may not be known while planning the grouping. For example, there may be
an explicit ORDER BY clause or some other ordering-dependent operation higher up
in the query, and using the same ordering may allow using either incremental
sort or even eliminating the sort entirely.
The patch always keeps the ordering specified in the query, assuming the user
might have additional insights.
This introduces a new GUC enable_group_by_reordering so that the optimization
may be disabled if needed.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7c79e6a5-8597-74e8-0671-1c39d124c9d6%40sigaev.ru
Author: Andrei Lepikhov, Teodor Sigaev
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Claudio Freire, Gavin Flower, Dmitry Dolgov
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Pavel Borisov, David Rowley, Zhihong Yu
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Alexander Korotkov, Richard Guo, Alena Rybakina
These support functions will transform expressions with constant
range values into direct comparisons on the range bound values,
which are frequently better-optimizable. The transformation is
skipped however if it would require double evaluation of a
volatile or expensive element expression.
Along the way, add the range opfamily OID to range typcache entries,
since load_rangetype_info has to compute that anyway and it seems
silly to duplicate the work later.
Kim Johan Andersson and Jian He, reviewed by Laurenz Albe
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/94f64d1f-b8c0-b0c5-98bc-0793a34e0851@kimmet.dk
Presently, the most straightforward way for a shared library to use
shared memory is to request it at server startup via a
shmem_request_hook, which requires specifying the library in
shared_preload_libraries. Alternatively, the library can create a
dynamic shared memory (DSM) segment, but absent a shared location
to store the segment's handle, other backends cannot use it. This
commit introduces a registry for DSM segments so that these other
backends can look up existing segments with a library-specified
string. This allows libraries to easily use shared memory without
needing to request it at server startup.
The registry is accessed via the new GetNamedDSMSegment() function.
This function handles allocating the segment and initializing it
via a provided callback. If another backend already created and
initialized the segment, it simply attaches the segment.
GetNamedDSMSegment() locks the registry appropriately to ensure
that only one backend initializes the segment and that all other
backends just attach it.
The registry itself is comprised of a dshash table that stores the
DSM segment handles keyed by a library-specified string.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Andrei Lepikhov, Nikita Malakhov, Robert Haas, Bharath Rupireddy, Zhang Mingli, Amul Sul
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231205034647.GA2705267%40nathanxps13
This is support function 12 for the GiST AM and translates
"well-known" RT*StrategyNumber values into whatever strategy number is
used by the opclass (since no particular numbers are actually
required). We will use this to support temporal PRIMARY
KEY/UNIQUE/FOREIGN KEY/FOR PORTION OF functionality.
This commit adds two implementations, one for internal GiST opclasses
(just an identity function) and another for btree_gist opclasses. It
updates btree_gist from 1.7 to 1.8, adding the support function for
all its opclasses.
Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
Given an already-initialized hash state and a NUL-terminated string,
accumulate the hash of the string into the hash state and return the
length for the caller to (optionally) save for the finalizer. This
avoids a strlen call.
If the string pointer is aligned, we can use a word-at-a-time
algorithm for NUL lookahead. The aligned case is only used on 64-bit
platforms, since it's not worth the extra complexity for 32-bit.
Handling the tail of the string after finishing the word-wise loop
was inspired by NetBSD's strlen(), but no code was taken since that
is written in assembly language.
As demonstration, use this in the search path cache. This brings the
general case performance closer to the special case optimization done
in commit a86c61c9ee. There are other places that could benefit, but
that is left for future work.
Jeff Davis and John Naylor
Reviewed by Heikki Linnakangas, Jian He, Junwang Zhao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3820f030fd008ff14134b3e9ce5cc6dd623ed479.camel%40j-davis.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b40292c99e623defe5eadedab1d438cf51a4107c.camel%40j-davis.com
It can be useful for a hash function to expose separate initialization,
accumulation, and finalization steps. In particular, this is useful
for building inline hash functions for simplehash. Instead of trying
to whack around hash_bytes while maintaining its current behavior on
all platforms, we base this work on fasthash (MIT licensed) which
is simple, faster than hash_bytes for inputs over 12 bytes long,
and also passes the hash function testing suite SMHasher.
The fasthash functions have been reimplemented using our added-on
incremental interface to validate that this method will still give
the same answer, provided we have the input length ahead of time.
This functionality lives in a new header hashfn_unstable.h. The name
implies we have the freedom to change things across versions that
would be unacceptable for our other hash functions that are used for
e.g. hash indexes and hash partitioning. As such, these should only
be used for in-memory data structures like hash tables. There is also
no guarantee of being independent of endianness or pointer size.
As demonstration, use fasthash for pgstat_hash_hash_key. Previously
this called the 32-bit murmur finalizer on the three elements,
then joined them with hash_combine(). The new function is simpler,
faster and takes up less binary space. While the collision and bias
behavior were almost certainly fine with the previous coding, now we
have objective confidence of that.
There are other places that could benefit from this, but that is left
for future work.
Reviewed by Jeff Davis, Heikki Linnakangas, Jian He, Junwang Zhao
Credit to Andres Freund for the idea
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231122223432.lywt4yz2bn7tlp27%40awork3.anarazel.de
Some code in DiscreteKnapsack() attempted to zero all words in a
Bitmapset by performing bms_del_members() to delete all the members from
itself before replacing those members with members from another set.
When that code was written, this was a valid way to manipulate the set
in such a way to save from palloc having to be called to allocate a new
Bitmapset. However, 00b41463c modified Bitmapsets so that an empty set is
*always* represented as NULL and this breaks the optimization as the
Bitmapset code will always pfree the memory when the set becomes empty.
Since DiscreteKnapsack() has been coded to avoid as many unneeded
allocations as possible, it seems risky to not fix this. Here we add
bms_replace_members() to effectively perform an in-place copy of another
set, reusing the memory of the existing set, when possible.
This got broken in v16, but no backpatch for now as there've been no
complaints.
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvoTCBkBU2PJghNOFUiO0q=QP4WAWHi5sJP6_4=b2WodrA@mail.gmail.com
If there are no indexes on a relation, items can be marked LP_UNUSED
instead of LP_DEAD when pruning. This significantly reduces WAL
volume, since we no longer need to emit one WAL record for pruning
and a second to change the LP_DEAD line pointers thus created to
LP_UNUSED.
Melanie Plageman, reviewed by Andres Freund, Peter Geoghegan, and me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bgvb_k0gKOXWzNKWHt560R0smrGe3E8zewKPs8fiMKkw%40mail.gmail.com
try_index_open() is able to open an index if its relkind fits, except
that it would return NULL instead of generated an error if the relation
does not exist. This new routine will be used by an upcoming patch to
make REINDEX on partitioned relations more robust when an index in a
partition tree is dropped.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same author.
Author: Fei Changhong
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/tencent_6A52106095ACDE55333E3AD33F304C0C3909@qq.com
Backpatch-through: 14
Currently, when source data contains unexpected data regarding data type or
range, the entire COPY fails. However, in some cases, such data can be ignored
and just copying normal data is preferable.
This commit adds a new option SAVE_ERROR_TO, which specifies where to save the
error information. When this option is specified, COPY skips soft errors and
continues copying.
Currently, SAVE_ERROR_TO only supports "none". This indicates error information
is not saved and COPY just skips the unexpected data and continues running.
Later works are expected to add more choices, such as 'log' and 'table'.
Author: Damir Belyalov, Atsushi Torikoshi, Alex Shulgin, Jian He
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87k31ftoe0.fsf_-_%40commandprompt.com
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule, Andres Freund, Tom Lane, Daniel Gustafsson,
Reviewed-by: Alena Rybakina, Andy Fan, Andrei Lepikhov, Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Atsushi Torikoshi
This changes the pg_attribute field attstattarget into a nullable
field in the variable-length part of the row. If no value is set by
the user for attstattarget, it is now null instead of previously -1.
This saves space in pg_attribute and tuple descriptors for most
practical scenarios. (ATTRIBUTE_FIXED_PART_SIZE is reduced from 108
to 104.) Also, null is the semantically more correct value.
The ANALYZE code internally continues to represent the default
statistics target by -1, so that that code can avoid having to deal
with null values. But that is now contained to the ANALYZE code.
Only the DDL code deals with attstattarget possibly null.
For system columns, the field is now always null. The ANALYZE code
skips system columns anyway.
To set a column's statistics target to the default value, the new
command form ALTER TABLE ... SET STATISTICS DEFAULT can be used. (SET
STATISTICS -1 still works.)
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4da8d211-d54d-44b9-9847-f2a9f1184c76@eisentraut.org
jit.c and dfgr.c had a copy of the same code to check if a file exists
or not, with a twist: jit.c did not check for EACCES when failing the
stat() call for the path whose existence is tested. This refactored
routine will be used by an upcoming patch.
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZTiV8tn_MIb_H2rE@paquier.xyz
This makes it possible to access information about the progress
of WAL summarization from SQL. The previously-added functions
pg_available_wal_summaries() and pg_wal_summary_contents() only
examine on-disk state, but this function exposes information from
the server's shared memory.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobvqqj-DW9F7uUzT-cQqs6wcVb-Xhs=w=hzJnXSE-kRGw@mail.gmail.com
Both lwlocknames.txt and wait_event_names.txt contain a list of all
the predefined LWLocks, i.e., those with predefined positions
within MainLWLockArray. It is easy to miss one or the other,
especially since the list in wait_event_names.txt omits the "Lock"
suffix from all the LWLock wait events. This commit adds a cross-
check of these lists to the script that generates lwlocknames.h.
If the lists do not match exactly, building will fail.
Suggested-by: Robert Haas
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Michael Paquier, Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240102173120.GA1061678%40nathanxps13
When SJE uses RelOptInfo.unique_for_rels cache, it passes filtered quals to
innerrel_is_unique_ext(). That might lead to an invalid match to cache entries
made by previous non self-join checking calls. Add UniqueRelInfo.self_join
flag to prevent such cases. Also, fix that SJE should require a strict match
of outerrelids to make sure UniqueRelInfo.extra_clauses are valid.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4788f781-31bd-9796-d7d6-588a751c8787%40gmail.com
This replaces dblink's blocking libpq calls, allowing cancellation and
allowing DROP DATABASE (of a database not involved in the query). Apart
from explicit dblink_cancel_query() calls, dblink still doesn't cancel
the remote side. The replacement for the blocking calls consists of
new, general-purpose query execution wrappers in the libpqsrv facility.
Out-of-tree extensions should adopt these. Use them in postgres_fdw,
replacing a local implementation from which the libpqsrv implementation
derives. This is a bug fix for dblink. Code inspection identified the
bug at least thirteen years ago, but user complaints have not appeared.
Hence, no back-patch for now.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231122012945.74@rfd.leadboat.com
Since commit 599b33b94, this function assumed that every RTE_RELATION
RangeTblEntry would have an associated RelOptInfo. But that's not so:
we only build RelOptInfos for relations that are scanned by the query.
In particular the target of an INSERT won't have one, so that Vars
appearing in an INSERT ... RETURNING list will not have an associated
RelOptInfo. This apparently wasn't a problem before commit f7816aec2
taught examine_simple_variable() to drill down into CTEs containing
INSERT RETURNING, but it is now.
To fix, add a fallback code path that gets the userid to use directly
from the RTEPermissionInfo associated with the RTE. (Sadly, we must
have two code paths, because not every RTE has a RTEPermissionInfo
either.)
Per report from Alexander Lakhin. No back-patch, since the case is
apparently unreachable before f7816aec2.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/608a4886-6c60-0f9e-97d5-591256bd4150@gmail.com
If we have DECHIST statistics about the argument expression, use
the average number of distinct elements as the array length estimate.
(It'd be better to use the average total number of elements, but
that is not currently calculated by compute_array_stats(), and
it's unclear that it'd be worth extra effort to get.)
To do this, we have to change the signature of estimate_array_length
to pass the "root" pointer. While at it, also change its result
type to "double". That's probably not really necessary, but it
avoids any risk of overflow of the value extracted from DECHIST.
All existing callers are going to use the result in a "double"
calculation anyway.
Paul Jungwirth, reviewed by Jian He and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+renyUnM2d+SmrxKpDuAdpiq6FOM=FByvi6aS6yi__qyf6j9A@mail.gmail.com
Many foreach loops only use the ListCell pointer to retrieve the
content of the cell, like so:
ListCell *lc;
foreach(lc, mylist)
{
int myint = lfirst_int(lc);
...
}
This commit adds a few convenience macros that automatically
declare the loop variable and retrieve the current cell's contents.
This allows us to rewrite the previous loop like this:
foreach_int(myint, mylist)
{
...
}
This commit also adjusts a few existing loops in order to add
coverage for the new/adjusted macros. There is presently no plan
to bulk update all foreach loops, as that could introduce a
significant amount of back-patching pain. Instead, these macros
are primarily intended for use in new code.
Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Alvaro Herrera, Vignesh C, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQSwXKnxGwW1_Q5JE%2B8Ja20kyAbhBHO04vVrQsLcDciwXA%40mail.gmail.com
This adds a new ALTER TABLE subcommand ALTER COLUMN ... SET EXPRESSION
that changes the generation expression of a generated column.
The syntax is not standard but was adapted from other SQL
implementations.
This command causes a table rewrite, using the usual ALTER TABLE
mechanisms. The implementation is similar to and makes use of some of
the infrastructure of the SET DATA TYPE subcommand (for example,
rebuilding constraints and indexes afterwards). The new command
requires a new pass in AlterTablePass, and the ADD COLUMN pass had to
be moved earlier so that combinations of ADD COLUMN and SET EXPRESSION
can work.
Author: Amul Sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAJ_b94yyJeGA-5M951_Lr+KfZokOp-2kXicpmEhi5FXhBeTog@mail.gmail.com
This patch changes the existing 'conflicting' field to 'conflict_reason'
in pg_replication_slots. This new field indicates the reason for the
logical slot's conflict with recovery. It is always NULL for physical
slots, as well as for logical slots which are not invalidated. The
non-NULL values indicate that the slot is marked as invalidated. Possible
values are:
wal_removed = required WAL has been removed.
rows_removed = required rows have been removed.
wal_level_insufficient = the primary doesn't have a wal_level sufficient
to perform logical decoding.
The existing users of 'conflicting' column can get the same answer by
using 'conflict_reason' IS NOT NULL.
Author: Shveta Malik
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Bertrand Drouvot, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZYOE8IguqTbp-seF@paquier.xyz
Second attempt at 283a95da92. Since we can't reorder the enum values
of JsonPathItemType, instead reorder the switch cases where they are
used to generally follow the order of the enum values, for better
maintainability.
This reverts commit 283a95da92.
The reordering of JsonPathItemType affects the binary on-disk
compatibility of the jsonpath type, so we must not change it. Revert
for now and consider.
This feature will allow us to replicate the changes on subscriber nodes
after the upgrade.
Previously, only the subscription metadata information was preserved.
Without the list of relations and their state, it's not possible to
re-enable the subscriptions without missing some records as the list of
relations can only be refreshed after enabling the subscription (and
therefore starting the apply worker). Even if we added a way to refresh
the subscription while enabling a publication, we still wouldn't know
which relations are new on the publication side, and therefore should be
fully synced, and which shouldn't.
To preserve the subscription relations, this patch teaches pg_dump to
restore the content of pg_subscription_rel from the old cluster by using
binary_upgrade_add_sub_rel_state SQL function. This is supported only
in binary upgrade mode.
The subscription's replication origin is needed to ensure that we don't
replicate anything twice.
To preserve the replication origins, this patch teaches pg_dump to update
the replication origin along with creating a subscription by using
binary_upgrade_replorigin_advance SQL function to restore the
underlying replication origin remote LSN. This is supported only in
binary upgrade mode.
pg_upgrade will check that all the subscription relations are in 'i'
(init) or in 'r' (ready) state and will error out if that's not the case,
logging the reason for the failure. This helps to avoid the risk of any
dangling slot or origin after the upgrade.
Author: Vignesh C, Julien Rouhaud, Shlok Kyal
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier, Amit Kapila, Hayato Kuroda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230217075433.u5mjly4d5cr4hcfe@jrouhaud
Commit b437571714 added support for parallel builds for BRIN indexes,
using code similar to BTREE parallel builds, and also a new tuplesort
variant. This commit simplifies the new code in two ways:
* The "spool" grouping tuplesort and the heap/index is not necessary.
The heap/index are available as separate arguments, causing confusion.
So remove the spool, and use the tuplesort directly.
* The new tuplesort variant does not need the heap/index, as it sorts
simply by the range block number, without accessing the tuple data.
So simplify that too.
Initial report and patch by Ranier Vilela, further cleanup by me.
Author: Ranier Vilela
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEudQAqD7f2i4iyEaAz-5o-bf6zXVX-AkNUBm-YjUXEemaEh6A%40mail.gmail.com
When enabled (default off), this logs a backtrace anytime elog() or an
equivalent ereport() for internal errors is called.
This is not well covered by the existing backtrace_functions, because
there are many equally-worded low-level errors in many functions. And
if you find out where the error is, then you need to manually rewrite
the elog() to ereport() to attach the errbacktrace(), which is
annoying. Having a backtrace automatically on every elog() call could
be very helpful during development for various kinds of common errors
from palloc, syscache, node support, etc.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/ba76c6bc-f03f-4285-bf16-47759cfcab9e@eisentraut.org
There are a lot of Perl scripts in the tree, mostly code generation
and TAP tests. Occasionally, these scripts produce warnings. These
are probably always mistakes on the developer side (true positives).
Typical examples are warnings from genbki.pl or related when you make
a mess in the catalog files during development, or warnings from tests
when they massage a config file that looks different on different
hosts, or mistakes during merges (e.g., duplicate subroutine
definitions), or just mistakes that weren't noticed because there is a
lot of output in a verbose build.
This changes all warnings into fatal errors, by replacing
use warnings;
by
use warnings FATAL => 'all';
in all Perl files.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/06f899fd-1826-05ab-42d6-adeb1fd5e200%40eisentraut.org
This function was originally coded with a handmade expansion
of the array subscripts. We can do it a little faster and far
more legibly today, by using unnest() WITH ORDINALITY.
While at it, let's apply the rowcount estimation support that exists
for the underlying unnest() function: reduce the default ROWS estimate
to 100 and attach array_unnest_support. I'm not sure that
array_unnest_support can do anything useful today with the call sites
that exist in information_schema, but it can't hurt, and the existing
default rowcount of 1000 is surely much too high for any of these
cases.
The psql.sql regression script is using _pg_expandarray() as a
test case for \sf+. While we could keep doing so, the new one-line
function body makes a poor test case for \sf+ row-numbering, so
switch it to print another information_schema function.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1424303.1703355485@sss.pgh.pa.us
e0b1ee17dc introduced optimization for matching B-tree scan keys required for
the directional scan. However, it incorrectly assumed that all keys required
for opposite direction scan are satisfied by _bt_first(). It has been
illustrated that with multiple scan keys over the same column, a lesser one
(according to the scan direction) could win leaving the other one unsatisfied.
Instead of relying on _bt_first() this commit introduces code that memorizes
whether there was at least one match on the page. If that's true we know that
keys required for opposite-direction scan are satisfied as soon as
corresponding values are not NULLs.
Also, this commit simplifies the description for the optimization of keys
required for the current direction scan. Now the flag used for this is named
continuescanPrechecked and means exactly that *continuescan flag is known
to be true for the last item on the page.
Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzn0LeLcb1PdBnK0xisz8NpHkxRrMr3NWJ%2BKOK-WZ%2BQtTQ%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov
It's not necessary to keep the firstPage flag as a field of BTScanOpaqueData.
This commit makes it an argument of the _bt_readpage() function. We can easily
distinguish first-time and repeated calls (within the scan) of this function.
Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzk4SOsw%2BtHuTFiz8U9Jqj-R77rYPkhWKODCBb1mdHACXA%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov
Bhis commit introduces enhancements to the pg_stat_checkpointer view by adding
three new columns: restartpoints_timed, restartpoints_req, and
restartpoints_done. These additions aim to improve the visibility and
monitoring of restartpoint processes on replicas.
Previously, it was challenging to differentiate between successful and failed
restartpoint requests. This limitation arises because restartpoints on replicas
are dependent on checkpoint records from the primary, and cannot occur more
frequently than these checkpoints.
The new columns allow for clear distinction and tracking of restartpoint
requests, their triggers, and successful completions. This enhancement aids
database administrators and developers in better understanding and diagnosing
issues related to restartpoint behavior, particularly in scenarios where
restartpoint requests may fail.
System catalog is changed. Catversion is bumped.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/99b2ccd1-a77a-962a-0837-191cdf56c2b9%40inbox.ru
Author: Anton A. Melnikov
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Korotkov
To take an incremental backup, you use the new replication command
UPLOAD_MANIFEST to upload the manifest for the prior backup. This
prior backup could either be a full backup or another incremental
backup. You then use BASE_BACKUP with the INCREMENTAL option to take
the backup. pg_basebackup now has an --incremental=PATH_TO_MANIFEST
option to trigger this behavior.
An incremental backup is like a regular full backup except that
some relation files are replaced with files with names like
INCREMENTAL.${ORIGINAL_NAME}, and the backup_label file contains
additional lines identifying it as an incremental backup. The new
pg_combinebackup tool can be used to reconstruct a data directory
from a full backup and a series of incremental backups.
Patch by me. Reviewed by Matthias van de Meent, Dilip Kumar, Jakub
Wartak, Peter Eisentraut, and Álvaro Herrera. Thanks especially to
Jakub for incredibly helpful and extensive testing.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYOYZfMCyOXFyC-P+-mdrZqm5pP2N7S-r0z3_402h9rsA@mail.gmail.com
When active, this process writes WAL summary files to
$PGDATA/pg_wal/summaries. Each summary file contains information for a
certain range of LSNs on a certain TLI. For each relation, it stores a
"limit block" which is 0 if a relation is created or destroyed within
a certain range of WAL records, or otherwise the shortest length to
which the relation was truncated during that range of WAL records, or
otherwise InvalidBlockNumber. In addition, it stores a list of blocks
which have been modified during that range of WAL records, but
excluding blocks which were removed by truncation after they were
modified and never subsequently modified again.
In other words, it tells us which blocks need to copied in case of an
incremental backup covering that range of WAL records. But this
doesn't yet add the capability to actually perform an incremental
backup; the next patch will do that.
A new parameter summarize_wal enables or disables this new background
process. The background process also automatically deletes summary
files that are older than wal_summarize_keep_time, if that parameter
has a non-zero value and the summarizer is configured to run.
Patch by me, with some design help from Dilip Kumar and Andres Freund.
Reviewed by Matthias van de Meent, Dilip Kumar, Jakub Wartak, Peter
Eisentraut, and Álvaro Herrera.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYOYZfMCyOXFyC-P+-mdrZqm5pP2N7S-r0z3_402h9rsA@mail.gmail.com
This makes it possible for the code to be easily reused by other
client-side tools, and/or by the server.
Patch by me. Review of this patch in particular by at least Peter
Eisentraut; reviewers for the patch series in general include Dilip
Kumar, Andres Fruend, David Steele, Álvaro Herrera, and Jakub Wartak.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZ6UGZVnSy5iak6s6+AXu_DewXovDjhLs3-su6nmU_x_g@mail.gmail.com
It's at least theoretically possible to overflow int32 when adding up
column width estimates to make a row width estimate. (The bug example
isn't terribly convincing as a real use-case, but perhaps wide joins
would provide a more plausible route to trouble.) This'd lead to
assertion failures or silly planner behavior. To forestall it, make
the relevant functions compute their running sums in int64 arithmetic
and then clamp to int32 range at the end. We can reasonably assume
that MaxAllocSize is a hard limit on actual tuple width, so clamping
to that is simply a correction for dubious input values, and there's
no need to go as far as widening width variables to int64 everywhere.
Per bug #18247 from RekGRpth. There've been no reports of this issue
arising in practical cases, so I feel no need to back-patch.
Richard Guo and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18247-11ac477f02954422@postgresql.org
- Remove MemoryContextAllocZeroAligned(). It was supposed to be a
faster version of MemoryContextAllocZero(), but modern compilers turn
the MemSetLoop() into a call to memset() anyway, making it more or
less identical to MemoryContextAllocZero(). That was the only user of
MemSetTest, MemSetLoop, so remove those too, as well as palloc0fast().
- Convert newNode() to a static inline function. When this was
originally originally written, it was written as a macro because
testing showed that gcc didn't inline the size check as we
intended. Modern compiler versions do, and now that it just calls
palloc0() there is no size-check to inline anyway.
One nice effect is that the palloc0() takes one less argument than
MemoryContextAllocZeroAligned(), which saves a few instructions in the
callers of newNode().
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Tom Lane, John Naylor, Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/b51f1fa7-7e6a-4ecc-936d-90a8a1659e7c@iki.fi
The value was double in the original implementation of this logic.
Commit da08a6598 pulled it out into a subroutine, but carelessly
declared the parameter as int when it should have been double.
On most platforms, the only ill effect would be to clamp the value
to be not more than INT_MAX, which would seldom be exceeded and
probably wouldn't change the estimates too much anyway. Nonetheless,
it's wrong and can cause complaints from ubsan.
While here, improve the comments and parameter names.
This is an ABI change in a globally exposed subroutine, so
back-patching would create some risk of breaking extensions.
The value of the fix doesn't seem high enough to warrant taking
that risk, so fix in HEAD only.
Per report from Alexander Lakhin.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f5e15fe1-202d-1936-f47c-f0c69a936b72@gmail.com
Presently, all platforms implement atomic exchanges by performing
an atomic compare-and-swap in a loop until it succeeds. This can
be especially expensive when there is contention on the atomic
variable. This commit optimizes atomic exchanges on many platforms
by using compiler intrinsics, which should compile into something
much less expensive than a compare-and-swap loop. Since these
intrinsics have been available for some time, the inline assembly
implementations are omitted.
Suggested-by: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231129212905.GA1258737%40nathanxps13
smgrreadv() and smgrwritev() and their md.c implementations call
FileReadV() and FileWriteV(). A range of disk blocks beginning at
'blocknum' and extending for 'nblocks' can be scattered to or gathered
from multiple buffers with a single system call. The traditional
smgrread() and smgrwrite() functions are implemented in terms of the new
functions.
Later commits will introduce calls with nblocks > 1, but the following
behavioral changes can be seen already:
* After a short transfer we'll now retry until we eventually read 0
bytes (= EOF) or get ENOSPC, EDQUOT, EFBIG etc, where previously we
would infer the reason. Retrying is consistent with xlog.c's
treatment of large WAL writes, and arguably also xlog.c and fd.c's
treatment of EINTR. Arbitrary short returns for larger transfers have
been observed on several OSes, and might in theory also happen for
transient reasons with our own pg_p*v() fallback code.
* After unexpected EOF or -1, the error thrown now talks about
a range even for the single block case, eg "blocks 42..42".
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJkOiOCa+mag4BF+zHo7qo=o9CFheB8=g6uT5TUm2gkvA@mail.gmail.com
Originally, this routine relied on track_io_timing to check if a time
interval for an I/O operation stored in pg_stat_io should be initialized
or not. However, the addition of WAL statistics to pg_stat_io requires
that the initialization happens when track_wal_io_timing is enabled,
which is dependent on the code path where the I/O operation happens.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ3AiQ+ZMxUuXnBpd0Rrh1YhwJ5FudkHg=JU0P+-W8T4Vg@mail.gmail.com
During the development that led to commit 357889eb17, for a time we
had the value LIMIT_OPTION_DEFAULT, which was mostly but not completely
removed later on, before commit. Complete the removal now.
Author: Zhang Mingli <avamingli@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/59d61a1a-3858-475a-964f-24468c97cc67@Spark
Previously smgrprefetch() could issue POSIX_FADV_WILLNEED advice for a
single block at a time. Add an nblocks argument so that we can do the
same for a range of blocks. This usually produces a single system call,
but might need to loop if it crosses a segment boundary. Initially it
is only called with nblocks == 1, but proposed patches will make wider
calls.
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi> (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJkOiOCa+mag4BF+zHo7qo=o9CFheB8=g6uT5TUm2gkvA@mail.gmail.com
In v16 and up (since commit afbfc0298), large object ownership
checking has been broken because object_ownercheck() didn't take care
of the discrepancy between our object-address representation of large
objects (classId == LargeObjectRelationId) and the catalog where their
ownership info is actually stored (LargeObjectMetadataRelationId).
This resulted in failures such as "unrecognized class ID: 2613"
when trying to update blob properties as a non-superuser.
Poking around for related bugs, I found that AlterObjectOwner_internal
would pass the wrong classId to the PostAlterHook in the no-op code
path where the large object already has the desired owner. Also,
recordExtObjInitPriv checked for the wrong classId; that bug is only
latent because the stanza is dead code anyway, but as long as we're
carrying it around it should be less wrong. These bugs are quite old.
In HEAD, we can reduce the scope for future bugs of this ilk by
changing AlterObjectOwner_internal's API to let the translation happen
inside that function, rather than requiring callers to know about it.
A more bulletproof fix, perhaps, would be to start using
LargeObjectMetadataRelationId as the dependency and object-address
classId for blobs. However that has substantial risk of breaking
third-party code; even within our own code, it'd create hassles
for pg_dump which would have to cope with a version-dependent
representation. For now, keep the status quo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2650449.1702497209@sss.pgh.pa.us
FileReadV() and FileWriteV() adapt pg_preadv() and pg_pwritev() for
fd.c's virtual file descriptors. The simple FileRead() and FileWrite()
functions are now implemented in terms of the vectored functions, to
avoid code duplication, and they are converted back to the corresponding
simple system calls further down (commit 15c9ac36). Later work will
make more interesting multi-iovec calls.
The traditional behavior of reporting a "fake" ENOSPC error is
simplified. It's now always set for non-failing writes, for the benefit
of callers that expect to log a meaningful "%m" if they determine that
the write was short. (Perhaps we should consider getting rid of that
expectation one day.)
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJkOiOCa+mag4BF+zHo7qo=o9CFheB8=g6uT5TUm2gkvA@mail.gmail.com
compute_remaining_iovec() is a re-usable routine for retrying after
pg_readv() or pg_writev() reports a short transfer. This will gain new
users in a later commit, but can already replace the open-coded
equivalent code in the existing pg_pwritev_with_retry() function.
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJkOiOCa+mag4BF+zHo7qo=o9CFheB8=g6uT5TUm2gkvA@mail.gmail.com
These two macros wouldn't work if used in an inline function definition
in a header seen by g++, because __builtin_types_compatible_p is only
available in C. Redirect to standard C++ const_cast (which also
adds/removes volatile despite its name).
Per cpluspluscheck failure in a development branch.
Suggested-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGK3OXFjkOyZiw-DgL2bUqk9by1uGuCnViJX786W%2BfyDSw%40mail.gmail.com
This removes the production json_encoding_clause_opt, instead merging
it into json_format_clause. Also remove the auxiliary
makeJsonEncoding() function.
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202312071841.u2gueb5dsrbk%40alvherre.pgsql
This GUC was intended as a debugging help in the 9.0 area when hot
standby and streaming replication were being developped, able to offer
more information at LOG level rather than DEBUGn. There are more tools
available these days that are able to offer rather equivalent
information, like pg_waldump introduced in 9.3. It is not obvious how
this facility is useful these days, so let's remove it.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZXEXEAUVFrvpquSd@paquier.xyz
Teach _bt_binsrch (and related helper routines like _bt_search and
_bt_compare) about the initial positioning requirements of backward
scans. Routines like _bt_binsrch already know all about "nextkey"
searches, so it seems natural to teach them about "goback"/backward
searches, too. These concepts are closely related, and are much easier
to understand when discussed together.
Now that certain implementation details are hidden from _bt_first, it's
straightforward to add a new optimization: backward scans using the <
strategy now avoid extra leaf page accesses in certain "boundary cases".
Consider the following example, which uses the tenk1 table (and its
tenk1_hundred index) from the standard regression tests:
SELECT * FROM tenk1 WHERE hundred < 12 ORDER BY hundred DESC LIMIT 1;
Before this commit, nbtree would scan two leaf pages, even though it was
only really necessary to scan one leaf page. We'll now descend straight
to the leaf page containing a (12, -inf) high key instead. The scan
will locate matching non-pivot tuples with "hundred" values starting
from the value 11. The scan won't waste a page access on the right
sibling leaf page, which cannot possibly contain any matching tuples.
You can think of the optimization added by this commit as disabling an
optimization (the _bt_compare "!pivotsearch" behavior that was added to
Postgres 12 in commit dd299df8) for a small subset of cases where it was
always counterproductive.
Equivalently, you can think of the new optimization as extending the
"pivotsearch" behavior that page deletion by VACUUM has long required
(since the aforementioned Postgres 12 commit went in) to other, similar
cases. Obviously, this isn't strictly necessary for these new cases
(unlike VACUUM, _bt_first is prepared to move the scan to the left once
on the leaf level), but the underlying principle is the same.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=XPzM8HzaLPq278Vms420mVSHfgs9wi5tjFKHcapZCEw@mail.gmail.com
Allow using multiple worker processes to build BRIN index, which until
now was supported only for BTREE indexes. For large tables this often
results in significant speedup when the build is CPU-bound.
The work is split in a simple way - each worker builds BRIN summaries on
a subset of the table, determined by the regular parallel scan used to
read the data, and feeds them into a shared tuplesort which sorts them
by blkno (start of the range). The leader then reads this sorted stream
of ranges, merges duplicates (which may happen if the parallel scan does
not align with BRIN pages_per_range), and adds the resulting ranges into
the index.
The number of duplicate results produced by workers (requiring merging
in the leader process) should be fairly small, thanks to how parallel
scans assign chunks to workers. The likelihood of duplicate results may
increase for higher pages_per_range values, but then there are fewer
page ranges in total. In any case, we expect the merging to be much
cheaper than summarization, so this should be a win.
Most of the parallelism infrastructure is a simplified copy of the code
used by BTREE indexes, omitting the parts irrelevant for BRIN indexes
(e.g. uniqueness checks).
This also introduces a new index AM flag amcanbuildparallel, determining
whether to attempt to start parallel workers for the index build.
Original patch by me, with reviews and substantial reworks by Matthias
van de Meent, certainly enough to make him a co-author.
Author: Tomas Vondra, Matthias van de Meent
Reviewed-by: Matthias van de Meent
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c2ee7d69-ce17-43f2-d1a0-9811edbda6e6%40enterprisedb.com
tts_virtual_copyslot() contained an Assert that checked that the srcslot
contained <= attributes than the dstslot. This seems to be backwards as
if the srcslot contained fewer attributes then the dstslot could be left
with stale Datum values from the previously stored tuple. It might make
more sense to allow the source to contain additional attributes and only
copy the leading ones that also exist in the destination, however, that's
not what we're doing here.
Here we just remove the Assert from tts_virtual_copyslot() and add an
Assert to ExecCopySlot() to verify the attribute counts match. There
does not seem to be any places where the destination contains fewer
attributes, so instead of going to the trouble of making the code
properly handle this, let's just ensure the attribute counts match. If
this Assert fails then that will indicate that we do have cases that
require us to handle the srcslot with more attributes than the dstslot.
It seems better to only write this code if there's a genuine requirement
for it rather than write it now only to leave it untested.
Thanks to Andres Freund for helping with the analysis of this.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpMAvBL0T+TRORquyx1iqFQKMVTXtqNocOw0Pa2uh1heg@mail.gmail.com
The commit 29d0a77fa6 labelled binary_upgrade_logical_slot_has_caught_up()
as a non-strict function to allow providing a better error message to callers
in case the passed slot_name is NULL. On further discussion, it seems that
it is not helpful to have a different error message for NULL input in this
function, so this patch marks the function as strict.
This patch also removes the explicit permission check to use replication
slots as this function is invoked only by superusers and instead adds an
Assert.
Reported-by: Masahiko Sawada
Author: Hayato Kuroda
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDSyiBKkMXBxN_gUayZZUCOgyHnG8Ge8rcPXNP3Tf6B4g@mail.gmail.com
After commit fd5e8b440d, InitProcess() is called later in the
EXEC_BACKEND startup sequence, so it's enough to set the
am_autovacuum_[launcher|worker] variables at the same place as in the
!EXEC_BACKEND case.
This commit adds support for REINDEX in event triggers, making this
command react for the events ddl_command_start and ddl_command_end. The
indexes rebuilt are collected with the ReindexStmt emitted by the
caller, for the concurrent and non-concurrent paths.
Thanks to that, it is possible to know a full list of the indexes that a
single REINDEX command has worked on.
Author: Garrett Thornburg, Jian He
Reviewed-by: Jim Jones, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEEqfk5bm32G7sbhzHbES9WejD8O8DCEOaLkxoBP7HNWxjPpvg@mail.gmail.com
The BackgroundWorker struct is now passed the same way as the Port
struct. Seems more consistent.
This makes it possible to move InitProcess later in SubPostmasterMain
(in next commit), as we no longer need to access shared memory to read
background worker entry.
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin, Andres Freund, Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7a59b073-5b5b-151e-7ed3-8b01ff7ce9ef@iki.fi
For clarity, have separate functions for *creating* the shared memory
and semaphores at postmaster or single-user backend startup, and
for *attaching* to existing shared memory structures in EXEC_BACKEND
case. CreateSharedMemoryAndSemaphores() is now called only at
postmaster startup, and a new AttachSharedMemoryStructs() function is
called at backend startup in EXEC_BACKEND mode.
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7a59b073-5b5b-151e-7ed3-8b01ff7ce9ef@iki.fi
For the trivial case of iovcnt == 1, kernels are measurably slower at
dealing with the more complex arguments of preadv/pwritev than the
equivalent plain old pread/pwrite. The overheads are worth it for
iovcnt > 1, but for 1 let's just redirect to the cheaper calls. While
we could leave it to callers to worry about that, we already have to
have our own pg_ wrappers for portability reasons so it seems
reasonable to centralize this knowledge there (thanks to Heikki for this
suggestion). Try to avoid function call overheads by making them
inlinable, which might also allow the compiler to avoid the branch in
some cases. For systems that don't have preadv and pwritev (currently:
Windows and [closed] Solaris), we might as well pull the replacement
functions up into the static inline functions too.
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJkOiOCa+mag4BF+zHo7qo=o9CFheB8=g6uT5TUm2gkvA@mail.gmail.com
This avoids the wraparound in async.c and removes the corresponding code
complexity. The maximum amount of allocated SLRU pages for NOTIFY / LISTEN
queue is now determined by the max_notify_queue_pages GUC. The default
value is 1048576. It allows to consume up to 8 GB of disk space which is
exactly the limit we had previously.
Author: Maxim Orlov, Aleksander Alekseev, Alexander Korotkov, Teodor Sigaev
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Pavel Borisov, Yura Sokolov
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Heikki Linnakangas, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Japin Li, Pavel Borisov, Tom Lane, Peter Eisentraut, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin, Dilip Kumar, Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACG%3DezZe1NQSCnfHOr78AtAZxJZeCvxrts0ygrxYwe%3DpyyjVWA%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TPDOYBYrnCAeyndkBktO0WG2xSdYduTF0nxq%2BvfkmTF5Q%40mail.gmail.com
We've had repeated bugs in the area of handling SLRU wraparound in the past,
some of which have caused data loss. Switching to an indexing system for SLRUs
that does not wrap around should allow us to get rid of a whole bunch
of problems and improve the overall reliability of the system.
This particular patch however only changes the indexing and doesn't address
the wraparound per se. This is going to be done in the following patches.
Author: Maxim Orlov, Aleksander Alekseev, Alexander Korotkov, Teodor Sigaev
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Pavel Borisov, Yura Sokolov
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Heikki Linnakangas, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Japin Li, Pavel Borisov, Tom Lane, Peter Eisentraut, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin, Dilip Kumar, Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACG%3DezZe1NQSCnfHOr78AtAZxJZeCvxrts0ygrxYwe%3DpyyjVWA%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TPDOYBYrnCAeyndkBktO0WG2xSdYduTF0nxq%2BvfkmTF5Q%40mail.gmail.com
We should have done it this way all along, but we accidentally got
away with using the wrong BIO field up until OpenSSL 3.2. There,
the library's BIO routines that we rely on use the "data" field
for their own purposes, and our conflicting use causes assorted
weird behaviors up to and including core dumps when SSL connections
are attempted. Switch to using the approved field for the purpose,
i.e. app_data.
While at it, remove our configure probes for BIO_get_data as well
as the fallback implementation. BIO_{get,set}_app_data have been
there since long before any OpenSSL version that we still support,
even in the back branches.
Also, update src/test/ssl/t/001_ssltests.pl to allow for a minor
change in an error message spelling that evidently came in with 3.2.
Tristan Partin and Bo Andreson. Back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ1eDDYsYaL7mv+oSLUij2h_u6hvD4Qmv-7PK7jkji0uyQ@mail.gmail.com
If the tuple being updated is not visible to the crosscheck snapshot,
we return TM_Updated but the assertions would not hold in that case.
Move them to before the cross-check.
Fixes bug #17893. Backpatch to all supported versions.
Author: Alexander Lakhin
Backpatch-through: 12
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/17893-35847009eec517b5%40postgresql.org
This routine is located in heapam_handler.c, not tableamapi.c. Issue
noted while hacking the area for a different patch.
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZWQuHltp2KS_0Cct@paquier.xyz
As of commits dd04e958c8 and 1833f1a1c3, tuplestore_donestoring(),
SPI_push(), SPI_pop(), SPI_push_conditional(),
SPI_pop_conditional(), and SPI_restore_connection() are no-op
macros provided for backwards compatibility. This commit removes
these macros, so any uses in third-party code will need to be
removed, too. Since these macros have been no-ops for a while,
such adjustments won't produce any behavior changes for all
currently-supported versions of PostgreSQL.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVeO58JM5tK2Qa8QC-%3DkC8sdkJOTd4BFU%3DK8zs4gGYpjQ%40mail.gmail.com
Values corresponding to STATISTIC_KIND_RANGE_LENGTH_HISTOGRAM and
STATISTIC_KIND_BOUNDS_HISTOGRAM were not exposed to pg_stats when these
slot kinds were introduced in 918eee0c49.
This commit adds the missing fields to pg_stats.
Catversion is bumped.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/b67d8b57-9357-7e82-a2e7-f6ce6eaeec67@postgrespro.ru
Author: Egor Rogov, Soumyadeep Chakraborty
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby, Jian He
Make a reminder that pg_stats view needs to be modified whenever a new slot
kind is added. To prevent situations like 918eee0c49 when pg_stats was
forgotten to be updated.
Also, revise the comment that only non-null, non-empty rows are considered
for the range length histogram.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/b67d8b57-9357-7e82-a2e7-f6ce6eaeec67@postgrespro.ru
Author: Egor Rogov, Soumyadeep Chakraborty
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Justin Pryzby, Jian He
The brininsert code used to initialize (and destroy) BrinDesc and
BrinRevmap for each tuple, which is not free. This patch initializes
these structures only once, and reuses them for all inserts in the same
command. The data is passed through indexInfo->ii_AmCache.
This also introduces an optional AM callback "aminsertcleanup" that
allows performing custom cleanup in case simply pfree-ing ii_AmCache is
not sufficient (which is the case when the cache contains TupleDesc,
Buffers, and so on).
Author: Soumyadeep Chakraborty
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Matthias van de Meent, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAE-ML%2B9r2%3DaO1wwji1sBN9gvPz2xRAtFUGfnffpd0ZqyuzjamA%40mail.gmail.com
A WaitEventSet holds file descriptors or event handles (on Windows).
If FreeWaitEventSet is not called, those fds or handles are leaked.
Use ResourceOwners to track WaitEventSets, to clean those up
automatically on error.
This was a live bug in async Append nodes, if a FDW's
ForeignAsyncRequest function failed. (In back branches, I will apply a
more localized fix for that based on PG_TRY-PG_FINALLY.)
The added test doesn't check for leaking resources, so it passed even
before this commit. But at least it covers the code path.
In the passing, fix misleading comment on what the 'nevents' argument
to WaitEventSetWait means.
Report by Alexander Lakhin, analysis and suggestion for the fix by
Tom Lane. Fixes bug #17828.
Reviewed-by: Alexander Lakhin, Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/472235.1678387869@sss.pgh.pa.us
The original code would miscalculate the total number of cells when the
table to print has more than ~4 billion cells, leading to an unnecessary
error. Repair by changing some computations to be 64-bits wide. Add
some necessary overflow checks.
Author: Hongxu Ma <interma@outlook.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYBP286MB0351B057B101C90D7C1239E6B4E2A@TYBP286MB0351.JPNP286.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
Compute size first, then allocate, then update the structure.
Previously, an out-of-memory when growing could leave the hashtable in
an inconsistent state.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231117201334.eyb542qr5yk4gilq@awork3.anarazel.de
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Gurjeet Singh
The code previously relied on "long" as type to track block numbers,
which would be 4 bytes in all Windows builds or any 32-bit builds. This
limited the code to be able to handle up to 16TB of data with the
default block size of 8kB, like during a CLUSTER. This code now relies
on a more portable int64, which should be more than enough for at least
the next 20 years to come.
This issue has been reported back in 2017, but nothing was done about it
back then, so here we go now.
Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznCscXnWmnj=STC0aSa7QG+BRedDnZsP=Jo_R9GUZvUrg@mail.gmail.com
contain_mutable_functions and contain_volatile_functions give
reliable answers only after expression preprocessing (specifically
eval_const_expressions). Some places understand this, but some did
not get the memo --- which is not entirely their fault, because the
problem is documented only in places far away from those functions.
Introduce wrapper functions that allow doing the right thing easily,
and add commentary in hopes of preventing future mistakes from
copy-and-paste of code that's only conditionally safe.
Two actual bugs of this ilk are fixed here. We failed to preprocess
column GENERATED expressions before checking mutability, so that the
code could fail to detect the use of a volatile function
default-argument expression, or it could reject a polymorphic function
that is actually immutable on the datatype of interest. Likewise,
column DEFAULT expressions weren't preprocessed before determining if
it's safe to apply the attmissingval mechanism. A false negative
would just result in an unnecessary table rewrite, but a false
positive could allow the attmissingval mechanism to be used in a case
where it should not be, resulting in unexpected initial values in a
new column.
In passing, re-order the steps in ComputePartitionAttrs so that its
checks for invalid column references are done before applying
expression_planner, rather than after. The previous coding would
not complain if a partition expression contains a disallowed column
reference that gets optimized away by constant folding, which seems
to me to be a behavior we do not want.
Per bug #18097 from Jim Keener. Back-patch to all supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18097-ebb179674f22932f@postgresql.org
The fallback implementation of pg_atomic_test_set_flag() that uses
atomic-exchange gives pg_atomic_exchange_u32_impl() an extra
argument. This issue has been present since the introduction of
the atomics API in commit b64d92f1a5.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231114035439.GA1809032%40nathanxps13
Backpatch-through: 12
As of commit eaa5808e8e, MemoryContextResetAndDeleteChildren() is
just a backwards compatibility macro for MemoryContextReset(). Now
that some time has passed, this macro seems more likely to create
confusion.
This commit removes the macro and replaces all remaining uses with
calls to MemoryContextReset(). Any third-party code that use this
macro will need to be adjusted to call MemoryContextReset()
instead. Since the two have behaved the same way since v9.5, such
adjustments won't produce any behavior changes for all
currently-supported versions of PostgreSQL.
Reviewed-by: Amul Sul, Tom Lane, Alvaro Herrera, Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231113185950.GA1668018%40nathanxps13
This adds support for infinity to the interval data type, using the
same input/output representation as the other date/time data types
that support infinity. This allows various arithmetic operations on
infinite dates, timestamps and intervals.
The new values are represented by setting all fields of the interval
to INT32/64_MIN for -infinity, and INT32/64_MAX for +infinity. This
ensures that they compare as less/greater than all other interval
values, without the need for any special-case comparison code.
Note that, since those 2 values were formerly accepted as legal finite
intervals, pg_upgrade and dump/restore from an old database will turn
them from finite to infinite intervals. That seems OK, since those
exact values should be extremely rare in practice, and they are
outside the documented range supported by the interval type, which
gives us a certain amount of leeway.
Bump catalog version.
Joseph Koshakow, Jian He, and Ashutosh Bapat, reviewed by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAvxfHea4%2BsPybKK7agDYOMo9N-Z3J6ZXf3BOM79pFsFNcRjwA%40mail.gmail.com
To generate a dummy probes.h file when dtrace is not available, we had
two different scripts: A sed version, which is the original version,
and a Perl version, which was generated by s2p. This split was
necessary because Perl was not a mandatory build dependency on Unix,
but sed was not guaranteed to be available on Windows.
(The Meson build system used the sed version even on Windows, which
was probably incorrect and probably would have had to be fixed before
elevating that build system from experimental status.)
As of 721856ff24, Perl is a required build dependency, so this split
is no longer necessary. We can just use the Perl script in all build
environments and remove a whole bunch of infrastructure to keep the
two variants in sync.
The new Gen_dummy_probes.pl is not the version generated by s2p but a
new implementation written by hand by adapting the sed version to Perl
syntax.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/3fd0f1bc-4483-4ba9-8aa0-64765b052039@eisentraut.org
pg_stat_reset_slru currently requires an input argument, either:
- NULL to reset the SLRU counters of everything.
- A specific value to reset a single SLRU cache.
This commit adds support for a new pattern: pg_stat_reset_slru without
any argument works the same way as pg_stat_reset_slru(NULL), relying on
a DEFAULT in the function definition to handle this case. This makes
the function more consistent with 23c8c0c8f4.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACW1VizYg01EeH_cA-7qA+4NzWVAoZ5Lw9_XYO1RRHAZbA@mail.gmail.com
This was done particularly for geometric data types.
Reported-by: Christoph Berg
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YGI8Leuk0WvmNWLr@msg.df7cb.de
Co-authored-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Backpatch-through: master
Rewrite array_in() and its subroutines so that we make only one
pass over the input text, rather than two. This requires
potentially re-pallocing the working arrays values[] and nulls[]
larger than our initial guess, but that cost will hopefully be made
up by avoiding duplicate parsing. In any case this coding seems
much clearer and more straightforward than what we had before.
This also fixes array_in() to reject non-rectangular input (that is,
different brace depths in different parts of the input) more reliably
than before, and to give a better error message when it does so.
This is analogous to the plpython and plperl fixes in 0553528e7 and
f47004add. Like those PLs, we now accept input such as '{{},{}}'
as a valid representation of an empty array, which we did not before.
Additionally, reject explicit array subscripts that are outside the
integer range (previously you just got whatever atoi() converted
them to), and make some other minor improvements in error reporting.
Although this is arguably a bug fix, it's also a behavioral change
that might trip somebody up, so no back-patch.
Tom Lane, Heikki Linnakangas, and Jian He. Thanks to Alexander Lakhin
for the initial report and for review/testing.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2794005.1683042087@sss.pgh.pa.us
Currently, pg_stat_reset_shared() can use an argument to specify the
target of statistics to reset, doing nothing for NULL as it is strict.
This patch adds to pg_stat_reset_shared() the possibility to reset all
the stats types already handled in this function rather than do nothing
if the argument value given is NULL or if nothing is specified
(proisstrict is switched to false). Like previously, SLRUs are not
included in what gets reset.
The idea to use NULL or no argument to control if all the shared stats
already covered by this function should be reset has been proposed by
Andres Freund.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier, Bharath Rupireddy,
Matthias van de Meent
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4291a55137ddda77cf7cc5f46e846daf@oss.nttdata.com
We don't want existing slots in the old cluster to get invalidated during
the upgrade. During an upgrade, we set this variable to -1 via the command
line in an attempt to prevent such invalidations, but users have ways to
override it. This patch ensures the value is not overridden by the user.
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20231027.115759.2206827438943188717.horikyota.ntt@gmail.com
When computing "0 - INT64_MIN", most platforms would report an
overflow error, which is correct. However, platforms without integer
overflow builtins or 128-bit integers would fail to spot the overflow,
and incorrectly return INT64_MIN.
Back-patch to all supported branches.
Patch be me. Thanks to Jian He for initial investigation, and Laurenz
Albe and Tom Lane for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCUNK-AZSD0jVdgkk0N%3DNcAXBWeAEX-QU9AnJPensikmdQ%40mail.gmail.com
This buys back some of the performance loss that we otherwise saw from the
previous commit.
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Michael Paquier, Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Hayato Kuroda, Álvaro Herrera, Zhihong Yu
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/d746cead-a1ef-7efe-fb47-933311e876a3%40iki.fi
Instead of having a separate array/hash for each resource kind, use a
single array and hash to hold all kinds of resources. This makes it
possible to introduce new resource "kinds" without having to modify
the ResourceOwnerData struct. In particular, this makes it possible
for extensions to register custom resource kinds.
The old approach was to have a small array of resources of each kind,
and if it fills up, switch to a hash table. The new approach also uses
an array and a hash, but now the array and the hash are used at the
same time. The array is used to hold the recently added resources, and
when it fills up, they are moved to the hash. This keeps the access to
recent entries fast, even when there are a lot of long-held resources.
All the resource-specific ResourceOwnerEnlarge*(),
ResourceOwnerRemember*(), and ResourceOwnerForget*() functions have
been replaced with three generic functions that take resource kind as
argument. For convenience, we still define resource-specific wrapper
macros around the generic functions with the old names, but they are
now defined in the source files that use those resource kinds.
The release callback no longer needs to call ResourceOwnerForget on
the resource being released. ResourceOwnerRelease unregisters the
resource from the owner before calling the callback. That needed some
changes in bufmgr.c and some other files, where releasing the
resources previously always called ResourceOwnerForget.
Each resource kind specifies a release priority, and
ResourceOwnerReleaseAll releases the resources in priority order. To
make that possible, we have to restrict what you can do between
phases. After calling ResourceOwnerRelease(), you are no longer
allowed to remember any more resources in it or to forget any
previously remembered resources by calling ResourceOwnerForget. There
was one case where that was done previously. At subtransaction commit,
AtEOSubXact_Inval() would handle the invalidation messages and call
RelationFlushRelation(), which temporarily increased the reference
count on the relation being flushed. We now switch to the parent
subtransaction's resource owner before calling AtEOSubXact_Inval(), so
that there is a valid ResourceOwner to temporarily hold that relcache
reference.
Other end-of-xact routines make similar calls to AtEOXact_Inval()
between release phases, but I didn't see any regression test failures
from those, so I'm not sure if they could reach a codepath that needs
remembering extra resources.
There were two exceptions to how the resource leak WARNINGs on commit
were printed previously: llvmjit silently released the context without
printing the warning, and a leaked buffer io triggered a PANIC. Now
everything prints a WARNING, including those cases.
Add tests in src/test/modules/test_resowner.
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Michael Paquier, Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Hayato Kuroda, Álvaro Herrera, Zhihong Yu
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/cbfabeb0-cd3c-e951-a572-19b365ed314d%40iki.fi
I added it by mistake in commit 7103ebb7aa. To clean up, struct
MergeAction needs to be moved to primnodes.h from parsenodes.h. (This
forces us to also move OverridingKind to primnodes.h).
Having to add parsenodes.h to bootstrap.h as fallout is a bit
surprising, since nothing nominally needs it there. However, per
comments in bootscanner.l, it is needed so that YYSTYPE can be declared.
I think this only started with commit dac048f71e, but I didn't
actually verify that.
In passing, stop including parsenodes.h in tcopprot.h. Nothing needs it
there.
Per discussion on a patch by Ashutosh Bapat.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202311071106.6y7b2ascqjlz@alvherre.pgsql
array_set_element() and related functions allow an array to be
enlarged by assigning to subscripts outside the current array bounds.
While these places were careful to check that the new bounds are
allowable, they neglected to consider the risk of integer overflow
in computing the new bounds. In edge cases, we could compute new
bounds that are invalid but get past the subsequent checks,
allowing bad things to happen. Memory stomps that are potentially
exploitable for arbitrary code execution are possible, and so is
disclosure of server memory.
To fix, perform the hazardous computations using overflow-detecting
arithmetic routines, which fortunately exist in all still-supported
branches.
The test cases added for this generate (after patching) errors that
mention the value of MaxArraySize, which is platform-dependent.
Rather than introduce multiple expected-files, use psql's VERBOSITY
parameter to suppress the printing of the message text. v11 psql
lacks that parameter, so omit the tests in that branch.
Our thanks to Pedro Gallegos for reporting this problem.
Security: CVE-2023-5869
A PostgreSQL release tarball contains a number of prebuilt files, in
particular files produced by bison, flex, perl, and well as html and
man documentation. We have done this consistent with established
practice at the time to not require these tools for building from a
tarball. Some of these tools were hard to get, or get the right
version of, from time to time, and shipping the prebuilt output was a
convenience to users.
Now this has at least two problems:
One, we have to make the build system(s) work in two modes: Building
from a git checkout and building from a tarball. This is pretty
complicated, but it works so far for autoconf/make. It does not
currently work for meson; you can currently only build with meson from
a git checkout. Making meson builds work from a tarball seems very
difficult or impossible. One particular problem is that since meson
requires a separate build directory, we cannot make the build update
files like gram.h in the source tree. So if you were to build from a
tarball and update gram.y, you will have a gram.h in the source tree
and one in the build tree, but the way things work is that the
compiler will always use the one in the source tree. So you cannot,
for example, make any gram.y changes when building from a tarball.
This seems impossible to fix in a non-horrible way.
Second, there is increased interest nowadays in precisely tracking the
origin of software. We can reasonably track contributions into the
git tree, and users can reasonably track the path from a tarball to
packages and downloads and installs. But what happens between the git
tree and the tarball is obscure and in some cases non-reproducible.
The solution for both of these issues is to get rid of the step that
adds prebuilt files to the tarball. The tarball now only contains
what is in the git tree (*). Getting the additional build
dependencies is no longer a problem nowadays, and the complications to
keep these dual build modes working are significant. And of course we
want to get the meson build system working universally.
This commit removes the make distprep target altogether. The make
dist target continues to do its job, it just doesn't call distprep
anymore.
(*) - The tarball also contains the INSTALL file that is built at make
dist time, but not by distprep. This is unchanged for now.
The make maintainer-clean target, whose job it is to remove the
prebuilt files in addition to what make distclean does, is now just an
alias to make distprep. (In practice, it is probably obsolete given
that git clean is available.)
The following programs are now hard build requirements in configure
(they were already required by meson.build):
- bison
- flex
- perl
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/e07408d9-e5f2-d9fd-5672-f53354e9305e@eisentraut.org
This function implements the standard XMLTest function, which
converts text into xml text nodes. It uses the libxml2 function
xmlEncodeSpecialChars to escape predefined entities (&"<>), so
that those do not cause any conflict when concatenating the text
node output with existing xml documents.
This also adds a note in features.sgml about not supporting
XML(SEQUENCE). The SQL specification defines a RETURNING clause
to a set of XML functions, where RETURNING CONTENT or RETURNING
SEQUENCE can be defined. Since PostgreSQL doesn't support
XML(SEQUENCE) all of these functions operate with an
implicit RETURNING CONTENT.
Author: Jim Jones <jim.jones@uni-muenster.de>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/86617a66-ec95-581f-8d54-08059cca8885@uni-muenster.de
get_explain_guc_options() crashed if a string GUC marked GUC_EXPLAIN
has a NULL boot_val. Nosing around found a couple of other places
that seemed insufficiently cautious about NULL string values, although
those are likely unreachable in practice. Add some commentary
defining the expectations for NULL values of string variables,
in hopes of forestalling future additions of more such bugs.
Xing Guo, Aleksander Alekseev, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACpMh+AyDx5YUpPaAgzVwC1d8zfOL4JoD-uyFDnNSa1z0EsDQQ@mail.gmail.com
Introduce unicode_version(), icu_unicode_version(), and
unicode_assigned().
The latter requires introducing a new lookup table for the Unicode
General Category, which is generated along with the other Unicode
lookup tables.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYzYR-yhU6k1XFCADeyj=Oyz2PkVsa3iKv+keM8wp-F_A@mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Historically, the statistics of the checkpointer have been always part
of pg_stat_bgwriter. This commit removes a few columns from
pg_stat_bgwriter, and introduces pg_stat_checkpointer with equivalent,
renamed columns (plus a new one for the reset timestamp):
- checkpoints_timed -> num_timed
- checkpoints_req -> num_requested
- checkpoint_write_time -> write_time
- checkpoint_sync_time -> sync_time
- buffers_checkpoint -> buffers_written
The fields of PgStat_CheckpointerStats and its SQL functions are renamed
to match with the new field names, for consistency. Note that
background writer and checkpointer have been split into two different
processes in commits 806a2aee37 and bf405ba8e4. The pgstat
structures were already split, making this change straight-forward.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Andres Freund, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVxX2ii=66RypXRweZe2EsBRiPMj0aHfRfHUeXJcC7kHg@mail.gmail.com
The original code did very little to guard against integer or floating
point overflow when computing the interval's fields. Detect any such
overflows and error out, rather than silently returning bogus results.
Joseph Koshakow, reviewed by Ashutosh Bapat and me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAvxfHcm1TPwH_zaGWuFoL8pZBestbRZTU6Z%3D-RvAdSXTPbKfg%40mail.gmail.com
d3d55ce571 changed RelOptInfo.unique_for_rels from the list of Relid sets to
the list of UniqueRelInfo's. But it didn't make UniqueRelInfo a node.
This commit makes UniqueRelInfo a node. Also this commit revises some
comments related to RelOptInfo.unique_for_rels.
Reported-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/1189851.1698340331%40sss.pgh.pa.us
Two attributes related to checkpointer statistics are removed in this
commit:
- buffers_backend, that counts the number of buffers written directly by
a backend.
- buffers_backend_fsync, that counts the number of times a backend had
to do fsync() by its own.
These are actually not checkpointer properties but backend properties.
Also, pg_stat_io provides a more accurate and equivalent report of these
numbers, by tracking all the I/O stats related to backends, including
writes and fsyncs, so storing them in pg_stat_checkpointer was
redundant.
Thanks also to Robert Haas and Amit Kapila for their input.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230210004604.mcszbscsqs3bc5nx@awork3.anarazel.de
Since C99, there can be a trailing comma after the last value in an
enum definition. A lot of new code has been introducing this style on
the fly. Some new patches are now taking an inconsistent approach to
this. Some add the last comma on the fly if they add a new last
value, some are trying to preserve the existing style in each place,
some are even dropping the last comma if there was one. We could
nudge this all in a consistent direction if we just add the trailing
commas everywhere once.
I omitted a few places where there was a fixed "last" value that will
always stay last. I also skipped the header files of libpq and ecpg,
in case people want to use those with older compilers. There were
also a small number of cases where the enum type wasn't used anywhere
(but the enum values were), which ended up confusing pgindent a bit,
so I left those alone.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/386f8c45-c8ac-4681-8add-e3b0852c1620%40eisentraut.org
There were various places in our codebase which conjured up a StringInfo
by manually assigning the StringInfo fields and setting the data field
to point to some existing buffer. There wasn't much consistency here as
to what fields like maxlen got set to and in one location we didn't
correctly ensure that the buffer was correctly NUL terminated at len
bytes, as per what was documented as required in stringinfo.h
Here we introduce 2 new functions to initialize StringInfos. One allows
callers to initialize a StringInfo passing along a buffer that is
already allocated by palloc. Here the StringInfo code uses this buffer
directly rather than doing any memcpying into a new allocation. Having
this as a function allows us to verify the buffer is correctly NUL
terminated. StringInfos initialized this way can be appended to and
reset just like any other normal StringInfo.
The other new initialization function also accepts an existing buffer,
but the given buffer does not need to be a pointer to a palloc'd chunk.
This buffer could be a pointer pointing partway into some palloc'd chunk
or may not even be palloc'd at all. StringInfos initialized this way
are deemed as "read-only". This means that it's not possible to
append to them or reset them.
For the latter of the two new initialization functions mentioned above,
we relax the requirement that the data buffer must be NUL terminated.
Relaxing this requirement is convenient in a few places as it can save
us from having to allocate an entire new buffer just to add the NUL
terminator or save us from having to temporarily add a NUL only to have to
put the original char back again later.
Incompatibility note:
Here we also forego adding the NUL in a few places where it does not
seem to be required. These locations are passing the given StringInfo
into a type's receive function. It does not seem like any of our
built-in receive functions require this, but perhaps there's some UDT
out there in the wild which does require this. It is likely worthy of
a mention in the release notes that a UDT's receive function mustn't rely
on the input StringInfo being NUL terminated.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvorfO3iBZ%3DxpiZvp3uHtJVLyFaPBSvcAhAq2HPLnaNSwQ%40mail.gmail.com
While reading information from the old cluster, a list of logical
slots is fetched. At the later part of upgrading, pg_upgrade revisits the
list and restores slots by executing pg_create_logical_replication_slot()
on the new cluster. Migration of logical replication slots is only
supported when the old cluster is version 17.0 or later.
If the old node has invalid slots or slots with unconsumed WAL records,
the pg_upgrade fails. These checks are needed to prevent data loss.
The significant advantage of this commit is that it makes it easy to
continue logical replication even after upgrading the publisher node.
Previously, pg_upgrade allowed copying publications to a new node. With
this patch, adjusting the connection string to the new publisher will
cause the apply worker on the subscriber to connect to the new publisher
automatically. This enables seamless continuation of logical replication,
even after an upgrade.
Author: Hayato Kuroda, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Bharath Rupireddy, Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Shlok Kyal
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB58664C81887B3AF2EB6B16E3F5939@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+t7xYcfa0rEQw839=b2MzsfvYDPz3xbD+ZqOdP3zpKYg@mail.gmail.com
The Self Join Elimination (SJE) feature removes an inner join of a plain table
to itself in the query tree if is proved that the join can be replaced with
a scan without impacting the query result. Self join and inner relation are
replaced with the outer in query, equivalence classes, and planner info
structures. Also, inner restrictlist moves to the outer one with removing
duplicated clauses. Thus, this optimization reduces the length of the range
table list (this especially makes sense for partitioned relations), reduces
the number of restriction clauses === selectivity estimations, and potentially
can improve total planner prediction for the query.
The SJE proof is based on innerrel_is_unique machinery.
We can remove a self-join when for each outer row:
1. At most one inner row matches the join clause.
2. Each matched inner row must be (physically) the same row as the outer one.
In this patch we use the next approach to identify a self-join:
1. Collect all merge-joinable join quals which look like a.x = b.x
2. Add to the list above the baseretrictinfo of the inner table.
3. Check innerrel_is_unique() for the qual list. If it returns false, skip
this pair of joining tables.
4. Check uniqueness, proved by the baserestrictinfo clauses. To prove
the possibility of self-join elimination inner and outer clauses must have
an exact match.
The relation replacement procedure is not trivial and it is partly combined
with the one, used to remove useless left joins. Tests, covering this feature,
were added to join.sql. Some regression tests changed due to self-join removal
logic.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/64486b0b-0404-e39e-322d-0801154901f3%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Andrey Lepikhov, Alexander Kuzmenkov
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Robert Haas, Andres Freund, Simon Riggs, Jonathan S. Katz
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Thomas Munro, Konstantin Knizhnik, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Hywel Carver, Laurenz Albe, Ronan Dunklau, vignesh C, Zhihong Yu
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark, Jaime Casanova, Michał Kłeczek, Alena Rybakina
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov
When an UPDATE/DELETE/MERGE's target table is an old-style
inheritance tree, it's possible for the parent to get excluded
from the plan while some children are not. (I believe this is
only possible if we can prove that a CHECK ... NO INHERIT
constraint on the parent contradicts the query WHERE clause,
so it's a very unusual case.) In such a case, ExecInitModifyTable
mistakenly concluded that the first surviving child is the target
table, leading to at least two bugs:
1. The wrong table's statement-level triggers would get fired.
2. In v16 and up, it was possible to fail with "invalid perminfoindex
0 in RTE with relid nnnn" due to the child RTE not having permissions
data included in the query plan. This was hard to reproduce reliably
because it did not occur unless the update triggered some non-HOT
index updates.
In v14 and up, this is easy to fix by defining ModifyTable.rootRelation
to be the parent RTE in plain inheritance as well as partitioned cases.
While the wrong-triggers bug also appears in older branches, the
relevant code in both the planner and executor is quite a bit
different, so it would take a good deal of effort to develop and
test a suitable patch. Given the lack of field complaints about the
trigger issue, I'll desist for now. (Patching v11 for this seems
unwise anyway, given that it will have no more releases after next
month.)
Per bug #18147 from Hans Buschmann.
Amit Langote and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18147-6fc796538913ee88@postgresql.org
Enforce the rule from transam/README in XLogRegisterBuffer(), and
update callers to follow the rule.
Hash indexes sometimes register clean pages as a part of the locking
protocol, so provide a REGBUF_NO_CHANGE flag to support that use.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c84114f8-c7f1-5b57-f85a-3adc31e1a904@iki.fi
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas
This shouldn't change behavior except in the unusual case where
there are file in the tablespace directory that have entirely
numeric names but are nevertheless not possible names for a
tablespace directory, either because their names have leading zeroes
that shouldn't be there, or the value is actually zero, or because
the value is too large to represent as an OID.
In those cases, the directory would previously have made it into
the list of tablespaceinfo objects and no longer will. Thus, base
backups will now ignore such directories, instead of treating them
as legitimate tablespace directories. Similarly, if entries for
such tablespaces occur in a tablespace_map file, they will now
be rejected as erroneous, instead of being honored.
This is infrastructure for future work that wants to be able to
know the tablespace of each relation that is part of a backup
*as an OID*. By strengthening the up-front validation, we don't
have to worry about weird cases later, and can more easily avoid
repeated string->integer conversions.
Patch by me, reviewed by David Steele.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZNVeBzoqDL8xvr-nkaepq815jtDR4nJzPew7=3iEuM1g@mail.gmail.com
Instead of returning the number of characters in the RelFileNumber,
return the RelFileNumber itself. Continue to return the fork number,
as before, and additionally return the segment number.
parse_filename_for_nontemp_relation now rejects a RelFileNumber or
segment number that begins with a leading zero. Before, we accepted
such cases as relation filenames, but if we continued to do so after
this change, the function might return the same values for two
different files (e.g. 1234.5 and 001234.5 or 1234.005) which could be
annoying for callers. Since we don't actually ever generate filenames
with leading zeroes in the names, any such files that we find must
have been created by something other than PostgreSQL, and it is
therefore reasonable to treat them as non-relation files.
Along the way, change unlogged_relation_entry to store a RelFileNumber
rather than an OID. This update should have been made in
851f4cc75c, but it was overlooked.
It's trivial to make the update as part of this commit, perhaps more
trivial than it would have been without it, so do that.
Patch by me, reviewed by David Steele.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZNVeBzoqDL8xvr-nkaepq815jtDR4nJzPew7=3iEuM1g@mail.gmail.com
Previously, ALTER SYSTEM failed if the target GUC wasn't present in
the session's GUC hashtable. That is a reasonable behavior for core
(single-part) GUC names, and for custom GUCs for which we have loaded
an extension that's reserved the prefix. But it's unnecessarily
restrictive otherwise, and it also causes inconsistent behavior:
you can "ALTER SYSTEM SET foo.bar" only if you did "SET foo.bar"
earlier in the session. That's fairly silly.
Hence, refactor things so that we can execute ALTER SYSTEM even
if the variable doesn't have a GUC hashtable entry, as long as the
name meets the custom-variable naming requirements and does not
have a reserved prefix. (It's safe to do this even if the
variable belongs to an extension we currently don't have loaded.
A bad value will at worst cause a WARNING when the extension
does get loaded.)
Also, adjust GRANT ON PARAMETER to have the same opinions about
whether to allow an unrecognized GUC name, and to throw the
same errors if not (it previously used a one-size-fits-all
message for several distinguishable conditions). By default,
only a superuser will be allowed to do ALTER SYSTEM SET on an
unrecognized name, but it's possible to GRANT the ability to
do it.
Patch by me, pursuant to a documentation complaint from
Gavin Panella. Arguably this is a bug fix, but given the
lack of other complaints I'll refrain from back-patching.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2617358.1697501956@sss.pgh.pa.us
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/169746329791.169914.16613647309012285391@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Allow the COMMUTATOR, NEGATOR, MERGES, and HASHES attributes to be set
by ALTER OPERATOR. However, we don't allow COMMUTATOR/NEGATOR to be
changed once set, nor allow the MERGES/HASHES flags to be unset once
set. Changes like that might invalidate plans already made, and
dealing with the consequences seems like more trouble than it's worth.
The main use-case we foresee for this is to allow addition of missed
properties in extension update scripts, such as extending an existing
operator to support hashing. So only transitions from not-set to set
states seem very useful.
This patch also causes us to reject some incorrect cases that formerly
resulted in inconsistent catalog state, such as trying to set the
commutator of an operator to be some other operator that already has a
(different) commutator.
While at it, move the InvokeObjectPostCreateHook call for CREATE
OPERATOR to not occur until after we've fixed up commutator or negator
links as needed. The previous ordering could only be justified by
thinking of the OperatorUpd call as a kind of ALTER OPERATOR step;
but we don't call InvokeObjectPostAlterHook therein. It seems better
to let the hook see the final state of the operator object.
In the documentation, move the discussion of how to establish
commutator pairs from xoper.sgml to the CREATE OPERATOR ref page.
Tommy Pavlicek, reviewed and editorialized a bit by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEhP-W-vGVzf4udhR5M8Bdv88UYnPrhoSkj3ieR3QNrsGQoqdg@mail.gmail.com
This allows tools that read the WAL sequentially to identify (possible)
redo points when they're reached, rather than only being able to
detect them in retrospect when XLOG_CHECKPOINT_ONLINE is found, possibly
much later in the WAL stream. There are other possible applications as
well; see the discussion links below.
Any redo location that precedes the checkpoint location should now point
to an XLOG_CHECKPOINT_REDO record, so add a cross-check to verify this.
While adjusting the code in CreateCheckPoint() for this patch, I made it
call WALInsertLockAcquireExclusive a bit later than before, since there
appears to be no need for it to be held while checking whether the system
is idle, whether this is an end-of-recovery checkpoint, or what the current
timeline is.
Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC.
Patch by me, based in part on earlier work from Dilip Kumar. Review by
Dilip Kumar, Amit Kapila, Andres Freund, and Michael Paquier.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYy-Vc6G9QKcAKNksCa29cv__czr+N9X_QCxEfQVpp_8w@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20230614194717.jyuw3okxup4cvtbt%40awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKG+b2ego8=YNW2Ohe9QmSiReh1-ogrv8V_WZpJTqP3O+2w@mail.gmail.com
There was no I/O timing statistics for counting read and write timings
on local blocks, contrary to the counterparts for temp and shared
blocks. This information is available when track_io_timing is enabled.
The output of EXPLAIN is updated to show this information. An update of
pg_stat_statements is planned next.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ19Ss279mZuqGbuUNxka0iPbLgYuOQXqAKewrjNrp27VA@mail.gmail.com
These two counters, defined in BufferUsage to track respectively the
time spent while reading and writing blocks have historically only
tracked data related to shared buffers, when track_io_timing is enabled.
An upcoming patch to add specific counters for local buffers will take
advantage of this rename as it has come up that no data is currently
tracked for local buffers, and tracking local and shared buffers using
the same fields would be inconsistent with the treatment done for temp
buffers. Renaming the existing fields clarifies what the block type of
each stats field is.
pg_stat_statement is updated to reflect the rename. No extension
version bump is required as 5a3423ad8e has done one, affecting v17~.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ19Ss279mZuqGbuUNxka0iPbLgYuOQXqAKewrjNrp27VA@mail.gmail.com
An extra rule is needed in src/include/Makefile for VPATH builds to
install any generated server-side include files, and wait_event_types.h
was forgotten from the set.
Issue introduced by fa88928470.
Reported-by: Christoph Berg
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZTAA11u7CtX6NqlK@msg.df7cb.de
Remove use of LLVMGetElementType() and provide the type of all pointers
to LLVMBuildXXX() functions when emitting IR, as required by modern LLVM
versions[1].
* For LLVM <= 14, we'll still use the old LLVMBuildXXX() functions.
* For LLVM == 15, we'll continue to do the same, explicitly opting
out of opaque pointer mode.
* For LLVM >= 16, we'll use the new LLVMBuildXXX2() functions that take
the extra type argument.
The difference is hidden behind some new IR emitting wrapper functions
l_load(), l_gep(), l_call() etc. The change is mostly mechanical,
except that at each site the correct type had to be provided.
In some places we needed to do some extra work to get functions types,
including some new wrappers for C++ APIs that are not yet exposed by in
LLVM's C API, and some new "example" functions in llvmjit_types.c
because it's no longer possible to start from the function pointer type
and ask for the function type.
Back-patch to 12, because it's a little tricker in 11 and we agreed not
to put the latest LLVM support into the upcoming final release of 11.
[1] https://llvm.org/docs/OpaquePointers.html
Reviewed-by: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ronan Dunklau <ronan.dunklau@aiven.io>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKNX_%3Df%2B1C4r06WETKTq0G4Z_7q4L4Fxn5WWpMycDj9Fw%40mail.gmail.com
Since its introduction, LogLogicalMessage() (via the SQL interface
pg_logical_emit_message()) has never included a call to XLogFlush(),
causing it to potentially lose messages on a crash when used in
non-transactional mode. This has come up to me as a problem while
playing with ideas to design a test suite for what has become
039_end_of_wal.pl introduced in bae868caf2 by Thomas Munro, because
there are no direct ways to force a WAL flush via SQL.
The default is false, to not flush messages and influence existing
use-cases where this function could be used. If set to true, the
message emitted is flushed before returning back to the caller, making
the message durable on crash. This new option has no effect when using
pg_logical_emit_message() in transactional mode, as the record's flush
is guaranteed by the WAL record generated by the transaction committed.
Two queries of test_decoding are tweaked to cover the new code path for
the flush.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Amit Kapila, Fujii Masao, Tung Nguyen, Tomas
Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZNsdThSe2qgsfs7R@paquier.xyz
The SIGTERM handler for the startup process immediately calls
proc_exit() for the duration of the restore_command, i.e., a call
to system(). This system() call forks a new process to execute the
shell command, and this child process inherits the parent's signal
handlers. If both the parent and child processes receive SIGTERM,
both will attempt to call proc_exit(). This can end badly. For
example, both processes will try to remove themselves from the
PGPROC shared array.
To fix this problem, this commit adds a check in
StartupProcShutdownHandler() to see whether MyProcPid == getpid().
If they match, this is the parent process, and we can proc_exit()
like before. If they do not match, this is a child process, and we
just emit a message to STDERR (in a signal safe manner) and
_exit(), thereby skipping any problematic exit callbacks.
This commit also adds checks in proc_exit(), ProcKill(), and
AuxiliaryProcKill() that verify they are not being called within
such child processes.
Suggested-by: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y9nGDSgIm83FHcad%40paquier.xyz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230223231503.GA743455%40nathanxps13
Backpatch-through: 11
Restart the apply worker if the subscription owner's superuser privileges
have been revoked. This is required so that the subscription connection
string gets revalidated and use the password option to connect to the
publisher for non-superusers, if required.
Author: Vignesh C
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm2Dxmhq08nr4P6G+24QvdBo_GAVyZ_Q1TcGYK+8NHs9xw@mail.gmail.com
This commit introduces trigger on login event, allowing to fire some actions
right on the user connection. This can be useful for logging or connection
check purposes as well as for some personalization of environment. Usage
details are described in the documentation included, but shortly usage is
the same as for other triggers: create function returning event_trigger and
then create event trigger on login event.
In order to prevent the connection time overhead when there are no triggers
the commit introduces pg_database.dathasloginevt flag, which indicates database
has active login triggers. This flag is set by CREATE/ALTER EVENT TRIGGER
command, and unset at connection time when no active triggers found.
Author: Konstantin Knizhnik, Mikhail Gribkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0d46d29f-4558-3af9-9c85-7774e14a7709%40postgrespro.ru
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule, Takayuki Tsunakawa, Greg Nancarrow, Ivan Panchenko
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Teodor Sigaev, Robert Haas, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Andrey Sokolov, Zhihong Yu, Sergey Shinderuk
Reviewed-by: Gregory Stark, Nikita Malakhov, Ted Yu
Under interval_ops, some equal values are distinguishable. One such
pair is '24:00:00' and '1 day'. With that being so, btequalimage()
breaches the documented contract for the "equalimage" btree support
function. This can cause incorrect results from index-only scans.
Users should REINDEX any btree indexes having interval-type columns.
After updating, pg_amcheck will report an error for almost all such
indexes. This fix makes interval_ops simply omit the support function,
like numeric_ops does. Back-pack to v13, where btequalimage() first
appeared. In back branches, for the benefit of old catalog content,
btequalimage() code will return false for type "interval". Going
forward, back-branch initdb will include the catalog change.
Reviewed by Peter Geoghegan.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231011013317.22.nmisch@google.com
For the same reasons given in commit 403ac226d, adjust these
functions to not assume that checking SearchSysCacheExists can
guarantee success of a later fetch.
This follows the same internal API choices made in the earlier commit:
add a function XXXExt(oid, is_missing) and use that to eliminate
the need for a separate existence check. The changes are very
straightforward, though tedious. For the moment I just made the new
functions static in namespace.c, but we could export them if a need
emerges.
Per bug #18014 from Alexander Lakhin. Given the lack of hard evidence
that there's a bug in non-debug builds, I'm content to fix this only
in HEAD.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18014-28c81cb79d44295d@postgresql.org
The versions of these functions that accept object OIDs are supposed
to return NULL, rather than failing, if the target object has been
dropped. This makes it safe(r) to use them in queries that scan
catalogs, since the functions will be applied to objects that are
visible in the query's snapshot but might now be gone according to
the catalog snapshot. In most cases we implemented this by doing
a SearchSysCacheExists test and assuming that if that succeeds, we
can safely invoke the appropriate aclchk.c function, which will
immediately re-fetch the same syscache entry. It was argued that
if the existence test succeeds then the followup fetch must succeed
as well, for lack of any intervening AcceptInvalidationMessages call.
Alexander Lakhin demonstrated that this is not so when
CATCACHE_FORCE_RELEASE is enabled: the syscache entry will be forcibly
dropped at the end of SearchSysCacheExists, and then it is possible
for the catalog snapshot to get advanced while re-fetching the entry.
Alexander's test case requires the operation to happen inside a
parallel worker, but that seems incidental to the fundamental problem.
What remains obscure is whether there is a way for this to happen in a
non-debug build. Nonetheless, CATCACHE_FORCE_RELEASE is a very useful
test methodology, so we'd better make the code safe for it.
After some discussion we concluded that the most future-proof fix
is to give up the assumption that checking SearchSysCacheExists can
guarantee success of a later fetch. At best that assumption leads
to fragile code --- for example, has_type_privilege appears broken
for array types even if you believe the assumption holds. And it's
not even particularly efficient.
There had already been some work towards extending the aclchk.c
APIs to include "is_missing" output flags, so this patch extends
that work to cover all the aclchk.c functions that are used by the
has_xxx_privilege() functions. (This allows getting rid of some
ad-hoc decisions about not throwing errors in certain places in
aclchk.c.)
In passing, this fixes the has_sequence_privilege() functions to
provide the same guarantees as their cousins: for some reason the
SearchSysCacheExists tests never got added to those.
There is more work to do to remove the unsafe coding pattern with
SearchSysCacheExists in other places, but this is a pretty
self-contained patch so I'll commit it separately.
Per bug #18014 from Alexander Lakhin. Given the lack of hard evidence
that there's a bug in non-debug builds, I'm content to fix this only
in HEAD. (Perhaps we should clean up the has_sequence_privilege()
oversight in the back branches, but in the absence of field complaints
I'm not too excited about that either.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18014-28c81cb79d44295d@postgresql.org
* sync_method is renamed to wal_sync_method.
* sync_method_options[] is renamed to wal_sync_method_options[].
* assign_xlog_sync_method() is renamed to assign_wal_sync_method().
* The names of the available synchronization methods are now
prefixed with "WAL_SYNC_METHOD_" and have been moved into a
WalSyncMethod enum.
* PLATFORM_DEFAULT_SYNC_METHOD is renamed to
PLATFORM_DEFAULT_WAL_SYNC_METHOD, and DEFAULT_SYNC_METHOD is
renamed to DEFAULT_WAL_SYNC_METHOD.
These more descriptive names help distinguish the code for
wal_sync_method from the code for DataDirSyncMethod (e.g., the
recovery_init_sync_method configuration parameter and the
--sync-method option provided by several frontend utilities). This
change also prevents name collisions between the aforementioned
sets of code. Since this only improves the naming of internal
identifiers, there should be no behavior change.
Author: Maxim Orlov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACG%3DezbL1gwE7_K7sr9uqaCGkWhmvRTcTEnm3%2BX1xsRNwbXULQ%40mail.gmail.com
When converting a timestamp to/from with/without time zone, the SQL
Standard specifies an AT LOCAL variant of AT TIME ZONE which uses the
session's time zone. This includes three system functions able to do
the work in the same way as the existing flavors for AT TIME ZONE,
except that these need to be marked as stable as they depend on the
session's TimeZone GUC.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Vik Fearing
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe, Cary Huang, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8e25dec4-5667-c1a5-6581-167d710c2182@postgresfriends.org
This adds a new option called BGWORKER_BYPASS_ROLELOGINCHECK to the
flags available to BackgroundWorkerInitializeConnection() and
BackgroundWorkerInitializeConnectionByOid().
This gives the possibility to bgworkers to bypass the role login check,
making possible the use of a role that has no login rights while not
being a superuser. PostgresInit() gains a new flag called
INIT_PG_OVERRIDE_ROLE_LOGIN, taking advantage of the refactoring done in
4800a5dfb4.
Regression tests are added to worker_spi to check the behavior of this
new option with bgworkers.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Michael Paquier, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bcc36259-7850-4882-97ef-d6b905d2fc51@gmail.com
InitPostgres() has been using a set of boolean arguments to control its
behavior, and a patch under discussion was aiming at expanding it with a
third one. In preparation for expanding this area, this commit switches
all the current boolean arguments of this routine to a single bits32
argument instead. Two values are currently supported for the flags:
- INIT_PG_LOAD_SESSION_LIBS to load [session|local]_preload_libraries at
startup.
- INIT_PG_OVERRIDE_ALLOW_CONNS to allow connection to a database even if
it has !datallowconn. This is used by bgworkers.
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZSTn66_BXRZCeaqS@paquier.xyz
The comment claimed that it is "called from postmaster", but it is
actually called in the child process, pretty early in the process
initialization. I guess you could interpret "called from postmaster"
to mean that, but it seems wrong to me. Rename the function to be
consistent with other functions with similar role.
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/4f95c1fc-ad3c-7974-3a8c-6faa3931804c@iki.fi
Going by c4a1933b4, b33ef397a and 05893712c (to name just a few), it seems
that maintaining debug_print_rel() is often forgotten. In the case of
c4a1933b4, it was several years before anyone noticed that a path type
was not handled by debug_print_rel(). (debug_print_rel() is only
compiled when building with OPTIMIZER_DEBUG).
After a quick survey on the pgsql-hackers mailing list, nobody came
forward to admit that they use OPTIMIZER_DEBUG. So to prevent any future
maintenance neglect, let's just remove debug_print_rel() and have
OPTIMIZER_DEBUG make use of pprint() instead (as suggested by Tom Lane).
If anyone wants to come forward to claim they make use of
OPTIMIZER_DEBUG in a way that they need debug_print_rel() then they have
around 10 months remaining in the v17 cycle where we could revert this.
If nobody comes forward in that time, then we can likely safely declare
debug_print_rel() as not worth keeping.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvoCdjo8Cu2zEZF4-AxWG-90S+pYXAnoDDa9J3xH-OrczQ@mail.gmail.com
Back in the 8.3 era we discovered that it was problematic if
libpq.so had encoding ID assignments different from the backend,
which is possible because on some platforms libpq.so might be
of a different major version from the calling programs.
psql should use libpq's assignments, but initdb has to use the
backend's, else it will put wrong values into pg_database.
The solution devised in commit 8468146b0 relied on giving initdb
its own copy of encnames.c rather than relying on the functions
exported by libpq. Later, that metamorphosed into ensuring that
libpgcommon got linked before libpq -- which made things OK for
initdb but broke psql. We didn't notice for lack of any changes
in enum pg_enc since then. Commit 06843df4a reversed that, fixing
the latent bug in psql but adding one in initdb. The meson build
infrastructure is also not being sufficiently careful about link
order, and trying to make it so would be equally fragile.
Hence, let's use a new scheme based on giving the libpq-exported
symbols different real names than the same functions exported from
libpgcommon.a or libpgcommon_srv.a. (We could distinguish those
two cases as well, but there seems no need to.) libpq gets the
official names to avoid an ABI break for libpq clients, while the
other cases use #define's to make the real names "xxx_private"
rather than "xxx". By controlling where the #define's are
applied, we can force any particular client program to use one
set or the other of the encnames.c functions.
We cannot back-patch this, since it'd be an ABI break for backend
loadable modules, but there seems little need to. We're just
trying to ensure that the world is safe for hypothetical future
additions to enum pg_enc.
In passing this should fix "duplicate symbol" linker warnings
that we've been seeing on AIX buildfarm members since commit
06843df4a. It's not very clear why that linker is complaining
now, when there were strictly *more* duplicates visible before,
but in any case this should remove the reason for complaint.
Patch by me; thanks to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2385119.1696354473@sss.pgh.pa.us
Currently, B-tree code matches every scan key to every item on the page.
Imagine the ordered B-tree scan for the query like this.
SELECT * FROM tbl WHERE col > 'a' AND col < 'b' ORDER BY col;
The (col > 'a') scan key will be always matched once we find the location to
start the scan. The (col < 'b') scan key will match every item on the page
as long as it matches the last item on the page.
This patch implements prechecking of the scan keys required for directional
scan on beginning of page scan. If precheck is successful we can skip this
scan keys check for the items on the page. That could lead to significant
acceleration especially if the comparison operator is expensive.
Idea from patch by Konstantin Knizhnik.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/079c3f8e-3371-abe2-e93c-fc8a0ae3f571%40garret.ru
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan, Pavel Borisov
BuildDescForRelation() main job is to convert ColumnDef lists to
pg_attribute/tuple descriptor arrays, which is really mostly an
internal subroutine of DefineRelation() and some related functions,
which is more the remit of tablecmds.c and doesn't have much to do
with the basic tuple descriptor interfaces in tupdesc.c. This is also
supported by observing the header includes we can remove in tupdesc.c.
By moving it over, we can also (in the future) make
BuildDescForRelation() use more internals of tablecmds.c that are not
sensible to be exposed in tupdesc.c.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/52a125e4-ff9a-95f5-9f61-b87cf447e4da@eisentraut.org
Keep track of the used size of the array. That avoids looping through
the whole array in a few places. It doesn't matter from a performance
point of view since the array is small anyway, but this feels less
surprising and is a little less code. Now that we have an explicit
NumListenSockets variable that is statically initialized to 0, we
don't need the loop to initialize the array.
Allocate the array in PostmasterContext. The array isn't needed in
child processes, so this allows reusing that memory. We could easily
make the array resizable now, but we haven't heard any complaints
about the current 64 sockets limit.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7bb7ad65-a018-2419-742f-fa5fd877d338@iki.fi
Previously, the JSON code didn't have to worry too much about freeing
JsonLexContext, because it was never too long-lived. With new features
being added for SQL/JSON this is no longer the case. Add a routine
that knows how to free this struct and apply that to a few places, to
prevent this from becoming problematic.
At the same time, we change the API of makeJsonLexContextCstringLen to
make it receive a pointer to JsonLexContext for callers that want it to
be stack-allocated; it can also be passed as NULL to get the original
behavior of a palloc'ed one.
This also causes an ABI break due to the addition of flags to
JsonLexContext, so we can't easily backpatch it. AFAICS that's not much
of a problem; apparently some leaks might exist in JSON usage of
text-search, for example via json_to_tsvector, but I haven't seen any
complaints about that.
Per Coverity complaint about datum_to_jsonb_internal().
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230808174110.oq3iymllsv6amkih@alvherre.pgsql
It is unnecessary to include this field in IndexInfo. It is only used
by DDL code, not during execution. It is really only used to pass
local information around between functions in index.c and indexcmds.c,
for which it is clearer to use local variables, like in similar cases.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/f84640e3-00d3-5abd-3f41-e6a19d33c40b@eisentraut.org
The retry loop is needed because heap_page_prune() calls
HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum() and then lazy_scan_prune() does the same
thing again, and they might get different answers due to concurrent
clog updates. But this patch makes heap_page_prune() return the
HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum() results that it computed back to the
caller, which allows lazy_scan_prune() to avoid needing to recompute
those values in the first place. That's nice both because it eliminates
the need for a retry loop and also because it's cheaper.
Melanie Plageman, reviewed by David Geier, Andres Freund, and me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_br124qsGJieuYA0nGjywEukhK1dKBfRdby_4yY3E9SXA%40mail.gmail.com
This adjusts the expression evaluation code for CoerceViaIO and
CoerceToDomain to handle errors softly if needed.
For CoerceViaIo, this means using InputFunctionCallSafe(), which
provides the option to handle errors softly, instead of calling the
type input function directly.
For CoerceToDomain, this simply entails replacing the ereport() in
ExecEvalConstraintCheck() by errsave().
In both cases, the ErrorSaveContext to be used when evaluating the
expression is stored by ExecInitExprRec() in the expression's struct
in the expression's ExprEvalStep. The ErrorSaveContext is passed by
setting ExprState.escontext to point to it when calling
ExecInitExprRec() on the expression whose errors are to be handled
softly.
Note that no call site of ExecInitExprRec() has been changed in this
commit, so there's no functional change. This is intended for
implementing new SQL/JSON expression nodes in future commits that
will use to it suppress errors that may occur during type coercions.
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
These options already exist, but you need to specify a column list for
them, which can be cumbersome. We already have the possibility of all
columns for FORCE QUOTE, so this is simply extending that facility to
FORCE_NULL and FORCE_NOT_NULL.
Author: Zhang Mingli
Reviewed-By: Richard Guo, Kyatoro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxEnVqzOFtqhexF2+AwOKFrV8zHOY3y=p+gPK6eB14pn_w@mail.gmail.com
Under some circumstances, concurrent MERGE operations could lead to
inconsistent results, that varied according the plan chosen. This was
caused by a lack of rowmarks on the source relation, which meant that
EvalPlanQual rechecking was not guaranteed to return the same source
tuples when re-running the join query.
Fix by ensuring that preprocess_rowmarks() sets up PlanRowMarks for
all non-target relations used in MERGE, in the same way that it does
for UPDATE and DELETE.
Per bug #18103. Back-patch to v15, where MERGE was introduced.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Richard Guo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18103-c4386baab8e355e3%40postgresql.org
nbtree's mark/restore processing failed to correctly handle an edge case
involving array key advancement and related search-type scan key state.
Scans with ScalarArrayScalarArrayOpExpr quals requiring mark/restore
processing (for a merge join) could incorrectly conclude that an
affected array/scan key must not have advanced during the time between
marking and restoring the scan's position.
As a result of all this, array key handling within btrestrpos could skip
a required call to _bt_preprocess_keys(). This confusion allowed later
primitive index scans to overlook tuples matching the true current array
keys. The scan's search-type scan keys would still have spurious values
corresponding to the final array element(s) -- not values matching the
first/now-current array element(s).
To fix, remember that "array key wraparound" has taken place during the
ongoing btrescan in a flag variable stored in the scan's state, and use
that information at the point where btrestrpos decides if another call
to _bt_preprocess_keys is required.
Oversight in commit 70bc5833, which taught nbtree to handle array keys
during mark/restore processing, but missed this subtlety. That commit
was itself a bug fix for an issue in commit 9e8da0f7, which taught
nbtree to handle ScalarArrayOpExpr quals natively.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkgP3DDRJxw6DgjCxo-cu-DKrvjEv_ArkP2ctBJatDCYg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 11- (all supported branches).
Previously, one of the values in the struct was returned as the return
value, and another was returned via an output parameter. In
preparation for returning more stuff, consolidate both values into a
struct returned via an output parameter.
Melanie Plageman, reviewed by Andres Freund and by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_br124qsGJieuYA0nGjywEukhK1dKBfRdby_4yY3E9SXA%40mail.gmail.com
This commit changes the query jumbling of CallStmt so as its IN/OUT
parameters are able to show up as constants with a parameter symbol in
pg_stat_statements, like:
CALL proc1($1, $2);
CALL proc2($1, $2, $3);
The transformed FuncExpr is used in the query ID computation instead of
the FuncCall generated by the parser, so as it is sensitive to the OID
of the procedure and its list of input arguments. The output arguments
are handled in a separate list in CallStmt, which is also included in
the computation.
Tests are added to pg_stat_statements to show how this affects CALL with
IN/OUT parameters as well as overloaded functions.
Like 638d42a3c5 or 31de7e60da, this improves the monitoring of
workloads with a lot of CALL statements, preventing unnecessary bloat
when these use different input (or event output) values.
Author: Sami Imseih
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B44FA29D-EBD0-4DD9-ABC2-16F1CB087074@amazon.com
This commit removes unnecessary ExecExprFreeContext() calls in
ExecEnd* routines because the actual cleanup is managed by
FreeExecutorState(). With no callers remaining for
ExecExprFreeContext(), this commit also removes the function.
This commit also drops redundant ExecClearTuple() calls, because
ExecResetTupleTable() in ExecEndPlan() already takes care of
resetting and dropping all TupleTableSlots initialized with
ExecInitScanTupleSlot() and ExecInitExtraTupleSlot().
After these modifications, the ExecEnd*() routines for ValuesScan,
NamedTuplestoreScan, and WorkTableScan became redundant. So, this
commit removes them.
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFGkMSge6TgC9KQzde0ohpAycLQuV7ooitEEpbKB0O_mg@mail.gmail.com
"in_streaming" is a flag used to track if an instance of pgoutput is
streaming changes. When pgoutput is started, the flag was always reset,
switched it back and forth in the stream start/stop callbacks.
Before this commit, it was a global variable, which is confusing as it
is actually attached to a state of PGOutputData. Per my analysis, using
a global variable did not lead to an active bug like in 54ccfd6586,
but it makes the code more consistent. Note that we cannot backpatch
this change anyway as it requires the addition of a new field to
PGOutputData, exposed in pgoutput.h.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Michael Paquier, Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB571690EF24F51F51EFFCBB0E94FAA@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
This unifies some repetitive code.
Note: I didn't push the "not found" error message into the new
function, even though all existing callers would be able to make use
of it. Using the existing error handling as-is would probably require
exposing the Relation type via tupdesc.h, which doesn't seem
desirable. (Or even if we changed it to just report the OID, it would
inject the concept of a relation containing the tuple descriptor into
tupdesc.h, which might be a layering violation. Perhaps some further
improvements could be considered here separately.)
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/52a125e4-ff9a-95f5-9f61-b87cf447e4da%40eisentraut.org
When performing inlining LLVM unfortunately "leaks" types (the
types survive and are usable, but a new round of inlining will
recreate new structurally equivalent types). This accumulation
will over time amount to a memory leak which for some queries
can be large enough to trigger the OOM process killer.
To avoid accumulation of types, all IR related data is stored
in an LLVMContextRef which is dropped and recreated in order
to release all types. Dropping and recreating incurs overhead,
so it will be done only after 100 queries. This is a heuristic
which might be revisited, but until we can get the size of the
context from LLVM we are flying a bit blind.
This issue has been reported several times, there may be more
references to it in the archives on top of the threads linked
below.
Backpatching of this fix will be handled once it has matured
in master for a bit.
Reported-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reported-By: Kurt Roeckx <kurt@roeckx.be>
Reported-By: Jaime Casanova <jcasanov@systemguards.com.ec>
Reported-By: Lauri Laanmets <pcspets@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund and Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7acc8678-df5f-4923-9cf6-e843131ae89d@www.fastmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20201218235607.GC30237@telsasoft.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPH-tTxLf44s3CvUUtQpkDr1D8Hxqc2NGDzGXS1ODsfiJ6WSqA@mail.gmail.com
Commit b059d2f456 introduced llvm_types_module and accidentally
exported it. As there is no usecase for accessing this variable
externally, this makes it static.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221101055132.pjjsvlkeo4stbjkq@awork3.anarazel.de
The pgoutput module uses a global variable (publish_no_origin) to cache
the action for the origin filter, but we didn't reset the flag when
shutting down the output plugin, so subsequent retries may access the
previous publish_no_origin value.
We fix this by storing the flag in the output plugin's private data.
Additionally, the patch removes the currently unused origin string from the
structure.
For the back branch, to avoid changing the exposed structure, we eliminated the
global variable and instead directly used the origin string for change
filtering.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Michael Paquier
Backpatch-through: 16
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB571690EF24F51F51EFFCBB0E94FAA@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Thanks to commit 2a8b40e368, the logical replication worker type is
easily determined. The worker type could already be deduced via
other columns such as leader_pid and relid, but that is unnecessary
complexity for users.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Maxim Orlov, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut%2BPtmbSMfErSk0S7xxVdZJ9XVE3xVLhqBTmT91kf57BeKDQ%40mail.gmail.com
In a 64-bit build there's an awful lot of useless pad space in
ParsedWords. Since we may allocate large arrays of these,
it's worth some effort to reduce their size.
Here we reduce the alen field from uint32 to uint16, and then re-order
the fields to avoid unnecessary padding. alen is only used to
remember the allocated size of the apos[] array, which is not allowed
to exceed MAXNUMPOS (256) elements, so uint16 is plenty of space for
it. That gets us from 40 bytes to 24 on 64-bit builds, and from 20
bytes to 16 on 32-bit builds.
Per discussion of bug #18080. Unfortunately this is an ABI break
so we can't back-patch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1146921.1695411070@sss.pgh.pa.us
In order to troubleshoot misbehaving or buggy event triggers, the
documented advice is to enter single-user mode. In an attempt to
reduce the number of situations where single-user mode is required
(or even recommended) for non-extraordinary maintenance, this GUC
allows to temporarily suspend event triggers.
This was originally extracted from a larger patchset which aimed
at supporting event triggers on login events.
Reviewed-by: Ted Yu <yuzhihong@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Mikhail Gribkov <youzhick@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9140106E-F9BF-4D85-8FC8-F2D3C094A6D9@yesql.se
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0d46d29f-4558-3af9-9c85-7774e14a7709@postgrespro.ru
The computation of the column
information_schema.check_constraints.check_clause used
pg_get_constraintdef() plus some string manipulation to get the check
clause back out. This ended up with an extra pair of parentheses,
which is only an aesthetic problem, but also with suffixes like "NOT
VALID", which don't belong into that column. We can fix both of these
problems and simplify the code by just using pg_get_expr() instead.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/799b59ef-3330-f0d2-ee23-8cdfa1740987@eisentraut.org
This commit introduces binaryheap_remove_node(), which can be used
to remove any node from a binary heap. The implementation is
straightforward. The target node is replaced with the last node in
the heap, and then we sift as needed to preserve the heap property.
This new function is intended for use in a follow-up commit that
will improve the performance of pg_restore.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3612876.1689443232%40sss.pgh.pa.us
There are a couple of places in frontend code that could make use
of this simple binary heap implementation. This commit makes
binaryheap usable in frontend code, much like commit 26aaf97b68 did
for StringInfo. Like StringInfo, the header file is left in lib/
to reduce the likelihood of unnecessary breakage.
The frontend version of binaryheap exposes a void *-based API since
frontend code does not have access to the Datum definitions. This
seemed like a better approach than switching all existing uses to
void * or making the Datum definitions available to frontend code.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3612876.1689443232%40sss.pgh.pa.us
It's entirely possible for a logical slot to have a confirmed_flush LSN
higher than the last value saved on disk while not being marked as dirty.
Currently, it is not a major problem but a later patch adding support for
the upgrade of slots relies on that value being properly flushed to disk.
It can also help avoid processing the same transactions again in some
boundary cases after the clean shutdown and restart. Say, we process
some transactions for which we didn't send anything downstream (the
changes got filtered) but the confirm_flush LSN is updated due to
keepalives. As we don't flush the latest value of confirm_flush LSN, it
may lead to processing the same changes again without this patch.
The approach taken by this patch has been suggested by Ashutosh Bapat.
Author: Vignesh C, Julien Rouhaud, Kuroda Hayato
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Dilip Kumar, Michael Paquier, Ashutosh Bapat, Peter Smith, Hou Zhijie
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1JzJagMmb_E8D4au=GYQkxox0AfNBm1FbP7sy7t4YWXPQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB58664C81887B3AF2EB6B16E3F5939@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
generation_counter includes time spent on both JIT:ing expressions
and tuple deforming which are configured independently via options
jit_expressions and jit_tuple_deforming. As they are combined in
the same counter it's not apparent what fraction of time the tuple
deforming takes.
This adds deform_counter dedicated to tuple deforming, which allows
seeing more directly the influence jit_tuple_deforming is having on
the query. The counter is exposed in EXPLAIN and pg_stat_statements
bumpin pg_stat_statements to 1.11.
Author: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220612091253.eegstkufdsu4kfls@erthalion.local
Now that we have catalogued not-null constraints, our information_schema
definition can be updated to grab those rather than fabricate synthetic
definitions.
Note that we still don't have catalog rows for not-null constraints on
domains, but we've never had not-null constraints listed in
information_schema, so that's a problem to be solved separately.
Co-authored-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Co-authored-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/81b461c4-edab-5d8c-2f88-203108425340@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202309041710.psytrxlsiqex@alvherre.pgsql
We shouldn't be doing non-trivial work in signal handlers in general,
and in this case the handler could reach unsafe code and corrupt state.
It also clobbered its own "reason" code.
Move all recovery conflict decision logic into the next
CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(), and have the signal handler just set flags and
the latch, following the standard pattern. Since there are several
different "reasons", use a separate flag for each.
With this refactoring, the recovery conflict system no longer
piggy-backs on top of the regular query cancelation mechanism, but
instead raises an error directly if it decides that is necessary. It
still needs to respect QueryCancelHoldoffCount, because otherwise the
FEBE protocol might get out of sync (see commit 2b3a8b20c2).
This fixes one class of intermittent failure in the new
031_recovery_conflict.pl test added by commit 9f8a050f, though the buggy
coding is much older. Failures outside contrived testing seem to be
very rare (or perhaps incorrectly attributed) in the field, based on
lack of reports.
No back-patch for now due to complexity and release schedule. We have
the option to back-patch into 16 later, as 16 has prerequisite commit
bea3d7e.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version)
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz> (earlier version)
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (earlier version)
Tested-by: Christoph Berg <myon@debian.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGK3PGKwcKqzoosamn36YW-fsuTdOPPF1i_rtEO%3DnEYKSg%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVr8au2J_9D88UfRCi0JdWhyQDDxAcSVav0B0irx9nXEg%40mail.gmail.com
This commit allows specifying a --sync-method in several frontend
utilities that must synchronize many files to disk (initdb,
pg_basebackup, pg_checksums, pg_dump, pg_rewind, and pg_upgrade).
On Linux, users can specify "syncfs" to synchronize the relevant
file systems instead of calling fsync() for every single file. In
many cases, using syncfs() is much faster.
As with recovery_init_sync_method, this new option comes with some
caveats. The descriptions of these caveats have been moved to a
new appendix section in the documentation.
Co-authored-by: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Thomas Munro, Robert Haas, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210930004340.GM831%40telsasoft.com
This commit adds support for using syncfs() in fsync_pgdata() and
fsync_dir_recurse() (which have been renamed to sync_pgdata() and
sync_dir_recurse()). Like recovery_init_sync_method,
sync_pgdata() calls syncfs() for the data directory, each
tablespace, and pg_wal (if it is a symlink). For now, all of the
frontend utilities that use these support functions are hard-coded
to use fsync(), but a follow-up commit will allow specifying
syncfs().
Co-authored-by: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210930004340.GM831%40telsasoft.com
This commit renames RecoveryInitSyncMethod to DataDirSyncMethod and
moves it to common/file_utils.h. This is preparatory work for a
follow-up commit that will allow specifying the synchronization
method in frontend utilities such as pg_upgrade and pg_basebackup.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZN2ZB4afQ2JbR9TA%40paquier.xyz
Presently, frontend code that needs to use these macros must either
include storage/fd.h, which declares several frontend-unsafe
functions, or duplicate the macros. This commit moves these macros
to common/file_utils.h, which is safe for both frontend and backend
code. Consequently, we can also remove the duplicated macros in
pg_checksums and stop including storage/fd.h in pg_rewind.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZOP5qoUualu5xl2Z%40paquier.xyz
Unlike the other pg_stat_get_backend* functions,
pg_stat_get_backend_subxact() looks up the backend entry by using
its integer argument as a 1-based index in an internal array. The
other functions look for the entry with the matching session
backend ID. These numbers often match, but that isn't reliably
true.
This commit resolves this discrepancy by introducing
pgstat_get_local_beentry_by_backend_id() and using it in
pg_stat_get_backend_subxact(). We cannot use
pgstat_get_beentry_by_backend_id() because it returns a
PgBackendStatus, which lacks the locally computed additions
available in LocalPgBackendStatus that are required by
pg_stat_get_backend_subxact().
Author: Ian Barwick
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih, Michael Paquier, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB8KJ%3Dj-ACb3H4L9a_b3ZG3iCYDW5aEu3WsPAzkm2S7JzS1Few%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 16
Presently, pgstat_fetch_stat_beentry() accepts a session's backend
ID as its argument, and pgstat_fetch_stat_local_beentry() accepts a
1-based index in an internal array as its argument. The former is
typically used wherever a user must provide a backend ID, and the
latter is usually used internally when looping over all entries in
the array. This difference was first introduced by d7e39d72ca.
Before that commit, both functions accepted a 1-based index to the
internal array.
This commit renames these two functions to make it clear whether
they use the backend ID or the 1-based index to look up the entry.
This is preparatory work for a follow-up change that will introduce
a function for looking up a LocalPgBackendStatus using a backend
ID.
Reviewed-by: Ian Barwick, Sami Imseih, Michael Paquier, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB8KJ%3Dj-ACb3H4L9a_b3ZG3iCYDW5aEu3WsPAzkm2S7JzS1Few%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 16
It makes no sense to add a NO INHERIT not-null constraint to a child
table that already has one in that column inherited from its parent.
Disallow that, and add tests for the relevant cases.
Per complaint from Kyotaro Horiguchi. I also used part of his proposed
patch.
Co-authored-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230828.161658.1184657435220765047.horikyota.ntt@gmail.com
The logical_replication_mode GUC is intended for testing and debugging
purposes, but its current name may be misleading and encourage users to make
unnecessary changes.
To avoid confusion, renaming the GUC to a less misleading name
debug_logical_replication_streaming that casual users are less likely to mistakenly
assume needs to be modified in a regular logical replication setup.
Author: Hou Zhijie <houzj.fnst@cn.fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d672d774-c44b-6fec-f993-793e744f169a%40eisentraut.org
Make the primary messages more compact and make the detail messages
uniform. In initdb.c and pg_resetwal.c, use the newish
option_parse_int() to simplify some of the option parsing. For the
backend GUC wal_segment_size, add a GUC check hook to do the
verification instead of coding it in bootstrap.c. This might be
overkill, but that way the check is in the right place and it becomes
more self-documenting.
In passing, make pg_controldata use the logging API for warning
messages.
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9939aa8a-d7be-da2c-7715-0a0b5535a1f7@eisentraut.org
This commit switches query jumbling so as prepared statement names are
treated as constants in DeallocateStmt. A boolean field is added to
DeallocateStmt to make a distinction between ALL and named prepared
statements, as "name" was used to make this difference before, NULL
meaning DEALLOCATE ALL.
Prior to this commit, DEALLOCATE was not tracked in pg_stat_statements,
for the reason that it was not possible to treat its name parameter as a
constant. Now that query jumbling applies to all the utility nodes,
this reason does not apply anymore.
Like 638d42a3c5, this can be a huge advantage for monitoring where
prepared statement names are randomly generated, preventing bloat in
pg_stat_statements. A couple of tests are added to track the new
behavior.
Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZMhT9kNtJJsHw6jK@paquier.xyz
We now create contype='n' pg_constraint rows for not-null constraints.
We propagate these constraints to other tables during operations such as
adding inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions and
creating tables LIKE other tables. We also spawn not-null constraints
for inheritance child tables when their parents have primary keys.
These related constraints mostly follow the well-known rules of
conislocal and coninhcount that we have for CHECK constraints, with some
adaptations: for example, as opposed to CHECK constraints, we don't
match not-null ones by name when descending a hierarchy to alter it,
instead matching by column name that they apply to. This means we don't
require the constraint names to be identical across a hierarchy.
For now, we omit them for system catalogs. Maybe this is worth
reconsidering. We don't support NOT VALID nor DEFERRABLE clauses
either; these can be added as separate features later (this patch is
already large and complicated enough.)
psql shows these constraints in \d+.
pg_dump requires some ad-hoc hacks, particularly when dumping a primary
key. We now create one "throwaway" not-null constraint for each column
in the PK together with the CREATE TABLE command, and once the PK is
created, all those throwaway constraints are removed. This avoids
having to check each tuple for nullness when the dump restores the
primary key creation.
pg_upgrading from an older release requires a somewhat brittle procedure
to create a constraint state that matches what would be created if the
database were being created fresh in Postgres 17. I have tested all the
scenarios I could think of, and it works correctly as far as I can tell,
but I could have neglected weird cases.
This patch has been very long in the making. The first patch was
written by Bernd Helmle in 2010 to add a new pg_constraint.contype value
('n'), which I (Álvaro) then hijacked in 2011 and 2012, until that one
was killed by the realization that we ought to use contype='c' instead:
manufactured CHECK constraints. However, later SQL standard
development, as well as nonobvious emergent properties of that design
(mostly, failure to distinguish them from "normal" CHECK constraints as
well as the performance implication of having to test the CHECK
expression) led us to reconsider this choice, so now the current
implementation uses contype='n' again. During Postgres 16 this had
already been introduced by commit e056c557ae, but there were some
problems mainly with the pg_upgrade procedure that couldn't be fixed in
reasonable time, so it was reverted.
In 2016 Vitaly Burovoy also worked on this feature[1] but found no
consensus for his proposed approach, which was claimed to be closer to
the letter of the standard, requiring an additional pg_attribute column
to track the OID of the not-null constraint for that column.
[1] https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Commit 2a8b40e36 introduces the worker type field for logical replication
workers, but forgot to reset the type when the worker exits. This can lead
to recognizing a stopped worker as a valid logical replication worker.
Fix it by resetting the worker type and additionally adding the safeguard
to not use LogicalRepWorker until ->in_use is verified.
Reported-by: Thomas Munro based on cfbot reports.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Alvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGK2RQh4LifVgBmkHsCYChP-65UwGXOmnCzYVa5aAt4GWg@mail.gmail.com
Revalidation of a plancache entry (after a cache invalidation event)
requires acquiring a snapshot. Normally that is harmless, but not
if the cached statement is one that needs to run without acquiring a
snapshot. We were already aware of that for TransactionStmts,
but for some reason hadn't extrapolated to the other statements that
PlannedStmtRequiresSnapshot() knows mustn't set a snapshot. This can
lead to unexpected failures of commands such as SET TRANSACTION
ISOLATION LEVEL. We can fix it in the same way, by excluding those
command types from revalidation.
However, we can do even better than that: there is no need to
revalidate for any statement type for which parse analysis, rewrite,
and plan steps do nothing interesting, which is nearly all utility
commands. To mechanize this, invent a parser function
stmt_requires_parse_analysis() that tells whether parse analysis does
anything beyond wrapping a CMD_UTILITY Query around the raw parse
tree. If that's what it does, then rewrite and plan will just
skip the Query, so that it is not possible for the same raw parse
tree to produce a different plan tree after cache invalidation.
stmt_requires_parse_analysis() is basically equivalent to the
existing function analyze_requires_snapshot(), except that for
obscure reasons that function omits ReturnStmt and CallStmt.
It is unclear whether those were oversights or intentional.
I have not been able to demonstrate a bug from not acquiring a
snapshot while analyzing these commands, but at best it seems mighty
fragile. It seems safer to acquire a snapshot for parse analysis of
these commands too, which allows making stmt_requires_parse_analysis
and analyze_requires_snapshot equivalent.
In passing this fixes a second bug, which is that ResetPlanCache
would exclude ReturnStmts and CallStmts from revalidation.
That's surely *not* safe, since they contain parsable expressions.
Per bug #18059 from Pavel Kulakov. Back-patch to all supported
branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18059-79c692f036b25346@postgresql.org
Having argument names makes it easier to understand how to use the
aggregate functions when inspecting them with \dfa or similar.
Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Reviewed-by: Jim Jones <jim.jones@uni-muenster.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/877cw3jl8y.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
This commit introduces functions for converting numbers to their
equivalent binary and octal representations. Also, the base
conversion code for these functions and to_hex() has been moved to
a common helper function.
Co-authored-by: Eric Radman
Reviewed-by: Ian Barwick, Dag Lem, Vignesh C, Tom Lane, Peter Eisentraut, Kirk Wolak, Vik Fearing, John Naylor, Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y6IyTQQ/TsD5wnsH%40vm3.eradman.com
This commit introduces descriptively-named macros for the
identifiers used in wire protocol messages. These new macros are
placed in a new header file so that they can be easily used by
third-party code.
Author: Dave Cramer
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Tatsuo Ishii, Peter Smith, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Peter Eisentraut, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADK3HHKbBmK-PKf1bPNFoMC%2BoBt%2BpD9PH8h5nvmBQskEHm-Ehw%40mail.gmail.com
Commit 31966b15 invented a way for functions dealing with relation
extension to accept a Relation in online code and an SMgrRelation in
recovery code. It seems highly likely that future bufmgr.c interfaces
will face the same problem, and need to do something similar.
Generalize the names so that each interface doesn't have to re-invent
the wheel.
Back-patch to 16. Since extension AM authors might start using the
constructor macros once 16 ships, we agreed to do the rename in 16
rather than waiting for 17.
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2B6tLD2BhpRWycEoti6LVLyQq457UL4ticP5xd8LqHySA%40mail.gmail.com
This new view, wrapped around a SRF, shows some information known about
wait events, as of:
- Name.
- Type (Activity, I/O, Extension, etc.).
- Description.
All the information retrieved comes from wait_event_names.txt, and the
description is the same as the documentation with filters applied to
remove any XML markups. This view is useful when joined with
pg_stat_activity to get the description of a wait event reported.
Custom wait events for extensions are included in the view.
Original idea by Yves Colin.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Masahiro Ikeda, Tom Lane, Michael
Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0e2ae164-dc89-03c3-cf7f-de86378053ac@gmail.com
The source code comment already said that the presence of the field
element_types.domain_default might be a bug in the standard, since it
never made sense there. Indeed, the field is gone in newer versions
of the standard. So just remove it.
Previously, if a specialized comparator found equal datum1 keys,
the "comparetup" function would repeat the comparison on the
datum before proceeding with the unabbreviated first key
and/or additional sort keys.
Move comparing additional sort keys into "tiebreak" functions so
that specialized comparators can call these directly if needed,
avoiding duplicate work.
Reviewed by David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFBsxsGaVfUrjTghpf%3DkDBYY%3DjWx1PN-fuusVe7Vw5s0XqGdGw%40mail.gmail.com
This was disabled in commit 6f80a8d9c due to the lack of support for
handling of pseudoconstant quals assigned to replaced joins in
createplan.c. To re-allow it, this patch adds the support by 1)
modifying the ForeignPath and CustomPath structs so that if they
represent foreign and custom scans replacing a join with a scan, they
store the list of RestrictInfo nodes to apply to the join, as in
JoinPaths, and by 2) modifying create_scan_plan() in createplan.c so
that it uses that list in that case, instead of the baserestrictinfo
list, to get pseudoconstant quals assigned to the join, as mentioned in
the commit message for that commit.
Important item for the release notes: this is non-backwards-compatible
since it modifies the ForeignPath and CustomPath structs, as mentioned
above, and changes the argument lists for FDW helper functions
create_foreignscan_path(), create_foreign_join_path(), and
create_foreign_upper_path().
Richard Guo, with some additional changes by me, reviewed by Nishant
Sharma, Suraj Kharage, and Richard Guo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADrsxdbcN1vejBaf8a%2BQhrZY5PXL-04mCd4GDu6qm6FigDZd6Q%40mail.gmail.com
Commit b91dd9de was concerned with a theoretical problem with our
non-atomic condition variable operations. If you stop sleeping, and
then cancel the sleep in a separate step, you might be signaled in
between, and that could be lost. That doesn't matter for callers of
ConditionVariableBroadcast(), but callers of ConditionVariableSignal()
might be upset if a signal went missing like this.
Commit bc971f4025 interacted badly with that logic, because it doesn't
use ConditionVariableSleep(), which would normally put us back in the
wait list. ConditionVariableCancelSleep() would be confused and think
we'd received an extra signal, and try to forward it to another backend,
resulting in wakeup storms.
New idea: ConditionVariableCancelSleep() can just return true if we've
been signaled. Hypothetical users of ConditionVariableSignal() would
then still have a way to deal with rare lost signals if they are
concerned about that problem.
Back-patch to 16, where bc971f4025 arrived.
Reported-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2840876b-4cfe-240f-0a7e-29ffd66711e7%40enterprisedb.com
The new relation extension logic, introduced in 00d1e02be2, could lead to
slowdowns in some scenarios. E.g., when loading narrow rows into a table using
COPY, the caller of RelationGetBufferForTuple() will only request a small
number of pages. Without concurrency, we just extended using pwritev() in that
case. However, if there is *some* concurrency, we switched between extending
by a small number of pages and a larger number of pages, depending on the
number of waiters for the relation extension logic. However, some
filesystems, XFS in particular, do not perform well when switching between
extending files using fallocate() and pwritev().
To avoid that issue, remember the number of prior relation extensions in
BulkInsertState and extend more aggressively if there were prior relation
extensions. That not just avoids the aforementioned slowdown, but also leads
to noticeable performance gains in other situations, primarily due to
extending more aggressively when there is no concurrency. I should have done
it this way from the get go.
Reported-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDvDmUQeJtZrau1ovnT_smN940=Kp6mszNGK3bq9yRN6g@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 16-, where the new relation extension code was added
Currently, the names of the custom wait event must be registered for
each backend, requiring all these to link to the shared memory area of
an extension, even if these are not loaded with
shared_preload_libraries.
This patch relaxes the constraints related to this infrastructure by
storing the wait events and their names in two dynamic hash tables in
shared memory. This has the advantage to simplify the registration of
custom wait events to a single routine call that returns an event ID
ready for consumption:
uint32 WaitEventExtensionNew(const char *wait_event_name);
The caller of this routine can then cache locally the ID returned, to be
used for pgstat_report_wait_start(), WaitLatch() or a similar routine.
The implementation uses two hash tables: one with a key based on the
event name to avoid duplicates and a second using the event ID as key
for event lookups, like on pg_stat_activity. These tables can hold a
minimum of 16 entries, and a maximum of 128 entries, which should be plenty
enough.
The code changes done in worker_spi show how things are simplified (most
of the code removed in this commit comes from there):
- worker_spi_init() is gone.
- No more shared memory hooks required (size requested and
initialization).
- The custom wait event ID is cached in the process that needs to set
it, with one single call to WaitEventExtensionNew() to retrieve it.
Per suggestion from Andres Freund.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda, with a few tweaks from me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230801032349.aaiuvhtrcvvcwzcx@awork3.anarazel.de
We deduce a LogicalRepWorker's type from the values of several different
fields ('relid' and 'leader_pid') whenever logic needs to know it.
In fact, the logical replication worker type is already known at the time
of launching the LogicalRepWorker and it never changes for the lifetime of
that process. Instead of deducing the type, it is simpler to just store it
one time, and access it directly thereafter.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PttPSuP0yoZ=9zLDXKqTJ=d0bhxwKaEaNcaym1XqcvDEg@mail.gmail.com
This relies on the "location" field added to TransactionStmt in 31de7e6,
now applied to the "gid" field used by 2PC commands. These commands are
now reported like:
COMMIT PREPARED $1
PREPARE TRANSACTION $1
ROLLBACK PREPARED $1
Applying constants for these commands is a huge advantage for workloads
that rely a lot on 2PC commands with different GIDs. Some tests are
added to track the new behavior.
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZMhT9kNtJJsHw6jK@paquier.xyz
Store function config settings in lists to avoid the need to parse and
allocate for each function execution.
Speedup is modest but significant. Additionally, this change also
seems cleaner and supports some other performance improvements under
discussion.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/04c8592dbd694e4114a3ed87139a7a04e4363030.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Commit 19d8e2308b changed the list of set-of-columns that can be
returned by RelationGetIndexAttrBitmap, but didn't update its
"documentation". That was pretty hard to read already, so rewrite to
make it more comprehensible, adding the missing values while at it.
Backpatch to 16, like that commit.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230809091155.7c7f3gttjk3dj4ze@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
As with the Intel and Arm CRC instructions, compiler intrinsics for
them must be supported by the compiler. In contrast, no runtime check
is needed. Aligned memory access is faster, so use the Arm coding as
a model.
YANG Xudong
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b522a0c5-e3b2-99cc-6387-58134fb88cbe%40ymatrix.cn
If we define ZLIB_CONST before including zlib.h, zlib augments some
interfaces with const decorations. By doing that we can keep our own
interfaces cleaner and can remove some unconstify calls.
ZLIB_CONST was introduced in zlib 1.2.5.2 (17 Dec 2011). When
compiling with older zlib releases, you might now get compiler
warnings about discarding qualifiers.
CentOS 6 has zlib 1.2.3, but in 8e278b6576, we removed support for the
OpenSSL release in CentOS 6, so it seems ok to de-support the zlib
release in CentOS 6 as well.
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin <tristan@neon.tech>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/33462926-bb1e-7cc9-8d92-d86318e8ed1d%40eisentraut.org
Here we adjust the costs for WindowAggs so that they properly take into
account how much of their subnode they must read before outputting the
first row. Without this, we always assumed that the startup cost for the
WindowAgg was not much more expensive than the startup cost of its
subnode, however, that's going to be completely wrong in many cases. The
WindowAgg may have to read *all* of its subnode to output a single row
with certain window bound options.
Here we estimate how many rows we'll need to read from the WindowAgg's
subnode and proportionally add more of the subnode's run costs onto the
WindowAgg's startup costs according to how much of it we expect to have to
read in order to produce the first WindowAgg row.
The reason this is more important than we might have initially thought is
that we may end up making use of a path from the lower planner that works
well as a cheap startup plan when the query has a LIMIT clause, however,
the WindowAgg might mean we need to read far more rows than what the LIMIT
specifies.
No backpatch on this so as not to cause plan changes in released
versions.
Bug: #17862
Reported-by: Tim Palmer
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andy Fan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17862-1ab8f74b0f7b0611@postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrB0S5BMv+0-wTTqWFE-BJ0noWqTnDu9QQfjZ2VSpLv_g@mail.gmail.com
Both apply and tablesync workers were using ApplyWorkerMain() as entry
point. As the name implies, ApplyWorkerMain() should be considered as
the main function for apply workers. Tablesync worker's path was hidden
and does not have enough in common to share the same main function with
apply worker.
Also, most of the code shared by both worker types is already combined
in LogicalRepApplyLoop(). There is no need to combine the rest in
ApplyWorkerMain() anymore.
This patch introduces TablesyncWorkerMain() as a new entry point for
tablesync workers. This aims to increase code readability and would help
with future improvements like the reuse of tablesync workers in the
initial synchronization.
Author: Melih Mutlu based on suggestions by Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAGPVpCTq=rUDd4JUdaRc1XUWf4BrH2gdSNf3rtOMUGj9rPpfzQ@mail.gmail.com
The previous commit removed the "override" APIs. Surviving APIs facilitate
plancache.c to snapshot search_path and test whether the current value equals
a remembered snapshot.
Aleksander Alekseev. Reported by Alexander Lakhin and Noah Misch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8ffb4650-52c4-6a81-38fc-8f99be981130@gmail.com
Two backend routines are added to allow extension to allocate and define
custom wait events, all of these being allocated in the type
"Extension":
* WaitEventExtensionNew(), that allocates a wait event ID computed from
a counter in shared memory.
* WaitEventExtensionRegisterName(), to associate a custom string to the
wait event ID allocated.
Note that this includes an example of how to use this new facility in
worker_spi with tests in TAP for various scenarios, and some
documentation about how to use them.
Any code in the tree that currently uses WAIT_EVENT_EXTENSION could
switch to this new facility to define custom wait events. This is left
as work for future patches.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Michael Paquier, Tristan Partin, Bharath
Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b9f5411acda0cf15c8fbb767702ff43e@oss.nttdata.com
MSVC's _BitScan* functions return a boolean indicating whether any
bits were set in the input, and we were previously asserting that
they returned true, per our API. This is correct. However, other
platforms simply assert that the input is non-zero, so do that to be
more consistent.
Noted while investigating a hypothesis from Ranier Vilela about
undefined behavior, but this is not his proposed patch.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAEudQAoDhUZyKGJ1vbMGcgVUOcsixe-%3DjcVaDWarqkUg163D2w%40mail.gmail.com
Commit e7cb7ee14, which introduced the infrastructure for FDWs and
custom scan providers to replace joins with scans, failed to add support
handling of pseudoconstant quals assigned to replaced joins in
createplan.c, leading to an incorrect plan without a gating Result node
when postgres_fdw replaced a join with such a qual.
To fix, we could add the support by 1) modifying the ForeignPath and
CustomPath structs to store the list of RestrictInfo nodes to apply to
the join, as in JoinPaths, if they represent foreign and custom scans
replacing a join with a scan, and by 2) modifying create_scan_plan() in
createplan.c to use that list in that case, instead of the
baserestrictinfo list, to get pseudoconstant quals assigned to the join;
but #1 would cause an ABI break. So fix by modifying the infrastructure
to just disallow replacing joins with such quals.
Back-patch to all supported branches.
Reported by Nishant Sharma. Patch by me, reviewed by Nishant Sharma and
Richard Guo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADrsxdbcN1vejBaf8a%2BQhrZY5PXL-04mCd4GDu6qm6FigDZd6Q%40mail.gmail.com
In pg_stat_statements, savepoint names now show up as constants with a
parameter symbol, using as base query string the one added as a new
entry to the PGSS hash table, leading to:
RELEASE $1
ROLLBACK TO $1
SAVEPOINT $1
Applying constants to these query parts is a huge advantage for
workloads that generate randomly savepoint points, like ORMs (Django is
at the origin of this patch). The ODBC driver is a second layer that
likes a lot savepoints, though it does not use a random naming pattern.
A "location" field is added to TransactionStmt, now set only for
savepoints. The savepoint name is ignored by the query jumbling. The
location can be extended to other query patterns, if required, like 2PC
commands. Some tests are added to pg_stat_statements for all the query
patterns supported by the parser.
ROLLBACK, ROLLBACK TO SAVEPOINT and ROLLBACK TRANSACTION TO SAVEPOINT
have the same Node representation, so all these are equivalents. The
same happens for RELEASE and RELEASE SAVEPOINT.
Author: Greg Sabino Mullane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKAnmm+2s9PA4OaumwMJReWHk8qvJ_-g1WqxDRDAN1BSUfxyTw@mail.gmail.com
This Patch introduces three SQL standard JSON functions:
JSON()
JSON_SCALAR()
JSON_SERIALIZE()
JSON() produces json values from text, bytea, json or jsonb values,
and has facilitites for handling duplicate keys.
JSON_SCALAR() produces a json value from any scalar sql value,
including json and jsonb.
JSON_SERIALIZE() produces text or bytea from input which containis
or represents json or jsonb;
For the most part these functions don't add any significant new
capabilities, but they will be of use to users wanting standard
compliant JSON handling.
Catversion bumped as this changes ruleutils.c.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby, Álvaro Herrera,
Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
This is to export datum_to_json(), datum_to_jsonb(), and
jsonb_from_cstring(), though the last one is exported as
jsonb_from_text().
A subsequent commit to add new SQL/JSON constructor functions will
need them for calling from the executor.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230720160252.ldk7jy6jqclxfxkq%40alvherre.pgsql
Previously, when selecting an usable index for update/delete for the
REPLICA IDENTITY FULL table, in IsIndexOnlyExpression(), we used to
check if all index fields are not expressions. However, it was not
necessary, because it is enough to check if only the leftmost index
field is not an expression (and references the remote table column)
and this check has already been done by
RemoteRelContainsLeftMostColumnOnIdx().
This commit removes IsIndexOnlyExpression() and
RemoteRelContainsLeftMostColumnOnIdx() and all checks for usable
indexes for REPLICA IDENTITY FULL tables are now performed by
IsIndexUsableForReplicaIdentityFull().
Backpatch this to remain the code consistent.
Reported-by: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Önder Kalacı
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut%2BPsGRE5WSsY0jcLHJEoA17MrbP9yy8FxdjC_ZOAACxbt%2BQ%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 16
The WAL insertion lock variable insertingAt is currently being read
and written with the help of the LWLock wait list lock to avoid any read
of torn values. This wait list lock can become a point of contention on
a highly concurrent write workloads.
This commit switches insertingAt to a 64b atomic variable that provides
torn-free reads/writes. On platforms without 64b atomic support, the
fallback implementation uses spinlocks to provide the same guarantees
for the values read. LWLockWaitForVar(), through
LWLockConflictsWithVar(), reads the new value to check if it still needs
to wait with a u64 atomic operation. LWLockUpdateVar() updates the
variable before waking up the waiters with an exchange_u64 (full memory
barrier). LWLockReleaseClearVar() now uses also an exchange_u64 to
reset the variable. Before this commit, all these steps relied on
LWLockWaitListLock() and LWLockWaitListUnlock().
This reduces contention on LWLock wait list lock and improves
performance of highly-concurrent write workloads. Here are some
numbers using pg_logical_emit_message() (HEAD at d6677b93) with various
arbitrary record lengths and clients up to 1k on a rather-large machine
(64 vCPUs, 512GB of RAM, 16 cores per sockets, 2 sockets), in terms of
TPS numbers coming from pgbench:
message_size_b | 16 | 64 | 256 | 1024
--------------------+--------+--------+--------+-------
patch_4_clients | 83830 | 82929 | 80478 | 73131
patch_16_clients | 267655 | 264973 | 250566 | 213985
patch_64_clients | 380423 | 378318 | 356907 | 294248
patch_256_clients | 360915 | 354436 | 326209 | 263664
patch_512_clients | 332654 | 321199 | 287521 | 240128
patch_1024_clients | 288263 | 276614 | 258220 | 217063
patch_2048_clients | 252280 | 243558 | 230062 | 192429
patch_4096_clients | 212566 | 213654 | 205951 | 166955
head_4_clients | 83686 | 83766 | 81233 | 73749
head_16_clients | 266503 | 265546 | 249261 | 213645
head_64_clients | 366122 | 363462 | 341078 | 261707
head_256_clients | 132600 | 132573 | 134392 | 165799
head_512_clients | 118937 | 114332 | 116860 | 150672
head_1024_clients | 133546 | 115256 | 125236 | 151390
head_2048_clients | 137877 | 117802 | 120909 | 138165
head_4096_clients | 113440 | 115611 | 120635 | 114361
Bharath has been measuring similar improvements, where the limit of the
WAL insertion lock begins to be felt when more than 256 concurrent
clients are involved in this specific workload.
An extra patch has been discussed to introduce a fast-exit path in
LWLockUpdateVar() when there are no waiters, still this does not
influence the write-heavy workload cases discussed as there are always
waiters. This will be considered separately.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Andres Freund, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACVF+6jLvqKe6xhDzCCkr=rfd6upaGc3477Pji1Ke9G7Bg@mail.gmail.com
We include the message type while displaying an error context in the
apply worker. Now, while retrieving the message type string if the
message type is unknown we throw an error that will hide the original
error. So, instead, we need to simply return the string indicating an
unknown message type.
Reported-by: Ashutosh Bapat
Author: Euler Taveira, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat
Backpatch-through: 15
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAExHW5suAEDW-mBZt_qu4RVxWZ1vL54-L+ci2zreYWebpzxYsA@mail.gmail.com
b6e1157e7d made some changes to enforce that
JsonValueExpr.formatted_expr is always set and is the expression that
gives a JsonValueExpr its runtime value, but that's not really
apparent from the comments about and the code manipulating
formatted_expr. This commit fixes that.
Per suggestion from Álvaro Herrera.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230718155313.3wqg6encgt32adqb%40alvherre.pgsql
This adds the X509 attributes notBefore and notAfter to sslinfo
as well as pg_stat_ssl to allow verifying and identifying the
validity period of the current client certificate.
Author: Cary Huang <cary.huang@highgo.ca>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/182b8565486.10af1a86f158715.2387262617218380588@highgo.ca
This essentially removes the JsonbTypeCategory enum and
jsonb_categorize_type() and integrates any jsonb-specific logic that
was in jsonb_categorize_type() into json_categorize_type(), now
moved to jsonfuncs.c. The remaining JsonTypeCategory enum and
json_categorize_type() cover the needs of the callers in both json.c
and jsonb.c. json_categorize_type() has grown a new parameter named
is_jsonb for callers to engage the jsonb-specific behavior of
json_categorize_type().
One notable change in the now exported API of json_categorize_type()
is that it now always returns *outfuncoid even though a caller may
have no need currently to see one.
This is in preparation of later commits to implement additional
SQL/JSON functions.
Co-authored-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
If the plan itself is parallel-safe, and the initPlans are too,
there's no reason anymore to prevent the plan from being marked
parallel-safe. That restriction (dating to commit ab77a5a45) was
really a special case of the fact that we couldn't transmit subplans
to parallel workers at all. We fixed that in commit 5e6d8d2bb and
follow-ons, but this case never got addressed.
We still forbid attaching initPlans to a Gather node that's
inserted pursuant to debug_parallel_query = regress. That's because,
when we hide the Gather from EXPLAIN output, we'd hide the initPlans
too, causing cosmetic regression diffs. It seems inadvisable to
kluge EXPLAIN to the extent required to make the output look the
same, so just don't do it in that case.
Along the way, this also takes care of some sloppiness about updating
path costs to match when we move initplans from one place to another
during createplan.c and setrefs.c. Since all the planning decisions
are already made by that point, this is just cosmetic; but it seems
good to keep EXPLAIN output consistent with where the initplans are.
The diff in query_planner() might be worth remarking on. I found that
one because after fixing things to allow parallel-safe initplans, one
partition_prune test case changed plans (as shown in the patch) ---
but only when debug_parallel_query was active. The reason proved to
be that we only bothered to mark Result nodes as potentially
parallel-safe when debug_parallel_query is on. This neglects the fact
that parallel-safety may be of interest for a sub-query even though
the Result itself doesn't parallelize.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1129530.1681317832@sss.pgh.pa.us
We are capable of optimizing MIN() and MAX() aggregates on indexed
columns into subqueries that exploit the index, rather than the normal
thing of scanning the whole table. When we do this, we replace the
Aggref node(s) with Params referencing subquery outputs. Such Params
really ought to be included in the per-plan-node extParam/allParam
sets computed by SS_finalize_plan. However, we've never done so
up to now because of an ancient implementation choice to perform
that substitution during set_plan_references, which runs after
SS_finalize_plan, so that SS_finalize_plan never sees these Params.
This seems like clearly a bug, yet there have been no field reports
of problems that could trace to it. This may be because the types
of Plan nodes that could contain Aggrefs do not have any of the
rescan optimizations that are controlled by extParam/allParam.
Nonetheless it seems certain to bite us someday, so let's fix it
in a self-contained patch that can be back-patched if we find a
case in which there's a live bug pre-v17.
The cleanest fix would be to perform a separate tree walk to do
these substitutions before SS_finalize_plan runs. That seems
unattractive, first because a whole-tree mutation pass is expensive,
and second because we lack infrastructure for visiting expression
subtrees in a Plan tree, so that we'd need a new function knowing
as much as SS_finalize_plan knows about that. I also considered
swapping the order of SS_finalize_plan and set_plan_references,
but that fell foul of various assumptions that seem tricky to fix.
So the approach adopted here is to teach SS_finalize_plan itself
to check for such Aggrefs. I refactored things a bit in setrefs.c
to avoid having three copies of the code that does that.
Given the lack of any currently-known bug, no test case here.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2391880.1689025003@sss.pgh.pa.us
Presently, the privilege check for SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION checks
whether the original authenticated role was a superuser at
connection start time. Even if the role loses the superuser
attribute, its existing sessions are permitted to change session
authorization to any role.
This commit modifies this privilege check to verify the original
authenticated role currently has superuser. In the event that the
authenticated role loses superuser within a session authorization
change, the authorization change will remain in effect, which means
the user can still take advantage of the target role's privileges.
However, [RE]SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION will only permit switching
to the original authenticated role.
Author: Joseph Koshakow
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAvxfHc-HHzONQ2oXdvhFF9ayRnidPwK%2BfVBhRzaBWYYLVQL-g%40mail.gmail.com
Presently, the privilege check for SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION is
performed in session_authorization's assign_hook. A relevant
comment states, "It's OK because the check does not require catalog
access and can't fail during an end-of-transaction GUC
reversion..." However, we plan to add a catalog lookup to this
privilege check in a follow-up commit.
This commit moves this privilege check to the check_hook for
session_authorization. Like check_role(), we do not throw a hard
error for insufficient privileges when the source is PGC_S_TEST.
Author: Joseph Koshakow
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAvxfHc-HHzONQ2oXdvhFF9ayRnidPwK%2BfVBhRzaBWYYLVQL-g%40mail.gmail.com
Commit 89e46da5e5 allowed using BTREE indexes that are neither
PRIMARY KEY nor REPLICA IDENTITY on the subscriber during apply of
update/delete. This patch extends that functionality to also allow HASH
indexes.
We explored supporting other index access methods as well but they don't
have a fixed strategy for equality operation which is required by the
current infrastructure in logical replication to scan the indexes.
Author: Kuroda Hayato
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Onder Kalaci, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB58669D7414E59664E17A5827F522A@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
The "fsync" level already flushes drive write caches on Windows (as does
"fdatasync"), so it only confuses matters to have an apparently higher
level that isn't actually different at all.
That leaves "fsync_writethrough" only for macOS, where it actually does
something different.
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJ2CG2SouPv2mca2WCTOJxYumvBARRcKPraFMB6GSEMcA%40mail.gmail.com
Until now, when DROP DATABASE got interrupted in the wrong moment, the removal
of the pg_database row would also roll back, even though some irreversible
steps have already been taken. E.g. DropDatabaseBuffers() might have thrown
out dirty buffers, or files could have been unlinked. But we continued to
allow connections to such a corrupted database.
To fix this, mark databases invalid with an in-place update, just before
starting to perform irreversible steps. As we can't add a new column in the
back branches, we use pg_database.datconnlimit = -2 for this purpose.
An invalid database cannot be connected to anymore, but can still be
dropped.
Unfortunately we can't easily add output to psql's \l to indicate that some
database is invalid, it doesn't fit in any of the existing columns.
Add tests verifying that a interrupted DROP DATABASE is handled correctly in
the backend and in various tools.
Reported-by: Evgeny Morozov <postgresql3@realityexists.net>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230509004637.cgvmfwrbht7xm7p6@awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230314174521.74jl6ffqsee5mtug@awork3.anarazel.de
Backpatch: 11-, bug present in all supported versions
A CaseTestExpr is currently being put into
JsonValueExpr.formatted_expr as placeholder for the result of
evaluating JsonValueExpr.raw_expr, which in turn is evaluated
separately. Though, there's no need for this indirection if
raw_expr itself can be embedded into formatted_expr and evaluated
as part of evaluating the latter, especially as there is no
special reason to evaluate it separately. So this commit makes it
so. As a result, JsonValueExpr.raw_expr no longer needs to be
evaluated in ExecInterpExpr(), eval_const_exprs_mutator() etc. and
is now only used for displaying the original "unformatted"
expression in ruleutils.c.
While at it, this also removes the function makeCaseTestExpr(),
because the code in makeJsonConstructorExpr() looks more readable
without it IMO and isn't used by anyone else either.
Finally, a note is added in the comment above CaseTestExpr's
definition that JsonConstructorExpr is also using it.
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqE4XTdfb1nW=Ojoy_tQSRhYt-q_kb6i5d4xcKyrLC1Nbg@mail.gmail.com
All supported computers have either POSIX or Windows threads, and we no
longer have any automated testing of --disable-thread-safety. We define
a vestigial ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY macro to 1 in ecpg_config.h in case it
is useful, but we no longer test it anywhere in PostgreSQL code, and
associated dead code paths are removed.
The Meson and perl-based Windows build scripts never had an equivalent
build option.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLtmexrpMtxBRLCVePqV_dtWG-ZsEbyPrYc%2BNBB2TkNsw%40mail.gmail.com
This commit adds two columns: indexes_total and indexes_processed, to
pg_stat_progress_vacuum system view to show the index vacuum
progress. These numbers are reported in the "vacuuming indexes" and
"cleaning up indexes" phases.
This uses the new parallel message type for progress reporting added
by be06506e7.
Bump catversion because this changes the definition of
pg_stat_progress_vacuum.
Author: Sami Imseih
Reviewed by: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier, Nathan Bossart, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5478DFCD-2333-401A-B2F0-0D186AB09228@amazon.com
This commit adds a new type of parallel message 'P' to allow a
parallel worker to poke at a leader to update the progress.
Currently it supports only incremental progress reporting but it's
possible to allow for supporting of other backend progress APIs in the
future.
There are no users of this new message type as of this commit. That
will follow in future commits.
Idea from Andres Freund.
Author: Sami Imseih
Reviewed by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5478DFCD-2333-401A-B2F0-0D186AB09228@amazon.com
Windows has similar functions with leading underscores. Previously, we
provided the rename via a macro in win32_port.h. In fact its functions
are not always good replacements for the Unix functions, since they
can't deal with UTF-8. They are only currently used by pg_locale.c,
which is careful to redirect to other Windows routines for UTF-8. Given
that portability hazard, it seem unlikely to be a good idea to encourage
any other code to think of these functions as being available outside
pg_locale.c. Any code that thinks it wants these functions probably
wants our wchar2char() or char2wchar() routines instead, or it won't
actually work on Windows in UTF-8 databases.
Furthermore, some major libc implementations including glibc don't have
them (they only have the standard variants without _l), so external code
is very unlikely to require them to exist.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2Bt_CHPzEoPnKyARJBJgE9-GxNajJo6ZuSfRK_KWFO%2B6w%40mail.gmail.com
Historically this module dealt with thread-safety of system interfaces,
but now all that's left is wrapper code for user name and home directory
lookup. Arguably the Windows variants of this logic could be moved in
here too, to justify its presence under port. For now, just tidy up
some obsolete references to multi-threading, and give the file a
meaningful name.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLtmexrpMtxBRLCVePqV_dtWG-ZsEbyPrYc%2BNBB2TkNsw%40mail.gmail.com
locale_t is defined by POSIX.1-2008 and SUSv4, and available on all
targeted systems. For Windows, win32_port.h redirects to a partial
implementation called _locale_t. We can now remove a lot of
compile-time tests for HAVE_LOCALE_T, and associated comments and dead
code branches that were needed for older computers.
Since configure + MinGW builds didn't detect locale_t but now we assume
that all systems have it, further inconsistencies among the 3 Windows build
systems were revealed. With this commit, we no longer define
HAVE_WCSTOMBS_L and HAVE_MBSTOWCS_L on any Windows build system, but
we have logic to deal with that so that replacements are available where
appropriate.
Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin <tristan@neon.tech>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLg7_T2GKwZFAkEf0V7vbnur-NfCjZPKZb%3DZfAXSV1ORw%40mail.gmail.com
This is useful to show the allocation state of huge pages when setting
up a server with "huge_pages = try", where allocating huge pages would
be attempted but the server would continue its startup sequence even if
the allocation fails. The effective status of huge pages is not easily
visible without OS-level tools (or for instance, a lookup at
/proc/N/smaps), and the environments where Postgres runs may not
authorize that. Like the other GUCs related to huge pages, this works
for Linux and Windows.
This GUC can report as values:
- "on", if huge pages were allocated.
- "off", if huge pages were not allocated.
- "unknown", a special state that could only be seen when using for
example postgres -C because it is only possible to know if the shared
memory allocation worked after we can check for the GUC values, even if
checking a runtime-computed GUC. This value should never be seen when
querying for the GUC on a running server. An assertion is added to
check that.
The discussion has also turned around having a new function to grab this
status, but this would have required more tricks for -DEXEC_BACKEND,
something that GUCs already handle.
Noriyoshi Shinoda has initiated the thread that has led to the result of
this commit.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TU4PR8401MB1152EBB0D271F827E2E37A01EECC9@TU4PR8401MB1152.NAMPRD84.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
The documentation and the code is generated automatically from a new
file called wait_event_names.txt, formatted in sections dedicated to
each wait event class (Timeout, Lock, IO, etc.) with three tab-separated
fields:
- C symbol in enums
- Format in the system views
- Description in the docs
Using this approach has several advantages, as we have proved to be
rather bad in maintaining this area of the tree across the years:
- The order of each item in the documentation and the code, which should
be alphabetical, has become incorrect multiple times, and the script
generating the code and documentation has a few rules to enforce that,
making the maintenance a no-brainer.
- Some wait events were added to the code, but not documented, so this
cannot be missed now.
- The order of the tables for each wait event class is enforced in the
documentation (the input .txt file does so as well for clarity, though
this is not mandatory).
- Less code, shaving 1.2k lines from the tree, with 1/3 of the savings
coming from the code, the rest from the documentation.
The wait event types "Lock" and "LWLock" still have their own code path
for their code, hence only the documentation is created for them. These
classes are listed with a special marker called WAIT_EVENT_DOCONLY in
the input file.
Adding a new wait event now requires only an update of
wait_event_names.txt, with "Lock" and "LWLock" treated as exceptions.
This commit has been tested with configure/Makefile, the CI and VPATH
build. clean, distclean and maintainer-clean were working fine.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/77a86b3a-c4a8-5f5d-69b9-d70bbf2e9b98@gmail.com
This commit increases the size of the bgw_library_name member of
the BackgroundWorker struct from BGW_MAXLEN (96) bytes to MAXPGPATH
(default of 1024) bytes so that it can store longer file names
(e.g., absolute paths).
Author: Yurii Rashkovskii
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BRLCQyjFV5Y8tG5QgUb6gjteL4S3p%2B1gcyqWTqigyM93WZ9Pg%40mail.gmail.com
The VacAttrStats structure contained the whole Form_pg_attribute for a
column, but it actually only needs attstattarget from there. So
remove the Form_pg_attribute field and make a separate field for
attstattarget. This simplifies some code for extended statistics that
doesn't deal with a column but an expression, which had to fake up
pg_attribute rows to satisfy internal APIs. Also, we can remove some
comments that essentially said "don't look at pg_attribute directly".
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d6069765-5971-04d3-c10d-e4f7b2e9c459%40eisentraut.org
Here are some notes about this change:
- As X509_get_signature_nid() should always exist (OpenSSL and
LibreSSL), hence HAVE_X509_GET_SIGNATURE_NID is now gone.
- OPENSSL_API_COMPAT is bumped to 0x10002000L.
- One comment related to 1.0.1e introduced by 74242c2 is removed.
Upstream OpenSSL still provides long-term support for 1.0.2 in a closed
fashion, so removing it is out of scope for a few years, at least.
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZG3JNursG69dz1lr@paquier.xyz
The following changes are done:
- Addition of WaitEventBufferPin and WaitEventExtension, that hold a
list of wait events related to each category.
- Addition of two functions that encapsulate the list of wait events for
each category.
- Rename BUFFER_PIN to BUFFERPIN (only this wait event class used an
underscore, requiring a specific rule in the automation script).
These changes make a bit easier the automatic generation of all the code
and documentation related to wait events, as all the wait event
categories are now controlled by consistent structures and functions.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c6f35117-4b20-4c78-1df5-d3056010dcf5@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/77a86b3a-c4a8-5f5d-69b9-d70bbf2e9b98@gmail.com
Here we adjust the query planner to have it remove items from a window
clause's PARTITION BY clause in cases where the pathkey for a column in
the PARTITION BY clause is redundant.
Doing this allows the optimization added in 9d9c02ccd to stop window
aggregation early rather than going into "pass-through" mode to find
tuples belonging to the next partition. Also, when we manage to remove
all PARTITION BY columns, we now no longer needlessly check that the
current tuple belongs to the same partition as the last tuple in
nodeWindowAgg.c. If the pathkey was redundant then all tuples must
contain the same value for the given redundant column, so there's no point
in checking that during execution.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvo2ji+hdxrxfXtRtsfSVw3to2o1nCO20qimw0dUGK8hcQ@mail.gmail.com
Since 3db72eb, the query ID of utilities is generated using the Query
structure, making the use of the query string in JumbleQuery()
unnecessary. This commit removes the argument "querytext" from
JumbleQuery().
Reported-by: Joe Conway
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZJlQAWE4COFqHuAV@paquier.xyz
ff9618e82a introduced has_partition_ancestor_privs(), which is used
to check whether a user has MAINTAIN on any partition ancestors.
This involves syscache lookups, and presently this function does
not take any relation locks, so it is likely subject to the same
kind of cache lookup failures that were fixed by 19de0ab23c.
To fix this problem, this commit partially reverts ff9618e82a.
Specifically, it removes the partition-related changes, including
the has_partition_ancestor_privs() function mentioned above. This
means that MAINTAIN on a partitioned table is no longer sufficient
to perform maintenance commands on its partitions. This is more
like how privileges for maintenance commands work on supported
versions. Privileges are checked for each partition, so a command
that flows down to all partitions might refuse to process them
(e.g., if the current user doesn't have MAINTAIN on the partition).
In passing, adjust a few related comments and error messages, and
add a test for the privilege checks for CLUSTER on a partitioned
table.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230613211246.GA219055%40nathanxps13
ff9618e82a introduced the skip_privs parameter, which is used to
skip privilege checks when recursing to a relation's TOAST table.
This parameter should have been added as a flag bit in
VacuumParams->options instead.
Suggested-by: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZIj4v1CwqlDVJZfB%40paquier.xyz
Run pgindent and pgperltidy. It seems we're still some ways
away from all committers doing this automatically. Now that
we have a buildfarm animal that will whine about poorly-indented
code, we'll try to keep the tree more tidy.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3156045.1687208823@sss.pgh.pa.us
47bb9db75 modified the ApplyRetrieveRule()'s conversion of a view's
original RTE_RELATION entry into an RTE_SUBQUERY one to retain relid,
rellockmode, and perminfoindex so that the executor can lock the view
and check its permissions. It seems better to also retain
relkind for cross-checking that the exception of an
RTE_SUBQUERY entry being allowed to carry relation details only
applies to views, so do so.
Bump catversion because this changes the output format of
RTE_SUBQUERY RTEs.
Suggested-by: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-by: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3953179e-9540-e5d1-a743-4bef368785b0%40pgmasters.net
- Commit 3eb77eba5a, which moved the pending ops queue from md.c to
sync.c, introduced a duplicate, unused 'pendingOpsCxt'
variable. (I'm surprised none of the compilers or static analysis
tools have complained about that.)
- Commit c2fe139c20 moved the 'synchronize_seqscans' variable and
introduced an extern declaration in tableam.h, making the one in
guc_tables.c unnecessary.
- Commit 6f0cf87872 removed the 'pgstat_temp_directory' GUC, but
forgot to remove the corresponding global variable.
- Commit 1b4e729eaa removed the 'pg_krb_realm' GUC, and its global
variable, but forgot the declaration in auth.h.
Spotted all these by reading the code.
Split nbtree's _bt_getbuf function is two: code that read locks or write
locks existing pages remains in _bt_getbuf, while code that deals with
allocating new pages is moved to a new, dedicated function called
_bt_allocbuf. This simplifies most _bt_getbuf callers, since it is no
longer necessary for them to pass a heaprel argument. Many of the
changes to nbtree from commit 61b313e4 can be reverted. This minimizes
the divergence between HEAD/PostgreSQL 16 and earlier release branches.
_bt_allocbuf replaces the previous nbtree idiom of passing P_NEW to
_bt_getbuf. There are only 3 affected call sites, all of which continue
to pass a heaprel for recovery conflict purposes. Note that nbtree's
use of P_NEW was superficial; nbtree never actually relied on the P_NEW
code paths in bufmgr.c, so this change is strictly mechanical.
GiST already took the same approach; it has a dedicated function for
allocating new pages called gistNewBuffer(). That factor allowed commit
61b313e4 to make much more targeted changes to GiST.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=8Z9qY58bjm_7TAHgtW6RzZ5Ke62q5emdCEy9BAzwhmg@mail.gmail.com
Eventually it is likely worth trying to deal with this in a more expansive
way, by generating dependency files generated within the scripts. But it's not
entirely obvious how to do that in perl and is work more suitable for 17
anyway.
Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Reviewed-by: Tristan Partin <tristan@neon.tech>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87v8g7s6bf.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
While executing maintenance operations (ANALYZE, CLUSTER, REFRESH
MATERIALIZED VIEW, REINDEX, or VACUUM), set search_path to
'pg_catalog, pg_temp' to prevent inconsistent behavior.
Functions that are used for functional indexes, in index expressions,
or in materialized views and depend on a different search path must be
declared with CREATE FUNCTION ... SET search_path='...'.
This change addresses a security risk introduced in commit 60684dd834,
where a role with MAINTAIN privileges on a table may be able to
escalate privileges to the table owner. That commit is not yet part of
any release, so no need to backpatch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e44327179e5c9015c8dda67351c04da552066017.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
677319746 added support for making use of MSVC's bit scanning functions.
However, that commit failed to consider 32-bit MSVC builds where the
64-bit versions of these functions are unavailable. This resulted in
compilation failures on 32-bit MSVC.
Here we adjust the code so we fall back on the manual way of finding the
bit positions for 64-bit integers when building on 32-bit MSVC.
Bug: #17967
Reported-by: Youmiu Mo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17967-cd21e34a314141b2@postgresql.org
We've had multiple issues with the clause_is_computable_at logic that
I introduced in 2489d76c4: it's been known to accept more than one
clone of the same qual at the same plan node, and also to accept no
clones at all. It's looking impractical to get it 100% right on the
basis of the currently-stored information, so fix it by introducing a
new RestrictInfo field "incompatible_relids" that explicitly shows
which outer joins a given clone mustn't be pushed above.
In principle we could populate this field in every RestrictInfo, but
that would cost space and there doesn't presently seem to be a need
for it in general. Also, while deconstruct_distribute_oj_quals can
easily fill the field with the remaining members of the commutative
join set that it's considering, computing it in the general case
seems again pretty complicated. So for now, just fill it for
clone quals.
Along the way, fix a bug that may or may not be only latent:
equivclass.c was generating replacement clauses with is_pushed_down
and has_clone/is_clone markings that didn't match their
required_relids. This led me to conclude that leaving the clone flags
out of make_restrictinfo's purview wasn't such a great idea after all,
so add them.
Per report from Richard Guo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs48EYi_9-pSd0ORes1kTmTeAjT4Q3gu49hJtYCbSn2JyeA@mail.gmail.com
WalSndWakeup() currently loops through all the walsenders slots, with a
spinlock acquisition and release for every iteration, to wake up waiting
walsenders.
This commonly was not a problem before e101dfac3a. But, to allow logical
decoding on standbys, we need to wake up logical walsenders after every WAL
record is applied on the standby, rather just when flushing WAL or switching
timelines. This causes a performance regression for workloads replaying a lot
of WAL records.
To solve this, we use condition variable (CV) to efficiently wake up
walsenders in WalSndWakeup().
Every walsender prepares to sleep on a shared memory CV. Note that it just
prepares to sleep on the CV (i.e., adds itself to the CV's waitlist), but does
not actually wait on the CV (IOW, it never calls ConditionVariableSleep()). It
still uses WaitEventSetWait() for waiting, because CV infrastructure doesn't
handle FeBe socket events currently. The processes (startup process,
walreceiver etc.) wanting to wake up walsenders use
ConditionVariableBroadcast(), which in turn calls SetLatch(), helping
walsenders come out of WaitEventSetWait().
We use separate shared memory CVs for physical and logical walsenders for
selective wake ups, see WalSndWakeup() for more details.
This approach is simple and reasonably efficient. But not very elegant. But
for 16 it seems to be a better path than a larger redesign of the CV
mechanism. A desirable future improvement would be to add support for CVs
into WaitEventSetWait().
This still leaves us with a small regression in very extreme workloads (due to
the spinlock acquisition in ConditionVariableBroadcast() when there are no
waiters) - but that seems acceptable.
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Suggested-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhijie Hou <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20230509190247.3rrplhdgem6su6cg%40awork3.anarazel.de
Complete the task begun in 9c0a0e2ed: we don't want to use the
abbreviation "deleg" for GSS delegation in any user-visible places.
(For consistency, this also changes most internal uses too.)
Abhijit Menon-Sen and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/949048.1684639317@sss.pgh.pa.us
Run pgindent, pgperltidy, and reformat-dat-files.
This set of diffs is a bit larger than typical. We've updated to
pg_bsd_indent 2.1.2, which properly indents variable declarations that
have multi-line initialization expressions (the continuation lines are
now indented one tab stop). We've also updated to perltidy version
20230309 and changed some of its settings, which reduces its desire to
add whitespace to lines to make assignments etc. line up. Going
forward, that should make for fewer random-seeming changes to existing
code.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230428092545.qfb3y5wcu4cm75ur@alvherre.pgsql
Run renumber_oids.pl to move high-numbered OIDs down, as per pre-beta
tasks specified by RELEASE_CHANGES. For reference, the command was
./renumber_oids.pl --first-mapped-oid 8000 --target-oid 6200
The idea of EvalPlanQual is that we replace the query's scan of the
result relation with a single injected tuple, and see if we get a
tuple out, thereby implying that the injected tuple still passes the
query quals. (In join cases, other relations in the query are still
scanned normally.) This logic was not updated when commit 86dc90056
made it possible for a single DML query plan to have multiple result
relations, when the query target relation has inheritance or partition
children. We replaced the output for the current result relation
successfully, but other result relations were still scanned normally;
thus, if any other result relation contained a tuple satisfying the
quals, we'd think the EPQ check passed, even if it did not pass for
the injected tuple itself. This would lead to update or delete
actions getting performed when they should have been skipped due to
a conflicting concurrent update in READ COMMITTED isolation mode.
Fix by blocking all sibling result relations from emitting tuples
during an EvalPlanQual recheck. In the back branches, the fix is
complicated a bit by the need to not change the size of struct
EPQState (else we'd have ABI-breaking changes in offsets in
struct ModifyTableState). Like the back-patches of 3f7836ff6
and 4b3e37993, add a separately palloc'd struct to avoid that.
The logic is the same as in HEAD otherwise.
This is only a live bug back to v14 where 86dc90056 came in.
However, I chose to back-patch the test cases further, on the
grounds that this whole area is none too well tested. I skipped
doing so in v11 though because none of the test applied cleanly,
and it didn't quite seem worth extra work for a branch with only
six months to live.
Per report from Ante Krešić (via Aleksander Alekseev)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TMBTN3rcz4=AjYhLPD_w3FFT0Wq_C15jxCDn8U4tZnH1g@mail.gmail.com
Should a hash join exceed memory limit, the hashtable is split up into
multiple batches. The number of batches is doubled each time a given
batch is determined not to fit in memory. Each batch file is allocated
with a block-sized buffer for buffering tuples and parallel hash join
has additional sharedtuplestore accessor buffers.
In some pathological cases requiring a lot of batches, often with skewed
data, bad stats, or very large datasets, users can run out-of-memory
solely from the memory overhead of all the batch files' buffers.
Batch files were allocated in the ExecutorState memory context, making
it very hard to identify when this batch explosion was the source of an
OOM. This commit allocates the batch files in a dedicated memory
context, making it easier to identify the cause of an OOM and work to
avoid it.
Based on initial draft by Tomas Vondra, with significant reworks and
improvements by Jehan-Guillaume de Rorthais.
Author: Jehan-Guillaume de Rorthais <jgdr@dalibo.com>
Author: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190421114618.z3mpgmimc3rmubi4@development
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230504193006.1b5b9622%40karst#273020ff4061fc7a2fbb1ba96b281f17
Non-leaf pages of GiST indexes contain key attributes, leaf pages
contain both key and non-key attributes, and gist_page_items() ignored
the handling of non-key attributes. This caused a few problems when
using gist_page_items() on a GiST index with INCLUDE:
- On a non-leaf page, the function would crash.
- On a leaf page, the function would work, but miss to display all the
values for included attributes.
This commit fixes gist_page_items() to handle such cases in a more
appropriate way, and now displays the values of key and non-key
attributes for each item separately in a style consistent with what
ruleutils.c would generate for the attribute list, depending on the page
type dealt with. In a way similar to how a record is displayed, values
would be double-quoted for key or non-key attributes if required.
ruleutils.c did not provide a routine able to control if non-key
attributes should be displayed, so an extended() routine for index
definitions is added to work around the leaf and non-leaf page
differences.
While on it, this commit fixes a third problem related to the amount of
data reported for key attributes. The code originally relied on
BuildIndexValueDescription() (used for error reports on constraints)
that would not print all the data stored in the index but the index
opclass's input type, so this limited the amount of information
available. This switch makes gist_page_items() much cheaper as there is
no need to run ACL checks for each item printed, which is not an issue
anyway as superuser rights are required to execute the functions of
pageinspect. Opclasses whose data cannot be displayed can rely on
gist_page_items_bytea().
The documentation of this function was slightly incorrect for the
output results generated on HEAD and v15, so adjust it on these
branches.
Author: Alexander Lakhin, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17884-cb8c326522977acb@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 14
BRIN indexes did not properly distinguish between summaries for empty
(no rows) and all-NULL ranges, treating them as essentially the same
thing. Summaries were initialized with allnulls=true, and opclasses
simply reset allnulls to false when processing the first non-NULL value.
This however produces incorrect results if the range starts with a NULL
value (or a sequence of NULL values), in which case we forget the range
contains NULL values when adding the first non-NULL value.
This happens because the allnulls flag is used for two separate
purposes - to mark empty ranges (not representing any rows yet) and
ranges containing only NULL values.
Opclasses don't know which of these cases it is, and so don't know
whether to set hasnulls=true. Setting the flag in both cases would make
it correct, but it would also make BRIN indexes useless for queries with
IS NULL clauses. All ranges start empty (and thus allnulls=true), so all
ranges would end up with either allnulls=true or hasnulls=true.
The severity of the issue is somewhat reduced by the fact that it only
happens when adding values to an existing summary with allnulls=true.
This can happen e.g. for small tables (because a summary for the first
range exists for all BRIN indexes), or for tables with large fraction of
NULL values in the indexed columns.
Bulk summarization (e.g. during CREATE INDEX or automatic summarization)
that processes all values at once is not affected by this issue. In this
case the flags were updated in a slightly different way, not forgetting
the NULL values.
To identify empty ranges we use a new flag, stored in an unused bit in
the BRIN tuple header so the on-disk format remains the same. A matching
flag is added to BrinMemTuple, into a 3B gap after bt_placeholder.
That means there's no risk of ABI breakage, although we don't actually
pass the BrinMemTuple to any public API.
We could also skip storing index tuples for empty summaries, but then
we'd have to always process such ranges - even if there are no rows in
large parts of the table (e.g. after a bulk DELETE), it would still
require reading the pages etc. So we store them, but ignore them when
building the bitmap.
Backpatch to 11. The issue exists since BRIN indexes were introduced in
9.5, but older releases are already EOL.
Backpatch-through: 11
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Matthias van de Meent, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/402430e4-7d9d-6cf1-09ef-464d80afff3b@enterprisedb.com
Pass it the RestrictInfo under consideration, not just the
clause_relids. This should save some trivial amount of
code at the call sites, and it gives us more flexibility
about what clause_is_computable_at() does. There's no
actual functional change here, though.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3564467.1684352557@sss.pgh.pa.us
28e626bde0 added the concept of IOOps but neglected to include writeback
operations. ac8d53dae5 added time spent doing these I/O operations. Without
counting writeback, checkpointer write time in the log often differed
substantially from that in pg_stat_io. To fix this, add IOOp IOOP_WRITEBACK
and track writeback in pg_stat_io.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230419172326.dhgyo4wrrhulovt6%40awork3.anarazel.de
For clarity of review, renaming the function parameter "context" in
ScheduleBufferTagForWriteback() and IssuePendingWritebacks() to
"wb_context" is a separate commit. The next commit adds an "io_context"
parameter and "wb_context" makes it more clear which is which.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_acc6iL4M3hvOTeztf_ZPpsB3Pqio5aVHgZ5q=Pi3BZKg@mail.gmail.com
After applying outer-join identity 3 in the forward direction,
it was possible for the planner to mistakenly apply a qual clause
from above the two outer joins at the now-lower join level.
This can give the wrong answer, since a value that would get nulled
by the now-upper join might not yet be null.
To fix, when we perform such a transformation, consider that the
now-lower join hasn't really completed the outer join it's nominally
responsible for and thus its relid set should not include that OJ's
relid (nor should its output Vars have that nullingrel bit set).
Instead we add those bits when the now-upper join is performed.
The existing rules for qual placement then suffice to prevent
higher qual clauses from dropping below the now-upper join.
There are a few complications from needing to consider transitive
closures in case multiple pushdowns have happened, but all in all
it's not a very complex patch.
This is all new logic (from 2489d76c4) so no need to back-patch.
The added test cases all have the same results as in v15.
Tom Lane and Richard Guo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0b819232-4b50-f245-1c7d-c8c61bf41827@postgrespro.ru
This is equivalent to a revert of f193883 and fb32748, with the addition
that the declaration of the SQLValueFunction node needs to gain a couple
of node_attr for query jumbling. The performance impact of removing the
function call inlining is proving to be too huge for some workloads
where these are used. A worst-case test case of involving only simple
SELECT queries with a SQL keyword is proving to lead to a reduction of
10% in TPS via pgbench and prepared queries on a high-end machine.
None of the tests I ran back for this set of changes saw such a huge
gap, but Alexander Lakhin and Andres Freund have found that this can be
noticeable. Keeping the older performance would mean to do more
inlining in the executor when using COERCE_SQL_SYNTAX for a function
expression, similarly to what SQLValueFunction does. This requires more
redesign work and there is little time until 16beta1 is released, so for
now reverting the change is the best way forward, bringing back the
previous performance.
Bump catalog version.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b32bed1b-0746-9b20-1472-4bdc9ca66d52@gmail.com
Commit a73952b795 (new in 16) required default values in guc_table.c
and C variable initializers to match. This one only matched when
XLOG_BLCKSZ == 8kB. Fix by using the same expression in both places
with a new DEFAULT_XXX macro, as done for other GUCs.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGLNmLV=VrT==5MqnbARgx2ifRSFtdd8ofdfrdSLL3yv5A@mail.gmail.com
Since the behavior of the UNICODE collation can change with new
ICU/Unicode versions, we need to apply the versioning mechanism to it.
We do this with an UPDATE command in initdb; this is similar to how we
put the collation version into pg_database already.
Reported-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/49417853-7bdd-4b23-a4e9-04c7aff33821@manitou-mail.org
An update of the GUC stats_fetch_consistency in a transaction would be
able to trigger an assertion when doing cache->snapshot. In this case,
when retrieving a pgstat entry after the switch, a new snapshot would be
rebuilt, confusing pgstat_build_snapshot() because a snapshot is already
cached with an unexpected mode ("cache").
In order to fix this problem, this commit adds a flag to force a
snapshot clear each time this GUC is changed. Some tests are added to
check, while on it.
Some optimizations in avoiding the snapshot clear should be possible
depending on what is cached and the current GUC value, I guess, but this
solution is simple, and ensures that the state of the cache is updated
each time a new pgstat entry is fetched, hence being consistent with the
level wanted by the client that has set the GUC.
Note that cache->none and snapshot->none would not cause issues, as
fetching a pgstat entry would be retrieved from shared memory on the
second attempt, however a snapshot would still be cached. Similarly,
none->snapshot and none->cache would build a new snapshot on the second
fetch attempt. Finally, snapshot->cache would cache a new snapshot on
the second attempt.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17804-2a118cd046f2d0e5@postgresql.org
backpatch-through: 15
The callback function pa_shutdown() accesses MyLogicalRepWorker which may
not be initialized if there is an error during the initialization of the
parallel apply worker. The other problem is that by the time it is invoked
even after the initialization of the worker, the MyLogicalRepWorker will
be reset by another callback logicalrep_worker_onexit. So, it won't have
the required information.
To fix this, register the shutdown callback after we are attached to the
worker slot.
After this fix, we observed another issue which is that sometimes the
leader apply worker tries to receive the message from the error queue that
might already be detached by the parallel apply worker leading to an
error. To prevent such an error, we ensure that the leader apply worker
detaches from the parallel apply worker's error queue before stopping it.
Reported-by: Sawada Masahiko
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDo+yUwNq6nTrvE2h9bB2vZfcag=jxWc7QxuWCmkDAqcA@mail.gmail.com
During exit, the logical replication apply worker tries to release session
level locks, if any. However, if the apply worker exits due to an error
before its connection is initialized, trying to release locks can lead to
assertion failure. The locks will be acquired once the worker is
initialized, so we don't need to release them till the worker
initialization is complete.
Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Author: Hou Zhijie based on inputs from Sawada Masahiko and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2185d65f-5aae-3efa-c48f-fb42b173ef5c@gmail.com
CREATE SCHEMA AUTHORIZATION with appended schema elements can lead to
crashes when comparing the schema name of the query with the schemas
used in the qualification of some clauses in the elements' queries.
The origin of the problem is that the transformation routine for the
elements listed in a CREATE SCHEMA query uses as new, expected, schema
name the one listed in CreateSchemaStmt itself. However, depending on
the query, CreateSchemaStmt.schemaname may be NULL, being computed
instead from the role specification of the query given by the
AUTHORIZATION clause, that could be either:
- A user name string, with the new schema name being set to the same
value as the role given.
- Guessed from CURRENT_ROLE, SESSION_ROLE or CURRENT_ROLE, with a new
schema name computed from the security context where CREATE SCHEMA is
running.
Regression tests are added for CREATE SCHEMA with some appended elements
(some of them with schema qualifications), covering also some role
specification patterns.
While on it, this simplifies the context structure used during the
transformation of the elements listed in a CREATE SCHEMA query by
removing the fields for the role specification and the role type. They
were not used, and for the role specification this could be confusing as
the schema name may by extracted from that at the beginning of
CreateSchemaCommand().
This issue exists for a long time, so backpatch down to all the versions
supported.
Reported-by: Song Hongyu
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Richard Guo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17909-f65c12dfc5f0451d@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 11
The recently added inclusion of guc.h in smgr.h is not necessary and
introduces more server-related stuff. Removing the directive helps
avoid potential issues with including sgmr.h in frontends.
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230425.115748.2130383825066921512.horikyota.ntt%40gmail.com
vacuum_defer_cleanup_age was introduced before hot_standby_feedback and
replication slots existed. It is hard to use reasonably - commonly it will
either be set too low (not preventing recovery conflicts, while still causing
some bloat), or too high (causing a lot of bloat). The alternatives do not
have that issue.
That on its own might not be sufficient reason to remove
vacuum_defer_cleanup_age, but it also complicates computation of xid
horizons. See e.g. the bug fixed in be504a3e97. It also is untested.
This commit removes TransactionIdRetreatSafely(), as there are no users
anymore. There might be potential future users, hence noting that here.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230317230930.nhsgk3qfk7f4axls@awork3.anarazel.de
The name of this function suggests that it ought to reparent R/W
expanded objects to be children of the persistent aggcontext, instead
of copying them. In fact it does no such thing, and if you try to
make it do so you will see multiple regression failures. Rename it
to the less-misleading ExecAggCopyTransValue, and add commentary
about why that attractive-sounding optimization won't work. Also
adjust comments at call sites, some of which were describing logic
that has since been moved into ExecAggCopyTransValue.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3004282.1681930251@sss.pgh.pa.us
a9c70b46 added the statistics view pg_stat_io which contained columns
"io_context" and "io_object". Given that the columns are in the
pg_stat_io view, the "io" prefix is somewhat redundant, so remove it.
The code variables referring to these fields are kept unchanged so as
they can keep their context about I/O.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Fabrízio de Royes Mello
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_aAQoJWrvT2BYYQvJChFKra_O-5ra3jhzKJZqWsTR1CPQ@mail.gmail.com
Old versions of Solaris and illumos had buffer overrun bugs in their
strxfrm() implementations. The bugs were fixed more than a decade ago
and the relevant releases are long out of vendor support. It's time to
remove the defense added by commit be8b06c3.
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGJ-ZPJwKHVLbqye92-ZXeLoCHu5wJL6L6HhNP7FkJ=meA@mail.gmail.com
Recent enhancements to rmgr desc routines that made the output summarize
certain block data (added by commits 7d8219a4 and 1c453cfd) dealt with
records that lack relevant block data (and so have nothing to give a
more detailed summary of) by testing !DecodedBkpBlock.has_image. As a
result, more detailed descriptions of block data were not output when
wal_consistency_checking was enabled.
This bug affected records with summarizable block data that also
happened to have an FPI that the REDO routine isn't supposed to apply
(FPIs used for consistency checking purposes only). The presence of
such an FPI was incorrectly taken to indicate the absence of block data.
To fix, test DecodedBkpBlock.has_data, not !DecodedBkpBlock.has_image.
This is the exact condition that we care about, not an inexact proxy.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzm5Sc9cBg1qWV_cEBfLNJCrW9FjS-SoHVt8FLA7Ldn8yg@mail.gmail.com
_bt_dedup_pass()'s heapRel argument hasn't been needed or used since
commit cf2acaf4dc made deleting any existing LP_DEAD index tuples the
caller's responsibility.
This fixes many spelling mistakes in comments, but a few references to
invalid parameter names, function names and option names too in comments
and also some in string constants
Also, fix an #undef that was undefining the incorrect definition
Author: Alexander Lakhin
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d5f68d19-c0fc-91a9-118d-7c6a5a3f5fad@gmail.com
The nbtree VACUUM WAL record stores its page offset number payload in
blk 0 (just like the closely related nbtree DELETE WAL record). Commit
ebd551f5 fixed a similar issue with the DELETE WAL record, but missed
this one.
Make sure that function declarations use names that exactly match the
corresponding names from function definitions in a few places. These
inconsistencies were all introduced relatively recently, after the code
base had parameter name mismatches fixed in bulk (see commits starting
with commits 4274dc22 and 035ce1fe).
pg_bsd_indent still has a couple of similar inconsistencies, which I
(pgeoghegan) have left untouched for now.
Like all earlier commits that cleaned up function parameter names, this
commit was written with help from clang-tidy.
This reverts commit 3d03b24c3 (Revert Add support for Kerberos
credential delegation) which was committed on the grounds of concern
about portability, but on further review and discussion, it's clear that
we are better off explicitly requiring MIT Kerberos as that appears to
be the only GSSAPI library currently that's under proper maintenance
and ongoing development. The API used for storing credentials was added
to MIT Kerberos over a decade ago while for the other libraries which
appear to be mainly based on Heimdal, which exists explicitly to be a
re-implementation of MIT Kerberos, the API never made it to a released
version (even though it was added to the Heimdal git repo over 5 years
ago..).
This post-feature-freeze change was approved by the RMT.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZDDO6jaESKaBgej0%40tamriel.snowman.net
This reverts commit e056c557ae and minor later fixes thereof.
There's a few problems in this new feature -- most notably regarding
pg_upgrade behavior, but others as well. This new feature is not in any
way critical on its own, so instead of scrambling to fix it we revert it
and try again in early 17 with these issues in mind.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3801207.1681057430@sss.pgh.pa.us
Calling fseek() or ftello() on a handle to a non-seeking device such as
a pipe or a communications device is not supported. Unfortunately,
MSVC's flavor of these routines, _fseeki64() and _ftelli64(), do not
return an error when given a pipe as handle. Some of the logic of
pg_dump and restore relies on these routines to check if a handle is
seekable, causing failures when passing the contents of pg_dump to
pg_restore through a pipe, for example.
This commit introduces wrappers for fseeko() and ftello() on MSVC so as
any callers are able to properly detect the cases of non-seekable
handles. This relies mainly on GetFileType(), sharing a bit of code
with the MSVC port for fstat(). The code in charge of getting a file
type is refactored into a new file called win32common.c, shared by
win32stat.c and the new win32fseek.c. It includes the MSVC ports for
fseeko() and ftello().
Like 765f5df, this is backpatched down to 14, where the fstat()
implementation for MSVC is able to understand about files larger than
4GB in size. Using a TAP test for that is proving to be tricky as
IPC::Run handles the pipes by itself, still I have been able to check
the fix manually.
Reported-by: Daniel Watzinger
Author: Juan José Santamaría Flecha, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC+AXB26a4EmxM2suXxPpJaGrqAdxracd7hskLg-zxtPB50h7A@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 14
Clarify the goals of the recently added guidelines for rmgrdesc authors:
to avoid gratuitous inconsistencies across resource managers, and to
make it reasonably easy to write a reusable custom parser.
Beyond that, the guidelines leave rmgrdesc authors with a significant
amount of leeway. This even includes the leeway to invent custom
conventions (in cases where it's warranted).
Follow-up to commit 7d8219a4.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkbYuvwYKm-Y-72QEh6SPMQcAo9uONv+mR3bMGcu9E_Cg@mail.gmail.com
Make xl_heap_lock's infobits_set field of type uint8, not int8. Using
int8 isn't appropriate given that the field just holds status bits.
This fixes an oversight in commit 0ac5ad5134.
In passing rename the nearby TransactionId field to "xmax" to make
things consistency with related records, such as xl_heap_lock_updated.
Deliberately avoid a bump in XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC. No backpatch, either.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkCd3kOS8b7Rfxw7Mh1_6jvX=Nzo-CWR1VBTiOtVZkWHA@mail.gmail.com
We cannot use the generic array_desc approach with per-tuple nbtree
posting list update metadata because array_desc can only deal with fixed
width elements (e.g., page offset numbers). Using array_desc led to
incorrect rmgr descriptions for updates from nbtree DELETE/VACUUM WAL
records.
To fix, add specialized code to describe the update metadata as array
elements in desc output. We now iterate over the update metadata using
an approach that matches related REDO routines.
Also stop showing the updates offset number array separately in nbtree
DELETE/VACUUM desc output. It's redundant information, since the same
page offset numbers appear in the description of each individual update
element. Also make some small tweaks to the way that we format arrays
in all desc routines (not just nbtree desc routines) to make arrays a
little less verbose.
Oversight in commit 1c453cfd, which enhanced the nbtree rmgr desc
routines.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkbYuvwYKm-Y-72QEh6SPMQcAo9uONv+mR3bMGcu9E_Cg@mail.gmail.com
This reverts commit 3d4fa227bc.
Per discussion and buildfarm, this depends on APIs that seem to not
be available on at least one platform (NetBSD). Should be certainly
possible to rework to be optional on that platform if necessary but bit
late for that at this point.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3286097.1680922218@sss.pgh.pa.us
Previously, a PostgreSQL-specific callback checked by the regex engine
had a way to trigger a special error code REG_CANCEL if it detected that
the next call to CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS() would certainly throw via
ereport().
A later proposed bugfix aims to move some complex logic out of signal
handlers, so that it won't run until the next CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(),
which makes the above design impossible unless we split
CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS() into two phases, one to run logic and another to
ereport(). We may develop such a system in the future, but for the
regex code it is no longer necessary.
An earlier commit moved regex memory management over to our
MemoryContext system. Given that the purpose of the two-phase interrupt
checking was to free memory before throwing, something we don't need to
worry about anymore, it seems simpler to inject CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS()
directly into cancelation points, and just let it throw.
Since the plan is to keep PostgreSQL-specific concerns separate from the
main regex engine code (with a view to bein able to stay in sync with
other projects), do this with a new macro INTERRUPT(), customizable in
regcustom.h and defaulting to nothing.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGK3PGKwcKqzoosamn36YW-fsuTdOPPF1i_rtEO%3DnEYKSg%40mail.gmail.com
Now that our regex engine uses palloc(), it's not necessary to set up a
special memory context callback to free compiled regexes. The regex has
no resources other than the memory that is already going to be freed in
bulk.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGK3PGKwcKqzoosamn36YW-fsuTdOPPF1i_rtEO%3DnEYKSg%40mail.gmail.com
Previously, regex_t objects' memory was managed with malloc() and free()
directly. Switch to palloc()-based memory management instead.
Advantages:
* memory used by cached regexes is now visible with MemoryContext
observability tools
* cleanup can be done automatically in certain failure modes
(something that later commits will take advantage of)
* cleanup can be done in bulk
On the downside, there may be more fragmentation (wasted memory) due to
per-regex MemoryContext objects. This is a problem shared with other
cached objects in PostgreSQL and can probably be improved with later
tuning.
Thanks to Noah Misch for suggesting this general approach, which
unblocks later work on interrupts.
Suggested-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGK3PGKwcKqzoosamn36YW-fsuTdOPPF1i_rtEO%3DnEYKSg%40mail.gmail.com
Unsurprisingly, this requires wal_level = logical to be set on the primary and
standby. The infrastructure added in 26669757b6 ensures that slots are
invalidated if the primary's wal_level is lowered.
Creating a slot on a standby waits for a xl_running_xact record to be
processed. If the primary is idle (and thus not emitting xl_running_xact
records), that can take a while. To make that faster, this commit also
introduces the pg_log_standby_snapshot() function. By executing it on the
primary, completion of slot creation on the standby can be accelerated.
Note that logical decoding on a standby does not itself enforce that required
catalog rows are not removed. The user has to use physical replication slots +
hot_standby_feedback or other measures to prevent that. If catalog rows
required for a slot are removed, the slot is invalidated.
See 6af1793954 for an overall design of logical decoding on a standby.
Bumps catversion, for the addition of the pg_log_standby_snapshot() function.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (in an older version)
Author: Amit Khandekar <amitdkhan.pg@gmail.com> (in an older version)
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: FabrÌzio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Physical walsenders can't send data until it's been flushed; logical
walsenders can't decode and send data until it's been applied. On the
standby, the WAL is flushed first, which will only wake up physical
walsenders; and then applied, which will only wake up logical
walsenders.
Previously, all walsenders were awakened when the WAL was flushed. That
was fine for logical walsenders on the primary; but on the standby the
flushed WAL would have been not applied yet, so logical walsenders were
awakened too early.
Per idea from Jeff Davis and Amit Kapila.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+zO5LUeisabX10c81LU-fWMKO4M9Wyg1cdkbW7Hqh6vQ@mail.gmail.com
During WAL replay on the standby, when a conflict with a logical slot is
identified, invalidate such slots. There are two sources of conflicts:
1) Using the information added in 6af1793954, logical slots are invalidated if
required rows are removed
2) wal_level on the primary server is reduced to below logical
Uses the infrastructure introduced in the prior commit. FIXME: add commit
reference.
Change InvalidatePossiblyObsoleteSlot() to use a recovery conflict to
interrupt use of a slot, if called in the startup process. The new recovery
conflict is added to pg_stat_database_conflicts, as confl_active_logicalslot.
See 6af1793954 for an overall design of logical decoding on a standby.
Bumps catversion for the addition of the pg_stat_database_conflicts column.
Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID for the same reason.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Amit Khandekar <amitdkhan.pg@gmail.com> (in an older version)
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230407075009.igg7be27ha2htkbt@awork3.anarazel.de
Needed for logical decoding on a standby. Slots need to be invalidated because
of the horizon if rows required for logical decoding are removed. If the
primary's wal_level is lowered from 'logical', logical slots on the standby
need to be invalidated.
The new invalidation methods will be used in a subsequent commit.
Logical slots that have been invalidated can be identified via the new
pg_replication_slots.conflicting column.
See 6af1793954 for an overall design of logical decoding on a standby.
Bumps catversion for the addition of the new pg_replication_slots column.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Amit Khandekar <amitdkhan.pg@gmail.com> (in an older version)
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230407075009.igg7be27ha2htkbt@awork3.anarazel.de
This is mainly useful because the upcoming logical-decoding-on-standby feature
adds further reasons for invalidating slots, and we don't want to end up with
multiple invalidated_* fields, or check different attributes.
Eventually we should consider not resetting restart_lsn when invalidating a
slot due to max_slot_wal_keep_size. But that's a user visible change, so left
for later.
Increases SLOT_VERSION, due to the changed field (with a different alignment,
no less).
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230407075009.igg7be27ha2htkbt@awork3.anarazel.de
Provide a way to ask the kernel to use O_DIRECT (or local equivalent)
where available for data and WAL files, to avoid or minimize kernel
caching. This hurts performance currently and is not intended for end
users yet. Later proposed work would introduce our own I/O clustering,
read-ahead, etc to replace the facilities the kernel disables with this
option.
The only user-visible change, if the developer-only GUC is not used, is
that this commit also removes the obscure logic that would activate
O_DIRECT for the WAL when wal_sync_method=open_[data]sync and
wal_level=minimal (which also requires max_wal_senders=0). Those are
non-default and unlikely settings, and this behavior wasn't (correctly)
documented. The same effect can be achieved with io_direct=wal.
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGK1X532hYqJ_MzFWt0n1zt8trz980D79WbjwnT-yYLZpg%40mail.gmail.com
In order to have the option to use O_DIRECT/FILE_FLAG_NO_BUFFERING in a
later commit, we need the addresses of user space buffers to be well
aligned. The exact requirements vary by OS and file system (typically
sectors and/or memory pages). The address alignment size is set to
4096, which is enough for currently known systems: it matches modern
sectors and common memory page size. There is no standard governing
O_DIRECT's requirements so we might eventually have to reconsider this
with more information from the field or future systems.
Aligning I/O buffers on memory pages is also known to improve regular
buffered I/O performance.
Three classes of I/O buffers for regular data pages are adjusted:
(1) Heap buffers are now allocated with the new palloc_aligned() or
MemoryContextAllocAligned() functions introduced by commit 439f6175.
(2) Stack buffers now use a new struct PGIOAlignedBlock to respect
PG_IO_ALIGN_SIZE, if possible with this compiler. (3) The buffer
pool is also aligned in shared memory.
WAL buffers were already aligned on XLOG_BLCKSZ. It's possible for
XLOG_BLCKSZ to be configured smaller than PG_IO_ALIGNED_SIZE and thus
for O_DIRECT WAL writes to fail to be well aligned, but that's a
pre-existing condition and will be addressed by a later commit.
BufFiles are not yet addressed (there's no current plan to use O_DIRECT
for those, but they could potentially get some incidental speedup even
in plain buffered I/O operations through better alignment).
If we can't align stack objects suitably using the compiler extensions
we know about, we disable the use of O_DIRECT by setting PG_O_DIRECT to
0. This avoids the need to consider systems that have O_DIRECT but
can't align stack objects the way we want; such systems could in theory
be supported with more work but we don't currently know of any such
machines, so it's easier to pretend there is no O_DIRECT support
instead. That's an existing and tested class of system.
Add assertions that all buffers passed into smgrread(), smgrwrite() and
smgrextend() are correctly aligned, unless PG_O_DIRECT is 0 (= stack
alignment tricks may be unavailable) or the block size has been set too
small to allow arrays of buffers to be all aligned.
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGK1X532hYqJ_MzFWt0n1zt8trz980D79WbjwnT-yYLZpg@mail.gmail.com
Support GSSAPI/Kerberos credentials being delegated to the server by a
client. With this, a user authenticating to PostgreSQL using Kerberos
(GSSAPI) credentials can choose to delegate their credentials to the
PostgreSQL server (which can choose to accept them, or not), allowing
the server to then use those delegated credentials to connect to
another service, such as with postgres_fdw or dblink or theoretically
any other service which is able to be authenticated using Kerberos.
Both postgres_fdw and dblink are changed to allow non-superuser
password-less connections but only when GSSAPI credentials have been
delegated to the server by the client and GSSAPI is used to
authenticate to the remote system.
Authors: Stephen Frost, Peifeng Qiu
Reviewed-By: David Christensen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CO1PR05MB8023CC2CB575E0FAAD7DF4F8A8E29@CO1PR05MB8023.namprd05.prod.outlook.com
a9c70b46db and 8aaa04b32S added counting of IO operations to a new view,
pg_stat_io. Now, add IO timing for reads, writes, extends, and fsyncs to
pg_stat_io as well.
This combines the tracking for pgBufferUsage with the tracking for pg_stat_io
into a new function pgstat_count_io_op_time(). This should make it a bit
easier to avoid the somewhat costly instr_time conversion done for
pgBufferUsage.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_ay5iKmnbXZ3DsauViF3eMxu4m1oNnJXqV_HyqYeg55Ww%40mail.gmail.com
Show a detailed description of the page offset number arrays that appear
in certain nbtree WAL records.
Also brings nbtree desc routines in line with the guidelines established
by recent commit 7d8219a4.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/20230109215842.fktuhesvayno6o4g%40awork3.anarazel.de
Add helper functions that output arrays in a standard format, and use
the functions inside heapdesc routines. This allows tools like
pg_walinspect to show a detailed description of the page offset number
arrays for records like PRUNE and VACUUM (unless there was an FPI).
Also document the conventions that desc routines should follow. Only
the heapdesc routines follow the conventions for now, so they're just
guidelines for the time being.
Based on a suggestion from Andres Freund.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/20230109215842.fktuhesvayno6o4g%40awork3.anarazel.de
We now create pg_constaint rows for NOT NULL constraints with
contype='n'.
We propagate these constraints during operations such as adding
inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions, creating
tables LIKE other tables. We mostly follow the well-known rules of
conislocal and coninhcount that we have for CHECK constraints, with some
adaptations; for example, as opposed to CHECK constraints, we don't
match NOT NULL ones by name when descending a hierarchy to alter it;
instead we match by column number. This means we don't require the
constraint names to be identical across a hierarchy.
For now, we omit them from system catalogs. Maybe this is worth
reconsidering. We don't support NOT VALID nor DEFERRABLE clauses
either; these can be added as separate features later (this patch is
already large and complicated enough.)
This has been very long in the making. The first patch was written by
Bernd Helmle in 2010 to add a new pg_constraint.contype value ('n'),
which I (Álvaro) then hijacked in 2011 and 2012, until that one was
killed by the realization that we ought to use contype='c' instead:
manufactured CHECK constraints. However, later SQL standard
development, as well as nonobvious emergent properties of that design
(mostly, failure to distinguish them from "normal" CHECK constraints as
well as the performance implication of having to test the CHECK
expression) led us to reconsider this choice, so now the current
implementation uses contype='n' again.
In 2016 Vitaly Burovoy also worked on this feature[1] but found no
consensus for his proposed approach, which was claimed to be closer to
the letter of the standard, requiring additional pg_attribute columns to
track the OID of the NOT NULL constraint for that column.
[1] https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACA0E642A0267EDA387AF2B%40%5B172.26.14.62%5D
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/AANLkTinLXMOEMz+0J29tf1POokKi4XDkWJ6-DDR9BKgU@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20110707213401.GA27098@alvh.no-ip.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1343682669-sup-2532@alvh.no-ip.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKOSWNkN6HSyatuys8xZxzRCR-KL1OkHS5-b9qd9bf1Rad3PLA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220817181249.q7qvj3okywctra3c@alvherre.pgsql
This commit adds a limit to the size of an XLogRecord at 1020MB, based
on a suggestion by Heikki Linnakangas. This counts for the overhead
needed by the XLogReader when allocating the memory it needs to read a
record in DecodeXLogRecordRequiredSpace(), based on the record size. An
assertion based on that is added to detect that any additions in the
XLogReader facilities would not cause any overflows. If that's ever the
case, the upper bound allowed would need to be adjusted.
Before this, it was possible for an external module to create WAL
records large enough to be assembled but not replayable, causing
failures when replaying such WAL records on standbys. One case
mentioned where this is possible is the in-core function
pg_logical_emit_message() (wrapper for LogLogicalMessage), that allows
to emit WAL records with an arbitrary amount of data potentially higher
than the replay limit of approximately 1GB (limit of a palloc, minus the
overhead needed by a XLogReader).
This commit is a follow-up of ffd1b6b that has added similar protections
for the block-level data. Here, the checks are extended to the whole
record length, mainrdata_len being extended from uint32 to uint64 with
the routines registering buffer and record data still limited to uint32
to minimize the checks when assembling a record. All the error messages
related to overflow checks are improved to provide more context about
the error happening.
Author: Matthias van de Meent
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Heikki Linnakangas, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEze2WgGiw+LZt+vHf8tWqB_6VxeLsMeoAuod0N=ij1q17n5pw@mail.gmail.com
1cbbee033 added BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT to the VACUUM and ANALYZE commands, so
here we permit that option to be specified in vacuumdb.
In passing, adjust the documents for vacuum_buffer_usage_limit and the
BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT VACUUM option to mention "kB" rather than "KB". Do the
same for the ERROR message in ExecVacuum() and
check_vacuum_buffer_usage_limit(). Without that we might tell a user that
the valid minimum value is 128 KB only to reject that because we accept
only "kB" and not "KB".
Also, add a small reminder comment in vacuum.h to try to trigger the
memory of anyone adding new fields to VacuumParams that they might want to
consider if vacuumdb needs to grow a new option too.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZAzTg3iEnubscvbf@telsasoft.com
While we already had some form of bulk extension for relations, it was fairly
limited. It only amortized the cost of acquiring the extension lock, the
relation itself was still extended one-by-one. Bulk extension was also solely
triggered by contention, not by the amount of data inserted.
To address this, use ExtendBufferedRelBy(), introduced in 31966b151e, to
extend the relation. We try to extend the relation by multiple blocks in two
situations:
1) The caller tells RelationGetBufferForTuple() that it will need multiple
pages. For now that's only used by heap_multi_insert(), see commit FIXME.
2) If there is contention on the extension lock, use the number of waiters for
the lock as a multiplier for the number of blocks to extend by. This is
similar to what we already did. Previously we additionally multiplied the
numbers of waiters by 20, but with the new relation extension
infrastructure I could not see a benefit in doing so.
Using the freespacemap to provide empty pages can cause significant
contention, and adds measurable overhead, even if there is no contention. To
reduce that, remember the blocks the relation was extended by in the
BulkInsertState, in the extending backend. In case 1) from above, the blocks
the extending backend needs are not entered into the FSM, as we know that we
will need those blocks.
One complication with using the FSM to record empty pages, is that we need to
insert blocks into the FSM, when we already hold a buffer content lock. To
avoid doing IO while holding a content lock, release the content lock before
recording free space. Currently that opens a small window in which another
backend could fill the block, if a concurrent VACUUM records the free
space. If that happens, we retry, similar to the already existing case when
otherBuffer is provided. In the future it might be worth closing the race by
preventing VACUUM from recording the space in newly extended pages.
This change provides very significant wins (3x at 16 clients, on my
workstation) for concurrent COPY into a single relation. Even single threaded
COPY is measurably faster, primarily due to not dirtying pages while
extending, if supported by the operating system (see commit 4d330a61bb). Even
single-row INSERTs benefit, although to a much smaller degree, as the relation
extension lock rarely is the primary bottleneck.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221029025420.eplyow6k7tgu6he3@awork3.anarazel.de
Add new options to the VACUUM and ANALYZE commands called
BUFFER_USAGE_LIMIT to allow users more control over how large to make the
buffer access strategy that is used to limit the usage of buffers in
shared buffers. Larger rings can allow VACUUM to run more quickly but
have the drawback of VACUUM possibly evicting more buffers from shared
buffers that might be useful for other queries running on the database.
Here we also add a new GUC named vacuum_buffer_usage_limit which controls
how large to make the access strategy when it's not specified in the
VACUUM/ANALYZE command. This defaults to 256KB, which is the same size as
the access strategy was prior to this change. This setting also
controls how large to make the buffer access strategy for autovacuum.
Per idea by Andres Freund.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230111182720.ejifsclfwymw2reb@awork3.anarazel.de
A future commit will use this information to determine how aggressively to
extend the relation by. In heap_multi_insert() we know accurately how many
pages we need once we need to extend the relation, providing an accurate lower
bound for how much to extend.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221029025420.eplyow6k7tgu6he3@awork3.anarazel.de
Allow autovacuum to reload the config file more often so that cost-based
delay parameters can take effect while VACUUMing a relation. Previously,
autovacuum workers only reloaded the config file once per relation
vacuumed, so config changes could not take effect until beginning to
vacuum the next table.
Now, check if a reload is pending roughly once per block, when checking
if we need to delay.
In order for autovacuum workers to safely update their own cost delay
and cost limit parameters without impacting performance, we had to
rethink when and how these values were accessed.
Previously, an autovacuum worker's wi_cost_limit was set only at the
beginning of vacuuming a table, after reloading the config file.
Therefore, at the time that autovac_balance_cost() was called, workers
vacuuming tables with no cost-related storage parameters could still
have different values for their wi_cost_limit_base and wi_cost_delay.
Now that the cost parameters can be updated while vacuuming a table,
workers will (within some margin of error) have no reason to have
different values for cost limit and cost delay (in the absence of
cost-related storage parameters). This removes the rationale for keeping
cost limit and cost delay in shared memory. Balancing the cost limit
requires only the number of active autovacuum workers vacuuming a table
with no cost-based storage parameters.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAKRu_ZngzqnEODc7LmS1NH04Kt6Y9huSjz5pp7%2BDXhrjDA0gw%40mail.gmail.com
Vacuum code run both by autovacuum workers and a backend doing
VACUUM/ANALYZE previously inspected VacuumCostLimit and VacuumCostDelay,
which are the global variables backing the GUCs vacuum_cost_limit and
vacuum_cost_delay.
Autovacuum workers needed to override these variables with their
own values, derived from autovacuum_vacuum_cost_limit and
autovacuum_vacuum_cost_delay and worker cost limit balancing logic.
This led to confusing code which, in some cases, both derived and
set a new value of VacuumCostLimit from VacuumCostLimit.
In preparation for refreshing these GUC values more often, introduce
new, independent global variables and add a function to update them
using the GUCs and existing logic.
Per suggestion by Kyotaro Horiguchi
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAKRu_ZngzqnEODc7LmS1NH04Kt6Y9huSjz5pp7%2BDXhrjDA0gw%40mail.gmail.com
While vacuuming a table in failsafe mode, VacuumCostActive should
not be re-enabled. This currently isn't a problem because vacuum
cost parameters are only refreshed in between vacuuming tables and
failsafe status is reset for every table.
In preparation for allowing vacuum cost parameters to be updated
more frequently, elevate LVRelState->failsafe_active to a global,
VacuumFailsafeActive, which will be checked when determining whether
or not to re-enable vacuum cost-related delays.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAKRu_ZngzqnEODc7LmS1NH04Kt6Y9huSjz5pp7%2BDXhrjDA0gw%40mail.gmail.com
zstd compression supports a special mode for finding matched in distant
past, which may result in better compression ratio, at the expense of
using more memory (the window size is 128MB).
To enable this optional mode, use the "long" keyword when specifying the
compression method (--compress=zstd:long).
Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Jacob Champion
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230224191840.GD1653@telsasoft.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220327205020.GM28503@telsasoft.com
vacuum() is used for both the VACUUM command and for autovacuum. There
were many prechecks being done inside vacuum() that were just not relevant
to autovacuum. Let's move the bulk of these into ExecVacuum() so that
they're only executed when running the VACUUM command. This removes a
small amount of overhead when autovacuum vacuums a table.
While we are at it, allocate VACUUM's BufferAccessStrategy in ExecVacuum()
and pass it into vacuum() instead of expecting vacuum() to make it if it's
not already made by the calling function. To make this work, we need to
create the vacuum memory context slightly earlier, so we now need to pass
that down to vacuum() so that it's available for use in other memory
allocations.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230405211534.4skgskbilnxqrmxg@awork3.anarazel.de
pg_stat_statements relies on EState->es_processed to count the number of
rows processed by ExecutorRun(). This proves to be a problem under the
extended query protocol when the result of a query is fetched through
more than one call of ExecutorRun(), as es_processed is reset each time
ExecutorRun() is called. This causes pg_stat_statements to report the
number of rows calculated in the last execute fetch, rather than the
global sum of all the rows processed.
As pquery.c tells, this is a problem when a portal does not use
holdStore. For example, DMLs with RETURNING would report a correct
tuple count as these do one execution cycle when the query is first
executed to fill in the portal's store with one ExecutorRun(), feeding
on the portal's store for each follow-up execute fetch depending on the
fetch size requested by the client.
The fix proposed for this issue is simple with the addition of an extra
counter in EState that's preserved across multiple ExecutorRun() calls,
incremented with the value calculated in es_processed. This approach is
not back-patchable, unfortunately.
Note that libpq does not currently give any way to control the fetch
size when using the extended v3 protocol, meaning that in-core testing
is not possible yet. This issue can be easily verified with the JDBC
driver, though, with *autocommit disabled*. Hence, having in-core tests
requires more features, left for future discussion:
- At least two new libpq routines splitting PQsendQueryGuts(), one for
the bind/describe and a second for a series of execute fetches with a
custom fetch size, likely in a fashion similar to what JDBC does.
- A psql meta-command for the execute phase. This part is not strictly
mandatory, still it could be handy.
Reported-by: Andrew Dunstan (original discovery by Simon Siggs)
Author: Sami Imseih
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/EBE6C507-9EB6-4142-9E4D-38B1673363A7@amazon.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c90890e7-9c89-c34f-d3c5-d5c763a34bd8@dunslane.net
The primary bottlenecks for relation extension are:
1) The extension lock is held while acquiring a victim buffer for the new
page. Acquiring a victim buffer can require writing out the old page
contents including possibly needing to flush WAL.
2) When extending via ReadBuffer() et al, we write a zero page during the
extension, and then later write out the actual page contents. This can
nearly double the write rate.
3) The existing bulk relation extension infrastructure in hio.c just amortized
the cost of acquiring the relation extension lock, but none of the other
costs.
Unfortunately 1) cannot currently be addressed in a central manner as the
callers to ReadBuffer() need to acquire the extension lock. To address that,
this this commit moves the responsibility for acquiring the extension lock
into bufmgr.c functions. That allows to acquire the relation extension lock
for just the required time. This will also allow us to improve relation
extension further, without changing callers.
The reason we write all-zeroes pages during relation extension is that we hope
to get ENOSPC errors earlier that way (largely works, except for CoW
filesystems). It is easier to handle out-of-space errors gracefully if the
page doesn't yet contain actual tuples. This commit addresses 2), by using the
recently introduced smgrzeroextend(), which extends the relation, without
dirtying the kernel page cache for all the extended pages.
To address 3), this commit introduces a function to extend a relation by
multiple blocks at a time.
There are three new exposed functions: ExtendBufferedRel() for extending the
relation by a single block, ExtendBufferedRelBy() to extend a relation by
multiple blocks at once, and ExtendBufferedRelTo() for extending a relation up
to a certain size.
To avoid duplicating code between ReadBuffer(P_NEW) and the new functions,
ReadBuffer(P_NEW) now implements relation extension with
ExtendBufferedRel(), using a flag to tell ExtendBufferedRel() that the
relation lock is already held.
Note that this commit does not yet lead to a meaningful performance or
scalability improvement - for that uses of ReadBuffer(P_NEW) will need to be
converted to ExtendBuffered*(), which will be done in subsequent commits.
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221029025420.eplyow6k7tgu6he3@awork3.anarazel.de
A future patch will add support for extending relations by multiple blocks at
once. To be concurrency safe, the buffers for those blocks need to be marked
as BM_IO_IN_PROGRESS. Until now we only had infrastructure for recovering from
an IO error for a single buffer. This commit extends that infrastructure to
multiple buffers by using the resource owner infrastructure.
This commit increases the size of the ResourceOwnerData struct, which appears
to have a just about measurable overhead in very extreme workloads. Medium
term we are planning to substantially shrink the size of
ResourceOwnerData. Short term the increase is small enough to not worry about
it for now.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221029025420.eplyow6k7tgu6he3@awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221029200025.w7bvlgvamjfo6z44@awork3.anarazel.de
Merge and hash joins can support antijoin with the non-nullable input
on the right, using very simple combinations of their existing logic
for right join and anti join. This gives the planner more freedom
about how to order the join. It's particularly useful for hash join,
since we may now have the option to hash the smaller table instead
of the larger.
Richard Guo, reviewed by Ronan Dunklau and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs48xh9hMzXzSy3VaPzGAz+fkxXXTUbCLohX1_L8THFRm2Q@mail.gmail.com
This adds a few more assertions against a buffer being local in places we
don't expect, and extracts the check for a buffer being pinned exactly once
from LockBufferForCleanup() into its own function. Later commits will use this
function.
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/419312fd-9255-078c-c3e3-f0525f911d7f@iki.fi
smgrzeroextend() uses FileFallocate() to efficiently extend files by multiple
blocks. When extending by a small number of blocks, use FileZero() instead, as
using posix_fallocate() for small numbers of blocks is inefficient for some
file systems / operating systems. FileZero() is also used as the fallback for
FileFallocate() on platforms / filesystems that don't support fallocate.
A big advantage of using posix_fallocate() is that it typically won't cause
dirty buffers in the kernel pagecache. So far the most common pattern in our
code is that we smgrextend() a page full of zeroes and put the corresponding
page into shared buffers, from where we later write out the actual contents of
the page. If the kernel, e.g. due to memory pressure or elapsed time, already
wrote back the all-zeroes page, this can lead to doubling the amount of writes
reaching storage.
There are no users of smgrzeroextend() as of this commit. That will follow in
future commits.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: John Naylor <john.naylor@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221029025420.eplyow6k7tgu6he3@awork3.anarazel.de
Convert to BCP47 language tags before storing in the catalog, except
during binary upgrade or when the locale comes from an existing
collation or template database.
The resulting language tags can vary slightly between ICU
versions. For instance, "@colBackwards=yes" is converted to
"und-u-kb-true" in older versions of ICU, and to the simpler (but
equivalent) "und-u-kb" in newer versions.
The process of canonicalizing to a language tag also understands more
input locale string formats than ucol_open(). For instance,
"fr_CA.UTF-8" is misinterpreted by ucol_open() and the region is
ignored; effectively treating it the same as the locale "fr" and
opening the wrong collator. Canonicalization properly interprets the
language and region, resulting in the language tag "fr-CA", which can
then be understood by ucol_open().
This commit fixes a problem in prior versions due to ucol_open()
misinterpreting locale strings as described above. For instance,
creating an ICU collation with locale "fr_CA.UTF-8" would store that
string directly in the catalog, which would later be passed to (and
misinterpreted by) ucol_open(). After this commit, the locale string
will be canonicalized to language tag "fr-CA" in the catalog, which
will be properly understood by ucol_open(). Because this fix affects
the resulting collator, we cannot change the locale string stored in
the catalog for existing databases or collations; otherwise we'd risk
corrupting indexes. Therefore, only canonicalize locales for
newly-created (not upgraded) collations/databases. For similar
reasons, do not backport.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8c7af6820aed94dc7bc259d2aa7f9663518e6137.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
This option is normally false, but can be set to true to obtain
the legacy behavior where the subscription runs with the permissions
of the subscription owner rather than the permissions of the
table owner. The advantages of this mode are (1) it doesn't require
that the subscription owner have permission to SET ROLE to each
table owner and (2) since no role switching occurs, the
SECURITY_RESTRICTED_OPERATION restrictions do not apply.
On the downside, it allows any table owner to easily usurp
the privileges of the subscription owner - basically, to take
over their account. Because that's generally quite undesirable,
we don't make this mode the default, but we do make it available,
just in case the new behavior causes too many problems for someone.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZ-WEeG6Z14AfH7KhmpX2eFh+tZ0z+vf0=eMDdbda269g@mail.gmail.com
Up until now, logical replication actions have been performed as the
subscription owner, who will generally be a superuser. Commit
cec57b1a0f documented hazards
associated with that situation, namely, that any user who owns a
table on the subscriber side could assume the privileges of the
subscription owner by attaching a trigger, expression index, or
some other kind of executable code to it. As a remedy, it suggested
not creating configurations where users who are not fully trusted
own tables on the subscriber.
Although that will work, it basically precludes using logical
replication in the way that people typically want to use it,
namely, to replicate a database from one node to another
without necessarily having any restrictions on which database
users can own tables. So, instead, change logical replication to
execute INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE, and TRUNCATE operations as the
table owner when they are replicated.
Since this involves switching the active user frequently within
a session that is authenticated as the subscription user, also
impose SECURITY_RESTRICTED_OPERATION restrictions on logical
replication code. As an exception, if the table owner can SET
ROLE to the subscription owner, these restrictions have no
security value, so don't impose them in that case.
Subscription owners are now required to have the ability to
SET ROLE to every role that owns a table that the subscription
is replicating. If they don't, replication will fail. Superusers,
who normally own subscriptions, satisfy this property by default.
Non-superusers users who own subscriptions will need to be
granted the roles that own relevant tables.
Patch by me, reviewed (but not necessarily in its entirety) by
Jelte Fennema, Jeff Davis, and Noah Misch.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaSCkg9ww9oppPqqs+9RVqCexYCE6Aq=UsYPfnOoDeFkw@mail.gmail.com
- At the last minute and for no particularly good reason, I changed the
WITHOUT token to be marked especially for lookahead, from the one in
WITHOUT TIME to the one in WITHOUT UNIQUE. Study of upcoming patches
(where a new WITHOUT ARRAY WRAPPER clause is added) showed me that the
former was better, so put it back the way the original patch had it.
- update exprTypmod() for JsonConstructorExpr to return the typmod of
the RETURNING clause, as a comment there suggested. Perhaps it's
possible for this to make a difference with datetime types, but I
didn't try to build a test case.
- The nodeFuncs.c support code for new nodes was calling walker()
directly instead of the WALK() macro as introduced by commit 1c27d16e6e.
Modernize that. Also add exprLocation() support for a couple of nodes
that missed it. Lastly, reorder the code more sensibly.
The WITHOUT_LA -> WITHOUT change means that stored rules containing
either WITHOUT TIME ZONE or WITHOUT UNIQUE KEYS would change
representation. Therefore, bump catversion.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230329181708.e64g2tpy7jyufqkr@alvherre.pgsql
Commit 61b313e4 made nbtree consistently pass down a heaprel to low
level routines like _bt_getbuf(). Although this was primarily intended
as preparation for logical decoding on standbys, it also made it easy to
correct an old deficiency in how nbtree VACUUM determines whether or not
it's now safe to recycle deleted pages.
Pass the heaprel to GlobalVisTestFor() in nbtree routines that deal with
recycle safety. nbtree now makes less pessimistic assumptions about
recycle safety within non-catalog relations. This enhancement
complements the recycling enhancement added by commit 9dd963ae25.
nbtree remains just as pessimistic as ever when it comes to recycle
safety within indexes on catalog relations. There is no fundamental
reason why we need to treat catalog relations differently, though. The
behavioral inconsistency is a consequence of the way that nbtree uses
nextXID values to implement what Lanin and Shasha call "the drain
technique". Note in particular that it has nothing to do with whether
or not index tuples might still be required for an older MVCC snapshot.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkaiDxCje0yPuH=3Uh2p1V_2pFGY==xfbZoZu7Ax_NB8g@mail.gmail.com
This commit only implements one prerequisite part for allowing logical
decoding. The commit message contains an explanation of the overall design,
which later commits will refer back to.
Overall design:
1. We want to enable logical decoding on standbys, but replay of WAL
from the primary might remove data that is needed by logical decoding,
causing error(s) on the standby. To prevent those errors, a new replication
conflict scenario needs to be addressed (as much as hot standby does).
2. Our chosen strategy for dealing with this type of replication slot
is to invalidate logical slots for which needed data has been removed.
3. To do this we need the latestRemovedXid for each change, just as we
do for physical replication conflicts, but we also need to know
whether any particular change was to data that logical replication
might access. That way, during WAL replay, we know when there is a risk of
conflict and, if so, if there is a conflict.
4. We can't rely on the standby's relcache entries for this purpose in
any way, because the startup process can't access catalog contents.
5. Therefore every WAL record that potentially removes data from the
index or heap must carry a flag indicating whether or not it is one
that might be accessed during logical decoding.
Why do we need this for logical decoding on standby?
First, let's forget about logical decoding on standby and recall that
on a primary database, any catalog rows that may be needed by a logical
decoding replication slot are not removed.
This is done thanks to the catalog_xmin associated with the logical
replication slot.
But, with logical decoding on standby, in the following cases:
- hot_standby_feedback is off
- hot_standby_feedback is on but there is no a physical slot between
the primary and the standby. Then, hot_standby_feedback will work,
but only while the connection is alive (for example a node restart
would break it)
Then, the primary may delete system catalog rows that could be needed
by the logical decoding on the standby (as it does not know about the
catalog_xmin on the standby).
So, it’s mandatory to identify those rows and invalidate the slots
that may need them if any. Identifying those rows is the purpose of
this commit.
Implementation:
When a WAL replay on standby indicates that a catalog table tuple is
to be deleted by an xid that is greater than a logical slot's
catalog_xmin, then that means the slot's catalog_xmin conflicts with
the xid, and we need to handle the conflict. While subsequent commits
will do the actual conflict handling, this commit adds a new field
isCatalogRel in such WAL records (and a new bit set in the
xl_heap_visible flags field), that is true for catalog tables, so as to
arrange for conflict handling.
The affected WAL records are the ones that already contain the
snapshotConflictHorizon field, namely:
- gistxlogDelete
- gistxlogPageReuse
- xl_hash_vacuum_one_page
- xl_heap_prune
- xl_heap_freeze_page
- xl_heap_visible
- xl_btree_reuse_page
- xl_btree_delete
- spgxlogVacuumRedirect
Due to this new field being added, xl_hash_vacuum_one_page and
gistxlogDelete do now contain the offsets to be deleted as a
FLEXIBLE_ARRAY_MEMBER. This is needed to ensure correct alignment.
It's not needed on the others struct where isCatalogRel has
been added.
This commit just introduces the WAL format changes mentioned above. Handling
the actual conflicts will follow in future commits.
Bumps XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC as the several WAL records are changed.
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (in an older version)
Author: Amit Khandekar <amitdkhan.pg@gmail.com> (in an older version)
Reviewed-by: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
This is done in preparation for logical decoding on standby, which needs to
include whether visibility affecting WAL records are about a (user) catalog
table. Which is only known for the table, not the indexes.
It's also nice to be able to pass the heap relation to GlobalVisTestFor() in
vacuumRedirectAndPlaceholder().
Author: "Drouvot, Bertrand" <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/21b700c3-eecf-2e05-a699-f8c78dd31ec7@gmail.com
This patch introduces the SQL standard IS JSON predicate. It operates
on text and bytea values representing JSON, as well as on the json and
jsonb types. Each test has IS and IS NOT variants and supports a WITH
UNIQUE KEYS flag. The tests are:
IS JSON [VALUE]
IS JSON ARRAY
IS JSON OBJECT
IS JSON SCALAR
These should be self-explanatory.
The WITH UNIQUE KEYS flag makes these return false when duplicate keys
exist in any object within the value, not necessarily directly contained
in the outermost object.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Author: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAF4Au4w2x-5LTnN_bxky-mq4=WOqsGsxSpENCzHRAzSnEd8+WQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
I forgot to do so in the referenced commit. While the consequences of omitting
the version change are likely to be harmless (besides discarding stats, as a
PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID bump also does), it still seems worth doing.
Among other things, this should make it easier to calculate a useful cache hit
ratio by excluding buffer reads via buffer access strategies. As buffer access
strategies reuse buffers (and thus evict the prior buffer contents), it is
normal to see reads on repeated scans of the same data.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_beMa9Hzih40%3DXPYqhDVz6tsgUGTrhZXRo%3Dunp%2Bszb%3DUA%40mail.gmail.com
Full and right outer joins were not supported in the initial
implementation of Parallel Hash Join because of deadlock hazards (see
discussion). Therefore FULL JOIN inhibited parallelism, as the other
join strategies can't do that in parallel either.
Add a new PHJ phase PHJ_BATCH_SCAN that scans for unmatched tuples on
the inner side of one batch's hash table. For now, sidestep the
deadlock problem by terminating parallelism there. The last process to
arrive at that phase emits the unmatched tuples, while others detach and
are free to go and work on other batches, if there are any, but
otherwise they finish the join early.
That unfairness is considered acceptable for now, because it's better
than no parallelism at all. The build and probe phases are run in
parallel, and the new scan-for-unmatched phase, while serial, is usually
applied to the smaller of the two relations and is either limited by
some multiple of work_mem, or it's too big and is partitioned into
batches and then the situation is improved by batch-level parallelism.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BA6ftXPz4oe92%2Bx8Er%2BxpGZqto70-Q_ERwRaSyA%3DafNg%40mail.gmail.com
In instr_time.h it is stated that:
* When summing multiple measurements, it's recommended to leave the
* running sum in instr_time form (ie, use INSTR_TIME_ADD or
* INSTR_TIME_ACCUM_DIFF) and convert to a result format only at the end.
The reason for that is that converting to microseconds is not cheap, and can
loose precision. Therefore this commit changes 'PendingWalStats' to use
'instr_time' instead of 'PgStat_Counter' while accumulating 'wal_write_time'
and 'wal_sync_time'.
Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1feedb83-7aa9-cb4b-5086-598349d3f555@gmail.com
This role can be granted to non-superusers to allow them to issue
CREATE SUBSCRIPTION. The non-superuser must additionally have CREATE
permissions on the database in which the subscription is to be
created.
Most forms of ALTER SUBSCRIPTION, including ALTER SUBSCRIPTION .. SKIP,
now require only that the role performing the operation own the
subscription, or inherit the privileges of the owner. However, to
use ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... RENAME or ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... OWNER TO,
you also need CREATE permission on the database. This is similar to
what we do for schemas. To change the owner of a schema, you must also
have permission to SET ROLE to the new owner, similar to what we do
for other object types.
Non-superusers are required to specify a password for authentication
and the remote side must use the password, similar to what is required
for postgres_fdw and dblink. A superuser who wants a non-superuser to
own a subscription that does not rely on password authentication may
set the new password_required=false property on that subscription. A
non-superuser may not set password_required=false and may not modify a
subscription that already has password_required=false.
This new password_required subscription property works much like the
eponymous postgres_fdw property. In both cases, the actual semantics
are that a password is not required if either (1) the property is set
to false or (2) the relevant user is the superuser.
Patch by me, reviewed by Andres Freund, Jeff Davis, Mark Dilger,
and Stephen Frost (but some of those people did not fully endorse
all of the decisions that the patch makes).
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaDH=0Xj7OBiQnsHTKcF2c4L+=gzPBUKSJLh8zed2_+Dg@mail.gmail.com
The tts_flag is named TTS_FLAG_SHOULDFREE, so use that instead of
TTS_SHOULDFREE, which is the name of the macro that checks for that flag.
Additionally, 4da597edf got rid of the TupleTableSlot.tts_tuple field but
forgot to update a comment which referenced that field. Fix that.
Reported-by: Zhen Mingyang <zhenmingyang@yeah.net>
Reported-by: Richard Guo <guofenglinux@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1a96696c.9d3.187193989c3.Coremail.zhenmingyang@yeah.net
This refactors libpq to copy addrinfos returned by getaddrinfo to
memory owned by libpq such that future improvements can alter for
example the order of entries.
As a nice side effect of this refactor the mechanism for iteration
over addresses in PQconnectPoll is now identical to its iteration
over hosts.
Author: Jelte Fennema <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck <mbanck@gmx.net>
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin <amborodin86@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/PR3PR83MB04768E2FF04818EEB2179949F7A69@PR3PR83MB0476.EURPRD83.prod.outlook.com
This function has been a no-op for over a decade. Even if bufmgr
regains a need to be called during commit, it seems unlikely that
the most appropriate call points would be precisely here, so it's not
doing us much good as a placeholder either. Now, removing it probably
doesn't save any noticeable number of cycles --- but the main call is
inside the commit critical section, and the less work done there the
better.
Matthias van de Meent
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEze2Wi1=tLKbxZnXzcD+8fYKyKqBtivVakLQC_mYBsP4Y8qVA@mail.gmail.com
This commit introduces the SQL/JSON standard-conforming constructors for
JSON types:
JSON_ARRAY()
JSON_ARRAYAGG()
JSON_OBJECT()
JSON_OBJECTAGG()
Most of the functionality was already present in PostgreSQL-specific
functions, but these include some new functionality such as the ability
to skip or include NULL values, and to allow duplicate keys or throw
error when they are found, as well as the standard specified syntax to
specify output type and format.
Author: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Teodor Sigaev <teodor@sigaev.ru>
Author: Oleg Bartunov <obartunov@gmail.com>
Author: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewers have included (in no particular order) Andres Freund, Alexander
Korotkov, Pavel Stehule, Andrew Alsup, Erik Rijkers, Zihong Yu,
Himanshu Upadhyaya, Daniel Gustafsson, Justin Pryzby.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAF4Au4w2x-5LTnN_bxky-mq4=WOqsGsxSpENCzHRAzSnEd8+WQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cd0bb935-0158-78a7-08b5-904886deac4b@postgrespro.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220616233130.rparivafipt6doj3@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/abd9b83b-aa66-f230-3d6d-734817f0995d%40postgresql.org
The standard collations "ucs_basic" and "unicode" were defined in
initdb, even though pg_collation.dat seems like the correct place for
them. It seems this was just forgotten during various reorganizations
of initdb and pg_collation.dat/.h over time.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/08b58ecd-0d50-9395-ed51-dc8294e3fd2b%40enterprisedb.com
When there are multiple publications for a subscription and one of those
publishes via the parent table by using publish_via_partition_root and the
other one directly publishes the child table, we end up copying the same
data twice during initial synchronization. The reason for this was that we
get both the parent and child tables from the publisher and try to copy
the data for both of them.
This patch extends the function pg_get_publication_tables() to take a
publication list as its input parameter. This allows us to exclude a
partition table whose ancestor is published by the same publication list.
This problem does exist in back-branches but we decide to fix it there in
a separate commit if required. The fix for back-branches requires quite
complicated changes to fetch the required table information from the
publisher as we can't update the function pg_get_publication_tables() in
back-branches. We are not sure whether we want to deviate and complicate
the code in back-branches for this problem as there are no field reports
yet.
Author: Wang wei
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Jacob Champion, Kuroda Hayato, Vignesh C, Osumi Takamichi, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB57167F45D481F78CDC5986F794B99@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
For ICU collations, ensure that the locale's language exists in ICU,
and that the locale can be opened.
Basic validation helps avoid minor mistakes and misspellings, which
often fall back to the root locale instead of the intended
locale. It's even more important to avoid such mistakes in ICU
versions 54 and earlier, where the same (misspelled) locale string
could fall back to different locales depending on the environment.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/11b1eeb7e7667fdd4178497aeb796c48d26e69b9.camel@j-davis.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/df2efad0cae7c65180df8e5ebb709e5eb4f2a82b.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Change the columns attndims, attstattarget, and attinhcount from int32
to int16, and reorder a bit. This saves some space (currently 4
bytes) in pg_attribute and tuple descriptors, which translates into
small performance benefits and/or room for new columns in pg_attribute
needed by future features.
attndims and attinhcount are never realistically used with values
larger than int16. Just to be sure, add some overflow checks.
attstattarget is currently limited explicitly to 10000.
For consistency, pg_constraint.coninhcount is also changed like
attinhcount.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/d07ffc2b-e0e8-77f7-38fb-be921dff71af%40enterprisedb.com
Replace the hardcoded value with a GUC such that the iteration
count can be raised in order to increase protection against
brute-force attacks. The hardcoded value for SCRAM iteration
count was defined to be 4096, which is taken from RFC 7677, so
set the default for the GUC to 4096 to match. In RFC 7677 the
recommendation is at least 15000 iterations but 4096 is listed
as a SHOULD requirement given that it's estimated to yield a
0.5s processing time on a mobile handset of the time of RFC
writing (late 2015).
Raising the iteration count of SCRAM will make stored passwords
more resilient to brute-force attacks at a higher computational
cost during connection establishment. Lowering the count will
reduce computational overhead during connections at the tradeoff
of reducing strength against brute-force attacks.
There are however platforms where even a modest iteration count
yields a too high computational overhead, with weaker password
encryption schemes chosen as a result. In these situations,
SCRAM with a very low iteration count still gives benefits over
weaker schemes like md5, so we allow the iteration count to be
set to one at the low end.
The new GUC is intentionally generically named such that it can
be made to support future SCRAM standards should they emerge.
At that point the value can be made into key:value pairs with
an undefined key as a default which will be backwards compatible
with this.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jkatz@postgresql.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/F72E7BC7-189F-4B17-BF47-9735EB72C364@yesql.se
When extracting an attr from a cached tuple in the syscache with
SysCacheGetAttr the isnull parameter must be checked in case the
attr cannot be NULL. For cases when this is known beforehand, a
wrapper is introduced which perform the errorhandling internally
on behalf of the caller, invoking an elog in case of a NULL attr.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/AD76405E-DB45-46B6-941F-17B1EB3A9076@yesql.se
The "partitions_total" and "partitions_done" fields were updated
as though the current level of partitioning was the only one.
In multi-level cases, not only could partitions_total change
over the course of the command, but partitions_done could go
backwards or exceed the currently-reported partitions_total.
Fix by setting partitions_total to the total number of direct
and indirect children once at command start, and then just
incrementing partitions_done at appropriate points. Invent
a new progress monitoring function "pgstat_progress_incr_param"
to simplify doing the latter. We can avoid adding cost for the
former when doing CREATE INDEX, because ProcessUtility already
enumerates the children and it's pretty easy to pass the count
down to DefineIndex. In principle the same could be done in
ALTER TABLE, but that's structurally difficult; for now, just
eat the cost of an extra find_all_inheritors scan in that case.
Ilya Gladyshev and Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a15f904a70924ffa4ca25c3c744cff31e0e6e143.camel@gmail.com
This provides a very simple way to see the generic plan for a
parameterized query. Without this, it's necessary to define
a prepared statement and temporarily change plan_cache_mode,
which is a bit tedious.
One thing that's a bit of a hack perhaps is that we disable
execution-time partition pruning when the GENERIC_PLAN option
is given. That's because the pruning code may attempt to
fetch the value of one of the parameters, which would fail.
Laurenz Albe, reviewed by Julien Rouhaud, Christoph Berg,
Michel Pelletier, Jim Jones, and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0a29b954b10b57f0d135fe12aa0909bd41883eb0.camel@cybertec.at
The sslcertmode option controls whether the server is allowed and/or
required to request a certificate from the client. There are three
modes:
- "allow" is the default and follows the current behavior, where a
configured client certificate is sent if the server requests one
(via one of its default locations or sslcert). With the current
implementation, will happen whenever TLS is negotiated.
- "disable" causes the client to refuse to send a client certificate
even if sslcert is configured or if a client certificate is available in
one of its default locations.
- "require" causes the client to fail if a client certificate is never
sent and the server opens a connection anyway. This doesn't add any
additional security, since there is no guarantee that the server is
validating the certificate correctly, but it may helpful to troubleshoot
more complicated TLS setups.
sslcertmode=require requires SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb(), available since
OpenSSL 1.0.2. Note that LibreSSL does not include it.
Using a connection parameter different than require_auth has come up as
the simplest design because certificate authentication does not rely
directly on any of the AUTH_REQ_* codes, and one may want to require a
certificate to be sent in combination of a given authentication method,
like SCRAM-SHA-256.
TAP tests are added in src/test/ssl/, some of them relying on sslinfo to
check if a certificate has been set. These are compatible across all
the versions of OpenSSL supported on HEAD (currently down to 1.0.1).
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Peter Eisentraut, David G. Johnston,
Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9e5a8ccddb8355ea9fa4b75a1e3a9edc88a70cd3.camel@vmware.com
This commit renames the members of a few pgstat structures related to
functions and relations, by respectively removing their prefix "f_" and
"t_". The statistics for functions and relations and handled in their
own file, and pgstatfuncs.c associates each field in a structure
variable named based on the object type handled, so no information is
lost with this rename.
This will help with some of the refactoring aimed for pgstatfuncs.c, as
this makes more consistent the field names with the SQL functions
retrieving them.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9142f62a-a422-145c-bde0-b5bc498a4ada@gmail.com
Add pgstat counter to track row updates that result in the successor
version going to a new heap page, leaving behind an original version
whose t_ctid points to the new version. The current count is shown by
the n_tup_newpage_upd column of each of the pg_stat_*_tables views.
The new n_tup_newpage_upd column complements the existing n_tup_hot_upd
and n_tup_upd columns. Tables that have high n_tup_newpage_upd values
(relative to n_tup_upd) are good candidates for tuning heap fillfactor.
Corey Huinker, with small tweaks by me.
Author: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=ded21M9iZ36hHm-vj2rE2d=zcKpUQMds__Xm2pxLfHKA@mail.gmail.com
* Commit 3048898e dropped -ING from PHJ wait event names. Update the
corresponding barrier phases names to match.
* Rename the "DONE" phases to "FREE". That's symmetrical with
"ALLOCATE", and names the activity that actually happens in that phase
(as we do for the other phases) rather than a state. The bug fixed by
commit 8d578b9b might have been more obvious with this name.
* Rename the batch/bucket growth barriers' "ALLOCATE" phases to
"REALLOCATE", a better description of what they do.
* Update the high level comments about phases to highlight phases
are executed by a single process with an asterisk (mostly memory
management phases).
No behavior change, as this is just improving internal identifiers. The
only user-visible sign of this is that a couple of wait events' display
names change from "...Allocate" to "...Reallocate" in pg_stat_activity,
to stay in sync with the internal names.
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BMDpwF2Eo2LAvzd%3DpOh81wUTsrwU1uAwR-v6OGBB6%2B7g%40mail.gmail.com
Currently, in read committed transaction isolation mode (default), we have the
following sequence of actions when tuple_update()/tuple_delete() finds
the tuple updated by concurrent transaction.
1. Attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete(), which
returns TM_Updated.
2. Lock tuple with tuple_lock().
3. Re-evaluate plan qual (recheck if we still need to update/delete and
calculate the new tuple for update).
4. Second attempt to update/delete tuple with tuple_update()/tuple_delete().
This attempt should be successful, since the tuple was previously locked.
This patch eliminates step 2 by taking the lock during first
tuple_update()/tuple_delete() call. Heap table access method saves some
efforts by checking the updated tuple once instead of twice. Future
undo-based table access methods, which will start from the latest row version,
can immediately place a lock there.
The code in nodeModifyTable.c is simplified by removing the nested switch/case.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdua-YFw3XTprfutzGp28xXLigFtzNbuFY8yPhqeq6X5kg%40mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Pavel Borisov, Vignesh C, Mason Sharp
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Chris Travers
These are set after a \! command or a backtick substitution.
SHELL_ERROR is just "true" for error (nonzero exit status) or "false"
for success, while SHELL_EXIT_CODE records the actual exit status
following standard shell/system(3) conventions.
Corey Huinker, reviewed by Maxim Orlov and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=cWao2x2f+UDw15W1JkVFr_bsxfstw=NGea7r9m4j-7rQ@mail.gmail.com
With unlucky timing and parallel_leader_participation=off (not the
default), PHJ could attempt to access per-batch shared state just as it
was being freed. There was code intended to prevent that by checking
for a cleared pointer, but it was racy. Fix, by introducing an extra
barrier phase. The new phase PHJ_BUILD_RUNNING means that it's safe to
access the per-batch state to find a batch to help with, and
PHJ_BUILD_DONE means that it is too late. The last to detach will free
the array of per-batch state as before, but now it will also atomically
advance the phase, so that late attachers can avoid the hazard. This
mirrors the way per-batch hash tables are freed (see phases
PHJ_BATCH_PROBING and PHJ_BATCH_DONE).
An earlier attempt to fix this (commit 3b8981b6, later reverted) missed
one special case. When the inner side is empty (the "empty inner
optimization), the build barrier would only make it to
PHJ_BUILD_HASHING_INNER phase before workers attempted to detach from
the hashtable. In that case, fast-forward the build barrier to
PHJ_BUILD_RUNNING before proceeding, so that our later assertions hold
and we can still negotiate who is cleaning up.
Revealed by build farm failures, where BarrierAttach() failed a sanity
check assertion, because the memory had been clobbered by dsa_free().
In non-assert builds, the result could be a segmentation fault.
Back-patch to all supported releases.
Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reported-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reported-by: David Geier <geidav.pg@gmail.com>
Tested-by: David Geier <geidav.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200929061142.GA29096%40paquier.xyz
When determining whether an index update may be skipped by using HOT, we
can ignore attributes indexed by block summarizing indexes without
references to individual tuples that need to be cleaned up.
A new type TU_UpdateIndexes provides a signal to the executor to
determine which indexes to update - no indexes, all indexes, or only the
summarizing indexes.
This also removes rd_indexattr list, and replaces it with rd_attrsvalid
flag. The list was not used anywhere, and a simple flag is sufficient.
This was originally committed as 5753d4ee32, but then got reverted by
e3fcca0d0d because of correctness issues.
Original patch by Josef Simanek, various fixes and improvements by Tomas
Vondra and me.
Authors: Matthias van de Meent, Josef Simanek, Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/05ebcb44-f383-86e3-4f31-0a97a55634cf@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFp7QwpMRGcDAQumN7onN9HjrJ3u4X3ZRXdGFT0K5G2JWvnbWg%40mail.gmail.com
Add versions of timestamptz + interval, timestamptz - interval, and
generate_series(timestamptz, ...) in which a timezone can be specified
explicitly instead of defaulting to the TimeZone GUC setting.
The new functions for the first two are named date_add and
date_subtract. This might seem too generic, but we could use
overloading to add additional variants if that seems useful.
Along the way, improve the docs' pretty inadequate explanation
of how timestamptz +- interval works.
Przemysław Sztoch and Gurjeet Singh; cosmetic changes and most of
the docs work by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/01a84551-48dd-1359-bf7e-f6b0203a6bd0@sztoch.pl
We already had five copies of essentially the same logic, and an
upcoming patch introduces yet another use-case. That's past my
threshold of pain, so introduce a common subroutine. There's not
that much net code savings, but the chance of typos should go down.
Inspired by a patch from Przemysław Sztoch, but different in detail.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/01a84551-48dd-1359-bf7e-f6b0203a6bd0@sztoch.pl
Check whether the datctype is C to determine whether t_isspace() and
related functions use isspace() or iswspace().
Previously, t_isspace() checked whether the database default collation
was C; which is incorrect when the default collation uses the ICU
provider.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/79e4354d9eccfdb00483146a6b9f6295202e7890.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Backpatch-through: 15
Currently, there are quite a few places in reorderbuffer.c that tries to
access top-transaction for a subtransaction. This makes the code to access
top-transaction consistent and easier to follow.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Sawada Masahiko
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PuCznOyTqBQwjRUu-ibG-=KHyCv-0FTcWQtZUdR88umfg@mail.gmail.com
Support for SCM credential authentication has been removed in the
backend in 9.1, and libpq has kept some code to handle it for
compatibility.
Commit be4585b, that did the cleanup of the backend code, has done
so because the code was not really portable originally. And, as there
are likely little chances that this is used these days, this removes the
remaining code from libpq. An error will now be raised by libpq if
attempting to connect to a server that returns AUTH_REQ_SCM_CREDS,
instead.
References to SCM credential authentication are removed from the
protocol documentation. This removes some meson and configure checks.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZBLH8a4otfqgd6Kn@paquier.xyz
This structure included only PgStat_FunctionCounts, and removing it
facilitates some upcoming refactoring for pgstatfuncs.c to use more
macros rather that mostly-duplicated functions.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/11d531fe-52fc-c6ea-7e8e-62f1b6ec626e@gmail.com
This adds the ability to pretty-print XML documents ... according to
libxml's somewhat idiosyncratic notions of what's pretty, anyway.
One notable divergence from a strict reading of the spec is that
libxml is willing to collapse empty nodes "<node></node>" to just
"<node/>", whereas SQL and the underlying XML spec say that this
option should only result in whitespace tweaks. Nonetheless,
it seems close enough to justify using the SQL-standard syntax.
Jim Jones, reviewed by Peter Smith and myself
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2f5df461-dad8-6d7d-4568-08e10608a69b@uni-muenster.de
The hook can be installed by a shared_preload library.
A similar mechanism could be used for radius paswords, for example, and
the type name auth_password_hook_typ has been shosen with that in mind.
John Naylor and Andrew Dunstan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/469b06ed-69de-ba59-c13a-91d2372e52a9@dunslane.net
Using REPLICA IDENTITY FULL on the publisher can lead to a full table scan
per tuple change on the subscription when REPLICA IDENTITY or PK index is
not available. This makes REPLICA IDENTITY FULL impractical to use apart
from some small number of use cases.
This patch allows using indexes other than PRIMARY KEY or REPLICA
IDENTITY on the subscriber during apply of update/delete. The index that
can be used must be a btree index, not a partial index, and it must have
at least one column reference (i.e. cannot consist of only expressions).
We can uplift these restrictions in the future. There is no smart
mechanism to pick the index. If there is more than one index that
satisfies these requirements, we just pick the first one. We discussed
using some of the optimizer's low-level APIs for this but ruled it out
as that can be a maintenance burden in the long run.
This patch improves the performance in the vast majority of cases and the
improvement is proportional to the amount of data in the table. However,
there could be some regression in a small number of cases where the indexes
have a lot of duplicate and dead rows. It was discussed that those are
mostly impractical cases but we can provide a table or subscription level
option to disable this feature if required.
Author: Onder Kalaci, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Shi yu, Hou Zhijie, Vignesh C, Kuroda Hayato, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACawEhVLqmAAyPXdHEPv1ssU2c=dqOniiGz7G73HfyS7+nGV4w@mail.gmail.com
Expose the standard error functions as SQL-callable functions. These
are expected to be useful to people working with normal distributions,
and we use them here to test the distribution from random_normal().
Since these functions are defined in the POSIX and C99 standards, they
should in theory be available on all supported platforms. If that
turns out not to be the case, more work will be needed.
On all platforms tested so far, using extra_float_digits = -1 in the
regression tests is sufficient to allow for variations between
implementations. However, past experience has shown that there are
almost certainly going to be additional unexpected portability issues,
so these tests may well need further adjustments, based on the
buildfarm results.
Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Nathan Bossart and Thomas Munro.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCXv5fi7+Vu-POiyai+ucF95+YMcCMafxV+eZuN1B-=MkQ@mail.gmail.com
The new connection parameter require_auth allows a libpq client to
define a list of comma-separated acceptable authentication types for use
with the server. There is no negotiation: if the server does not
present one of the allowed authentication requests, the connection
attempt done by the client fails.
The following keywords can be defined in the list:
- password, for AUTH_REQ_PASSWORD.
- md5, for AUTH_REQ_MD5.
- gss, for AUTH_REQ_GSS[_CONT].
- sspi, for AUTH_REQ_SSPI and AUTH_REQ_GSS_CONT.
- scram-sha-256, for AUTH_REQ_SASL[_CONT|_FIN].
- creds, for AUTH_REQ_SCM_CREDS (perhaps this should be removed entirely
now).
- none, to control unauthenticated connections.
All the methods that can be defined in the list can be negated, like
"!password", in which case the server must NOT use the listed
authentication type. The special method "none" allows/disallows the use
of unauthenticated connections (but it does not govern transport-level
authentication via TLS or GSSAPI).
Internally, the patch logic is tied to check_expected_areq(), that was
used for channel_binding, ensuring that an incoming request is
compatible with conn->require_auth. It also introduces a new flag,
conn->client_finished_auth, which is set by various authentication
routines when the client side of the handshake is finished. This
signals to check_expected_areq() that an AUTH_REQ_OK from the server is
expected, and allows the client to complain if the server bypasses
authentication entirely, with for example the reception of a too-early
AUTH_REQ_OK message.
Regression tests are added in authentication TAP tests for all the
keywords supported (except "creds", because it is around only for
compatibility reasons). A new TAP script has been added for SSPI, as
there was no script dedicated to it yet. It relies on SSPI being the
default authentication method on Windows, as set by pg_regress.
Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, David G. Johnston, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9e5a8ccddb8355ea9fa4b75a1e3a9edc88a70cd3.camel@vmware.com
This allows for a string which if an input field matches causes the
column's default value to be inserted. The advantage of this is that
the default can be inserted in some rows and not others, for which
non-default data is available.
The file_fdw extension is also modified to take allow use of this
option.
Israel Barth Rubio
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO_rXXAcqesk6DsvioOZ5zmeEmpUN5ktZf-9=9yu+DTr0Xr8Uw@mail.gmail.com
If MERGE attempts an UPDATE or DELETE on a table with BEFORE ROW
triggers, or a cross-partition UPDATE (with or without triggers), and
a concurrent UPDATE or DELETE happens, the merge code would fail.
In some cases this would lead to a crash, while in others it would
cause the wrong merge action to be executed, or no action at all. The
immediate cause of the crash was the trigger code calling
ExecGetUpdateNewTuple() as part of the EPQ mechanism, which fails
because during a merge ri_projectNew is NULL, since merge has its own
per-action projection information, which ExecGetUpdateNewTuple() knows
nothing about.
Fix by arranging for the trigger code to exit early, returning the
TM_Result and TM_FailureData information, if a concurrent modification
is detected, allowing the merge code to do the necessary EPQ handling
in its own way. Similarly, prevent the cross-partition update code
from doing any EPQ processing for a merge, allowing the merge code to
work out what it needs to do.
This leads to a number of simplifications in nodeModifyTable.c. Most
notably, the ModifyTableContext->GetUpdateNewTuple() callback is no
longer needed, and mergeGetUpdateNewTuple() can be deleted, since
there is no longer any requirement for get-update-new-tuple during a
merge. Similarly, ModifyTableContext->cpUpdateRetrySlot is no longer
needed. Thus ExecGetUpdateNewTuple() and the retry_slot handling of
ExecCrossPartitionUpdate() can be restored to how they were in v14,
before the merge code was added, and ExecMergeMatched() no longer
needs any special-case handling for cross-partition updates.
While at it, tidy up ExecUpdateEpilogue() a bit, making it handle
recheckIndexes locally, rather than passing it in as a parameter,
ensuring that it is freed properly. This dates back to when it was
split off from ExecUpdate() to support merge.
Per bug #17809 from Alexander Lakhin, and follow-up investigation of
bug #17792, also from Alexander Lakhin.
Back-patch to v15, where MERGE was introduced, taking care to preserve
backwards-compatibility of the trigger API in v15 for any extensions
that might use it.
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/17809-9e6650bef133f0fe%40postgresql.orghttps://postgr.es/m/17792-0f89452029662c36%40postgresql.org
The recently added standard collation UNICODE (0d21d4b9bc) doesn't
give consistent results on some build farm members with old ICU
versions. Apparently, the ICU locale specification 'und' (language
tag style) misbehaves on some older ICU versions. Replacing it with
'' (ICU locale ID style) fixes it at least on some OS versions. Let's
see what the build farm says.
This exposes the ICU facility to add custom collation rules to a
standard collation.
New options are added to CREATE COLLATION, CREATE DATABASE, createdb,
and initdb to set the rules.
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/821c71a4-6ef0-d366-9acf-bb8e367f739f@enterprisedb.com
There was apparently an attempt here to list all the object types that
ACL_USAGE applies to, but it wasn't complete. So instead of trying to
keep up, put in a more timeless comment.
Previously, all the nodes of CallStmt were included in the jumbling,
causing a duplicate in the computation as the transformed state of the
CALL query was included as well as the parsed state (transformed
FuncCall with all the input arguments and potential output arguments).
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y+MRdEq9W9XVa2AB@paquier.xyz
IntoClause.viewQuery is a copy of the parsed-but-not-rewritten SELECT
clause copied to IntoClause when transforming CreateTableAsStmt for a
materialized view. Including a second copy of the SELECT Query into the
query jumbling was leading to an incorrect numbering of the Const node
locations, as these would be counted twice instead of once.
This becomes visible once the query normalization is applied to CREATE
MATERIALIZED VIEW in pg_stat_statements in the shape of a query string
using only odd numbers for the normalized constants, (regression tests
added in pg_stat_statements as of de2aca2 would show the difference).
Including the original Query from CreateTableAsStmt is enough for the
query jumbling.
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y+MRdEq9W9XVa2AB@paquier.xyz
This routine is able to retrieve the OID of the schema used with an
extension (pg_extension.extnamespace), or InvalidOid if this information
is not available. plpgsql_check embeds a copy of this code when
performing checks on functions, as one out-of-core example.
Author: Pavel Stehule
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRD+9x55hjDoi285jCcjPc8uuY_D+FLn5RpXggdz+4O2sQ@mail.gmail.com
If UPDATE is forced to retry after an EvalPlanQual check, it neglected
to repeat GENERATED-column computations, even though those might well
have changed since we're dealing with a different tuple than before.
Fixing this is mostly a matter of looping back a bit further when
we retry. In v15 and HEAD that's most easily done by altering the API
of ExecUpdateAct so that it includes computing GENERATED expressions.
Also, if an UPDATE in a partitioned table turns into a cross-partition
INSERT operation, we failed to recompute GENERATED columns. That's a
bug since 8bf6ec3ba allowed partitions to have different generation
expressions; although it seems to have no ill effects before that.
Fixing this is messier because we can now have situations where the same
query needs both the UPDATE-aligned set of GENERATED columns and the
INSERT-aligned set, and it's unclear which set will be generated first
(else we could hack things by forcing the INSERT-aligned set to be
generated, which is indeed how fe9e658f4 made it work for MERGE).
The best fix seems to be to build and store separate sets of expressions
for the INSERT and UPDATE cases. That would create ABI issues in the
back branches, but so far it seems we can leave this alone in the back
branches.
Per bug #17823 from Hisahiro Kauchi. The first part of this affects all
branches back to v12 where GENERATED columns were added.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17823-b64909cf7d63de84@postgresql.org
While testing a fix for bug #17823, I discovered that EvalPlanQualStart
failed to copy es_rteperminfos from the parent EState, resulting in
failure if anything in EPQ execution wanted to consult that information.
This led me to conclude that commit a61b1f748 had been too haphazard
about where to fill es_rteperminfos, and that we need to be sure that
that happens exactly where es_range_table gets filled. So I changed the
signature of ExecInitRangeTable to help ensure that this new requirement
doesn't get missed. (Indeed, pgoutput.c was also failing to fill it.
Maybe we don't ever need it there, but I wouldn't bet on that.)
No test case yet; one will arrive with the fix for #17823.
But that needs to be back-patched, while this fix is HEAD-only.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17823-b64909cf7d63de84@postgresql.org
Disabling this option is useful to run VACUUM (with or without FULL) on
only the toast table of a relation, bypassing the main relation. This
option is enabled by default.
Running directly VACUUM on a toast table was already possible without
this feature, by using the non-deterministic name of a toast relation
(as of pg_toast.pg_toast_N, where N would be the OID of the parent
relation) in the VACUUM command, and it required a scan of pg_class to
know the name of the toast table. So this feature is basically a
shortcut to be able to run VACUUM or VACUUM FULL on a toast relation,
using only the name of the parent relation.
A new switch called --no-process-main is added to vacuumdb, to work as
an equivalent of PROCESS_MAIN.
Regression tests are added to cover VACUUM and VACUUM FULL, looking at
pg_stat_all_tables.vacuum_count to see how many vacuums have run on
each table, main or toast.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221230000028.GA435655@nathanxps13
The following changes are made to pg_write_zeros(), the API able to
write series of zeros using vectored I/O:
- Add of an "offset" parameter, to write the size from this position
(the 'p' of "pwrite" seems to mean position, though POSIX does not
outline ythat directly), hence the name of the routine is incorrect if
it is not able to handle offsets.
- Avoid memset() of "zbuffer" on every call.
- Avoid initialization of the whole IOV array if not needed.
- Group the trailing write() call with the main write() call,
simplifying the function logic.
Author: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230215005525.mrrlmqrxzjzhaipl@awork3.anarazel.de
Beginning in v15, if you apply ALTER TABLE ENABLE/DISABLE TRIGGER to
a partitioned table, it also affects the partitions' cloned versions
of the affected trigger(s). The initial implementation of this
located the clones by name, but that fails on foreign-key triggers
which have names incorporating their own OIDs. We can fix that, and
also make the behavior more bulletproof in the face of user-initiated
trigger renames, by identifying the cloned triggers by tgparentid.
Following the lead of earlier commits in this area, I took care not
to break ABI in the v15 branch, even though I rather doubt there
are any external callers of EnableDisableTrigger.
While here, update the documentation, which was not touched when
the semantics were changed.
Per bug #17817 from Alan Hodgson. Back-patch to v15; older versions
do not have this behavior.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17817-31dfb7c2100d9f3d@postgresql.org
The comments claim that certain pieces of data are part of the main
WAL record data when in reality they are part of the data for
block 0. Repair.
Bertrand Drouvot, reviewed by Amit Kapila. Originally reported by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/80db7836-4415-d54a-64c3-66b88b1430e7@gmail.com
Open long-lived data and WAL file descriptors with O_CLOEXEC. This flag
was introduced by SUSv4 (POSIX.1-2008), and by now all of our target
Unix systems have it. Our open() implementation for Windows already had
that behavior, so provide a dummy O_CLOEXEC flag on that platform.
For now, callers of open() and the "thin" wrappers in fd.c that deal in
raw descriptors need to pass in O_CLOEXEC explicitly if desired. This
commit does that for WAL files, and automatically for everything
accessed via VFDs including SMgrRelation and BufFile. (With more
discussion we might decide to turn it on automatically for the thin
open()-wrappers too to avoid risk of missing places that need it, but
these are typically used for short-lived descriptors where we don't
expect to fork/exec, and it's remotely possible that extensions could be
using these APIs and passing descriptors to subprograms deliberately, so
that hasn't been done here.)
Do the same for sockets and the postmaster pipe with FD_CLOEXEC. (Later
commits might use modern interfaces to remove these extra fcntl() calls
and more where possible, but we'll need them as a fallback for a couple
of systems, so do it that way in this initial commit.)
With this change, subprograms executed for archiving, copying etc will
no longer have access to the server's descriptors, other than the ones
that we decide to pass down.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKb6FsAdQWcRL35KJsftv%2B9zXqQbzwkfRf1i0J2e57%2BhQ%40mail.gmail.com
When I designed the Bitmapset module, I set things up so that an empty
Bitmapset could be represented either by a NULL pointer, or by an
allocated object all of whose bits are zero. I've recently come to
the conclusion that that was a bad idea and we should instead have a
convention like the longstanding invariant for Lists, whereby an empty
list is represented by NIL and nothing else.
To do this, we need to fix bms_intersect, bms_difference, and a couple
of other functions to check for having produced an empty result; but
then we can replace bms_is_empty(a) by a simple "a == NULL" test.
This is very likely a (marginal) win performance-wise, because we
call bms_is_empty many more times than those other functions put
together. However, the real reason to do it is that we have various
places that have hand-implemented a rule about "this Bitmapset
variable must be exactly NULL if empty", so that they can use
checks-for-null in place of bms_is_empty calls in particularly hot
code paths. That is a really fragile, mistake-prone way to do things,
and I'm surprised that we've seldom been bitten by it. It's not well
documented at all which variables have this property, so you can't
readily tell which code might be violating those conventions. By
making the convention universal, we can eliminate a subtle source of
bugs.
Patch by me; thanks to Nathan Bossart and Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1159933.1677621588@sss.pgh.pa.us
nodeAppend.c used non-nullness of appendstate->as_valid_subplans as
a state flag to indicate whether it'd done ExecFindMatchingSubPlans
(or some sufficient approximation to that). This was pretty
questionable even in the beginning, since it wouldn't really work
right if there are no valid subplans. It got more questionable
after commit 27e1f1456 added logic that could reduce as_valid_subplans
to an empty set: at that point we were depending on unspecified
behavior of bms_del_members, namely that it'd not return an empty
set as NULL. It's about to start doing that, which breaks this
logic entirely. Hence, add a separate boolean flag to signal
whether as_valid_subplans has been computed.
Also fix a previously-cosmetic bug in nodeAgg.c, wherein it ignored
the return value of bms_del_member instead of updating its pointer.
Patch by me; thanks to Nathan Bossart and Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1159933.1677621588@sss.pgh.pa.us
This function has been semi-deprecated ever since we invented
bms_next_member(). Its habit of scribbling on the input bitmapset
isn't great, plus for sufficiently large bitmapsets it would take
O(N^2) time to complete a loop. Now we have the additional problem
that reducing the input to empty while leaving it still accessible
would violate a planned invariant. So let's just get rid of it,
after updating the few extant callers to use bms_next_member().
Patch by me; thanks to Nathan Bossart and Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1159933.1677621588@sss.pgh.pa.us
Commit 0a20ff54f split out the GUC variables from guc.c into a new file
guc_tables.c. This updates comments referencing guc.c regarding variables
which are now in guc_tables.c.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6B50C70C-8C1F-4F9A-A7C0-EEAFCC032406@yesql.se
pg_input_error_info() is now a SQL function able to return a row with
more than just the error message generated for incorrect data type
inputs when these are able to handle soft failures, returning more
contents of ErrorData, as of:
- The error message (same as before).
- The error detail, if set.
- The error hint, if set.
- SQL error code.
All the regression tests that relied on pg_input_error_message() are
updated to reflect the effects of the rename.
Per discussion with Tom Lane and Andrew Dunstan.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/139a68e1-bd1f-a9a7-b5fe-0be9845c6311@dunslane.net
Some clang versions whine about comparing an enum variable to
a value outside the range of the enum, on the grounds that the
result must be constant. In the cases we fix here, the loops
will terminate only if the enum variable can in fact hold a
value one beyond its declared range. While that's very likely
to always be true for these enum types, it still seems like a
poor coding practice to assume it; so use "int" loop variables
instead to silence the warnings. (This matches what we've done
in other places, for example loops over the range of ForkNumber.)
While at it, let's drop the XXX_FIRST macros for these enums and just
write zeroes for the loop start values. The apparent flexibility
seems rather illusory given that iterating up to one-less-than-
the-number-of-values is only correct for a zero-based range.
Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20520.1677435600@sss.pgh.pa.us
This will create two bytes of padding space in xl_hash_vacuum_one_page which
can be used for future patches. This makes the datatype of
xl_hash_vacuum_one_page.ntuples same as gistxlogDelete.ntodelete which is
advisable as both are used for the same purpose.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b0e20c40-cb7a-fc1c-c607-2a78dac5021e@gmail.com
We already tried to fix this in commits 3f7323cbb et al (and follow-on
fixes), but now it emerges that there are still unfixed cases;
moreover, these cases affect all branches not only pre-v14. I thought
we had eliminated all cases of making multiple clones of an UPDATE's
target list when we nuked inheritance_planner. But it turns out we
still do that in some partitioned-UPDATE cases, notably including
INSERT ... ON CONFLICT UPDATE, because ExecInitPartitionInfo thinks
it's okay to clone and modify the parent's targetlist.
This fix is based on a suggestion from Andres Freund: let's stop
abusing the ParamExecData.execPlan mechanism, which was only ever
meant to handle initplans, and instead solve the execution timing
problem by having the expression compiler move MULTIEXPR_SUBLINK steps
to the front of their expression step lists. This is feasible because
(a) all branches still in support compile the entire targetlist of
an UPDATE into a single ExprState, and (b) we know that all
MULTIEXPR_SUBLINKs do need to be evaluated --- none could be buried
inside a CASE, for example. There is a minor semantics change
concerning the order of execution of the MULTIEXPR's subquery versus
other parts of the parent targetlist, but that seems like something
we can get away with. By doing that, we no longer need to worry
about whether different clones of a MULTIEXPR_SUBLINK share output
Params; their usage of that data structure won't overlap.
Per bug #17800 from Alexander Lakhin. Back-patch to all supported
branches. In v13 and earlier, we can revert 3f7323cbb and follow-on
fixes; however, I chose to keep the SubPlan.subLinkId field added
in ccbb54c72. We don't need that anymore in the core code, but it's
cheap enough to fill, and removing a plan node field in a minor
release seems like it'd be asking for trouble.
Andres Freund and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17800-ff90866b3906c964@postgresql.org
Offers a generally better separation of responsibilities for collation
code. Also, a step towards multi-lib ICU, which should be based on a
clean separation of the routines required for collation providers.
Callers with NUL-terminated strings should call pg_strcoll() or
pg_strxfrm(); callers with strings and their length should call the
variants pg_strncoll() or pg_strnxfrm().
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a581136455c940d7bd0ff482d3a2bd51af25a94f.camel%40j-davis.com
Switch pg_dump to use the Compression API, implemented by bf9aa490db.
The CompressFileHandle replaces the cfp* family of functions with a
struct of callbacks for accessing (compressed) files. This allows adding
new compression methods simply by introducing a new struct instance with
appropriate implementation of the callbacks.
Archives compressed using custom compression methods store an identifier
of the compression algorithm in their header instead of the compression
level. The header version is bumped.
Author: Georgios Kokolatos
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Rachel Heaton, Justin Pryzby, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/faUNEOpts9vunEaLnmxmG-DldLSg_ql137OC3JYDmgrOMHm1RvvWY2IdBkv_CRxm5spCCb_OmKNk2T03TMm0fBEWveFF9wA1WizPuAgB7Ss%3D%40protonmail.com
It's possible, in admittedly-rather-contrived cases, for an eclass
to generate a derived "join" qual that constrains the post-outer-join
value(s) of some RHS variable(s) without mentioning the LHS at all.
While the mechanisms were set up to work for this, we fell foul of
the "get_common_eclass_indexes" filter installed by commit 3373c7155:
it could decide that such an eclass wasn't relevant to the join, so
that the required qual clause wouldn't get emitted there or anywhere
else.
To fix, apply get_common_eclass_indexes only at inner joins, where
its rule is still valid. At an outer join, fall back to examining all
eclasses that mention either input (or the OJ relid, though it should
be impossible for an eclass to mention that without mentioning either
input). Perhaps we can improve on that later, but the cost/benefit of
adding more complexity to skip some irrelevant eclasses is dubious.
To allow cheaply distinguishing outer from inner joins, pass the
ojrelid to generate_join_implied_equalities as a separate argument.
This also allows cleaning up some sloppiness that had crept into
the definition of its join_relids argument, and it allows accurate
calculation of nominal_join_relids for a child outer join. (The
latter oversight seems not to have been a live bug, but it certainly
could have caused problems in future.)
Also fix what might be a live bug in check_index_predicates: it was
being sloppy about what it passed to generate_join_implied_equalities.
Per report from Richard Guo.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs4-DsTBfOvXuw64GdFss2=M5cwtEhY=0DCS7t2gT7P6hSA@mail.gmail.com
This was previously only documented in a comment. Given the size of the
struct, it's not hard to miss that comment. As evidenced by the commits
leading up to fe3caa1439, 67b26703b4.
It's possible, but not likely, that we might have to weaken these assertions
on a less commonly used architecture.
Author: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/295606.1677101684@sss.pgh.pa.us
SQL:2023 defines an ANY_VALUE aggregate whose purpose is to emit an
implementation-dependent (i.e. non-deterministic) value from the
aggregated rows.
Author: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5cff866c-10a8-d2df-32cb-e9072e6b04a2@postgresfriends.org
To allow testing for general support for fast bitscan intrinsics,
add symbols HAVE_BITSCAN_REVERSE and HAVE_BITSCAN_FORWARD.
Also do related cleanup in AllocSetFreeIndex(): Previously, we
tested for HAVE__BUILTIN_CLZ and copied the relevant internals of
pg_leftmost_one_pos32(), with a special fallback that does less
work than the general fallback for that function. Now that we have
a more general test, we just call pg_leftmost_one_pos32() directly
for platforms with intrinsic support. On gcc at least, there is no
difference in the binary for non-assert builds.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAFBsxsEPc%2BFnX_0vmmQ5DHv60sk4rL_RZJ%2BMD6ei%3D76L0kFMvA%40mail.gmail.com
The setting of the process title could be seen on profiles of very
fast-to-execute queries. In many locations where we call
set_ps_display() we pass along a string constant, the length of which is
known during compilation. Here we effectively rename set_ps_display() to
set_ps_display_with_len() and then add a static inline function named
set_ps_display() which calls strlen() on the given string. This allows
the compiler to optimize away the strlen() call when dealing with
call sites passing a string constant. We can then also use memcpy()
instead of strlcpy() to copy the string into the destination buffer.
That's significantly faster than strlcpy's byte-at-a-time way of
copying.
Here we also take measures to improve some code which was adjusting the
process title to add a " waiting" suffix to it. Call sites which require
this can now just call set_ps_display_suffix() to add or adjust the suffix
and call set_ps_display_remove_suffix() to remove it again.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvocBvvk-0gWNA2Gohe+sv9fMcv+fK_G+siBKJrgDG4O7g@mail.gmail.com
A new callback named startup_cb, called shortly after a module is
loaded, is added. This makes possible the initialization of any
additional state data required by a module. This initial state data can
be saved in a ArchiveModuleState, that is now passed down to all the
callbacks that can be defined in a module. With this design, it is
possible to have a per-module state, aimed at opening the door to the
support of more than one archive module.
The initialization of the callbacks is changed so as
_PG_archive_module_init() does not anymore give in input a
ArchiveModuleCallbacks that a module has to fill in with callback
definitions. Instead, a module now needs to return a const
ArchiveModuleCallbacks.
All the structure and callback definitions of archive modules are moved
into their own header, named archive_module.h, from pgarch.h.
Command-based archiving follows the same line, with a new set of files
named shell_archive.{c,h}.
There are a few more items that are under discussion to improve the
design of archive modules, like the fact that basic_archive calls
sigsetjmp() by itself to define its own error handling flow. These will
be adjusted later, the changes done here cover already a good portion
of what has been discussed.
Any modules created for v15 will need to be adjusted to this new
design.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230130194810.6fztfgbn32e7qarj@awork3.anarazel.de
d9d7fe68d3 made use of an existing wait event when sending data from the
apply worker, but we should have invented a new wait event since this is a
new place to wait.
This patch corrects the mistake by using a new wait event
"LogicalApplySendData".
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobWzbr9H3yN3dLVckviEZKemPwd+XyCFKEgyZQZhgP66Q@mail.gmail.com
force_parallel_mode is meant to be used to allow us to exercise the
parallel query infrastructure to ensure that it's working as we expect.
It seems some users think this GUC is for forcing the query planner into
picking a parallel plan regardless of the costs. A quick look at the
documentation would have made them realize that they were wrong, but the
GUC is likely too conveniently named which, evidently, seems to often
result in users expecting that it forces the planner into usefully
parallelizing queries.
Here we rename the GUC to something which casual users are less likely to
mistakenly think is what they need to make their query run more quickly.
For now, the old name can still be used. We'll revisit if the old name
mapping can be removed once the buildfarm configs are all updated.
Reviewed-by: John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrsOi92_uA7PEaHZMH-S4Xv+MGhQWA+GrP8b1kjpS1HjQ@mail.gmail.com
OpenSSL 1.1.1 and newer versions have added support for RSA-PSS
certificates, which requires the use of a specific routine in OpenSSL to
determine which hash function to use when compiling it when using
channel binding in SCRAM-SHA-256. X509_get_signature_nid(), that is the
original routine the channel binding code has relied on, is not able to
determine which hash algorithm to use for such certificates. However,
X509_get_signature_info(), new to OpenSSL 1.1.1, is able to do it. This
commit switches the channel binding logic to rely on
X509_get_signature_info() over X509_get_signature_nid(), which would be
the choice when building with 1.1.1 or newer.
The error could have been triggered on the client or the server, hence
libpq and the backend need to have their related code paths patched.
Note that attempting to load an RSA-PSS certificate with OpenSSL 1.1.0
or older leads to a failure due to an unsupported algorithm.
The discovery of relying on X509_get_signature_info() comes from Jacob,
the tests have been written by Heikki (with few tweaks from me), while I
have bundled the whole together while adding the bits needed for MSVC
and meson.
This issue exists since channel binding exists, so backpatch all the way
down. Some tests are added in 15~, triggered if compiling with OpenSSL
1.1.1 or newer, where the certificate and key files can easily be
generated for RSA-PSS.
Reported-by: Gunnar "Nick" Bluth
Author: Jacob Champion, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17760-b6c61e752ec07060@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 11
In commit b78f6264e I opined that it was "too risky" to delete a
relation's RelOptInfo from the planner's data structures when we have
realized that we don't need to join to it; so instead we just marked
it as a dead relation. In hindsight that judgment seems flawed: any
subsequent access to such a dead relation is arguably a bug in
itself, so leaving the RelOptInfo present just helps to mask bugs.
Let's delete it instead, allowing removal of the whole notion of a
"dead relation". So far as the regression tests can find, this
requires no other code changes, except for one Assert in equivclass.c
that was very dubiously not complaining about access to a dead rel.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/229905.1676062220@sss.pgh.pa.us
This commit removes most of the Plan and Path nodes, which should never
be included in the query jumbling because we ignore these in Query
nodes. This is facilitated by making no_query_jumble an inherited
attribute, like no_copy, no_equal and no_read when the supertype of a
node is found as marked with that.
RawStmt is not used in parsed queries, so it can be removed from the
query jumbling. A couple of nodes defined in pathnodes.h, plannodes.h
and primnodes.h with NodeTag as supertype need to be marked
individually.
Forcing the execution of the query jumbling code with compute_query_id =
auto while pg_stat_statements is loaded brings the code coverage of
queryjumblefuncs.funcs.c to 95.6%.
The core code does not yet include a way to enforce the execution in
query jumbling except in pg_stat_statements, so the numbers I am
mentioning above will not reflect on the default coverage report with
just what is done in this commit.
Reported-by: Tom Lane
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3344827.1675809127@sss.pgh.pa.us
Builds on 28e626bde0 and f30d62c2fc. See the former for motivation.
Rows of the view show IO operations for a particular backend type, IO target
object, IO context combination (e.g. a client backend's operations on
permanent relations in shared buffers) and each column in the view is the
total number of IO Operations done (e.g. writes). So a cell in the view would
be, for example, the number of blocks of relation data written from shared
buffers by client backends since the last stats reset.
In anticipation of tracking WAL IO and non-block-oriented IO (such as
temporary file IO), the "op_bytes" column specifies the unit of the "reads",
"writes", and "extends" columns for a given row.
Rows for combinations of IO operation, backend type, target object and context
that never occur, are ommitted entirely. For example, checkpointer will never
operate on temporary relations.
Similarly, if an IO operation never occurs for such a combination, the IO
operation's cell will be null, to distinguish from 0 observed IO
operations. For example, bgwriter should not perform reads.
Note that some of the cells in the view are redundant with fields in
pg_stat_bgwriter (e.g. buffers_backend). For now, these have been kept for
backwards compatibility.
Bumps catversion.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Author: Samay Sharma <smilingsamay@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Maciek Sakrejda <m.sakrejda@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Lukas Fittl <lukas@fittl.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
Commit 28e626bde0 introduced the infrastructure for tracking more detailed IO
statistics. This commit adds the actual collection of the new IO statistics
for relations and temporary relations. See aforementioned commit for goals and
high-level design.
The changes in this commit are fairly straight-forward. The bulk of the change
is to passing sufficient information to the callsites of pgstat_count_io_op().
A somewhat unsightly detail is that it currently is hard to find a better
place to count fsyncs than in md.c, whereas the other pgstat_count_io_op()
calls are in bufmgr.c/localbuf.c. As the number of fsyncs is tied to md.c
implementation details, it's not obvious there is a better answer.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
This commit adds the infrastructure for more detailed IO statistics. The calls
to actually count IOs, a system view to access the new statistics,
documentation and tests will be added in subsequent commits, to make review
easier.
While we already had some IO statistics, e.g. in pg_stat_bgwriter and
pg_stat_database, they did not provide sufficient detail to understand what
the main sources of IO are, or whether configuration changes could avoid
IO. E.g., pg_stat_bgwriter.buffers_backend does contain the number of buffers
written out by a backend, but as that includes extending relations (always
done by backends) and writes triggered by the use of buffer access strategies,
it cannot easily be used to tune background writer or checkpointer. Similarly,
pg_stat_database.blks_read cannot easily be used to tune shared_buffers /
compute a cache hit ratio, as the use of buffer access strategies will often
prevent a large fraction of the read blocks to end up in shared_buffers.
The new IO statistics count IO operations (evict, extend, fsync, read, reuse,
and write), and are aggregated for each combination of backend type (backend,
autovacuum worker, bgwriter, etc), target object of the IO (relations, temp
relations) and context of the IO (normal, vacuum, bulkread, bulkwrite).
What is tracked in this series of patches, is sufficient to perform the
aforementioned analyses. Further details, e.g. tracking the number of buffer
hits, would make that even easier, but was left out for now, to keep the scope
of the already large patchset manageable.
Bumps PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID.
Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200124195226.lth52iydq2n2uilq@alap3.anarazel.de
The DDLs like Refresh Materialized views that generate lots of temporary
data due to rewrite rules may not be processed by output plugins (for
example pgoutput). So, we won't send keep-alive messages for a long time
while processing such commands and that can lead the subscriber side to
timeout. We have previously fixed a similar case for large transactions in
commit f95d53eded where the output plugin filters all or most of the
changes but missed to handle the DDLs.
We decided not to backpatch this as this adds a new callback in the
existing exposed structure and moreover, users can increase the
wal_sender_timeout and wal_receiver_timeout to avoid this problem.
Author: Wang wei, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Ashutosh Bapat, Shi yu, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS3PR01MB6275478E5D29E4A563302D3D9E2B9@OS3PR01MB6275.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA5-nLARN7-3SLU_QUxfy510pmrYK6JJb=bk3hcgemAM_pAv+w@mail.gmail.com
Like the implementation for node copy, write and read, this node
requires a custom implementation so as the query jumbling is able to
consider the correct value assigned to it, depending on its type (int,
float, bool, string, bitstring).
Based on a dump of pg_stat_statements from the regression database, this
would confuse the query jumbling of the following queries:
- SET.
- COPY TO with SELECT queries.
- START TRANSACTION with different isolation levels.
- ALTER TABLE with default expressions.
- CREATE TABLE with partition bounds.
Note that there may be a long-term argument in tracking the location of
such nodes so as query strings holding such nodes could be normalized,
but this is left as a separate discussion.
Oversight in 3db72eb.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y9+HuYslMAP6yyPb@paquier.xyz
In standby mode, we don't actually report progress of recovery,
but up until now, startup_progress_timeout_handler() nevertheless
got called every log_startup_progress_interval seconds. That's
an unnecessary expense, so avoid it.
Report by Thomas Munro. Patch by Bharath Rupireddy, reviewed by
Simon Riggs, Thomas Munro, and me. Back-patch to v15, where
the problem was introduced.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CA%2BhUKGKCHSffAj8zZJKJvNX7ygnQFxVD6wm1d-2j3fVw%2BMafPQ%40mail.gmail.com
This reverts commits 24c35ec and 57169ad. PreRestoreCommand() and
PostRestoreCommand() need to be put closer to the system() call calling
a restore_command, as they enable in_restore_command for the startup
process which would in turn trigger an immediate proc_exit() in the
SIGTERM handler. Perhaps we could get rid of this behavior entirely,
but 24c35ec has made the window where the flag is enabled much larger
than it was, and any Postgres-like actions (palloc, etc.) taken by code
paths while the flag is enabled could lead to more severe issues in the
shutdown processing.
Note that curculio has showed that there are much more problems in this
area, unrelated to this change, actually, hence the issues related to
that had better be addressed first. Keeping the code of HEAD in line
with the stable branches should make that a bit easier.
Per discussion with Andres Freund and Nathan Bossart.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y979NR3U5VnWrTwB@paquier.xyz
Backward and forward scans share much of the same page acquisition code.
Here we consolidate that code to reduce some duplication.
Additionally, add a new rs_coffset field to HeapScanDescData to track the
offset of the current tuple. The new field fits nicely into the padding
between a bool and BlockNumber field and saves having to look at the last
returned tuple to figure out which offset we should be looking at for the
current tuple.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bvkhka0CZQun28KTqhuUh5ZqY=_T8QEqZqOL02rpi2bw@mail.gmail.com
In the 90s we needed to deal with computers that still had the
pre-standard signal masking APIs. That hasn't been relevant for a very
long time on Unix systems, and c94ae9d8 got rid of a remaining
dependency in our Windows porting code. PG_SETMASK didn't expose
save/restore functionality, so we'd already started using sigprocmask()
directly in places, creating the visual distraction of having two ways
to spell it. It's not part of the API that extensions are expected to
be using (but if they are, the change will be trivial). It seems like a
good time to drop the old macro and just call the standard POSIX
function.
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BKfQgrhHP2DLTohX1WwubaCBHmTzGnAEDPZ-Gug-Xskg%40mail.gmail.com
Here remove some dead code from heapgettup() and heapgettup_pagemode()
which was trying to support NoMovementScanDirection scans. This code can
never be reached as standard_ExecutorRun() never calls ExecutePlan with
NoMovementScanDirection.
Additionally, plans which were scanning an unordered index would use
NoMovementScanDirection rather than ForwardScanDirection. There was no
real need for this, so here we adjust this so we use ForwardScanDirection
for unordered index scans. A comment in pathnodes.h claimed that
NoMovementScanDirection was used for PathKey reasons, but if that was
true, it no longer is, per code in build_index_paths().
This does change the non-text format of the EXPLAIN output so that
unordered index scans now have a "Forward" scan direction rather than
"NoMovement". The text format of EXPLAIN has not changed.
Author: Melanie Plageman
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_bvkhka0CZQun28KTqhuUh5ZqY=_T8QEqZqOL02rpi2bw@mail.gmail.com
This commit changes the query jumbling code in queryjumblefuncs.c to be
generated automatically based on the information of the nodes in the
headers of src/include/nodes/ by using gen_node_support.pl. This
approach offers many advantages:
- Support for query jumbling for all the utility statements, based on the
state of their parsed Nodes and not only their query string. This will
greatly ease the switch to normalize the information of some DDLs, like
SET or CALL for example (this is left unchanged and should be part of a
separate discussion). With this feature, the number of entries stored
for utilities in pg_stat_statements is reduced (for example now
"CHECKPOINT" and "checkpoint" mean the same thing with the same query
ID).
- Documentation of query jumbling directly in the structure definition
of the nodes. Since this code has been introduced in pg_stat_statements
and then moved to code, the reasons behind the choices of what should be
included in the jumble are rather sparse. Note that some explanation is
added for the most relevant parts, as a start.
- Overall code reduction and more consistency with the other parts
generating read, write and copy depending on the nodes.
The query jumbling is controlled by a couple of new node attributes,
documented in nodes/nodes.h:
- custom_query_jumble, to mark a Node as having a custom
implementation.
- no_query_jumble, to ignore entirely a Node.
- query_jumble_ignore, to ignore a field in a Node.
- query_jumble_location, to mark a location in a Node, for
normalization. This can apply only to int fields, with "location" in
their name (only Const as of this commit).
There should be no compatibility impact on pg_stat_statements, as the
new code applies the jumbling to the same fields for each node (its
regression tests have no modification, for one).
Some benchmark of the query jumbling between HEAD and this commit for
SELECT and DMLs has proved that this new code does not cause a
performance regression, with computation times close for both methods.
For utility queries, the new method is slower than the previous method
of calculating a hash of the query string, though we are talking about
extra ns-level changes based on what I measured, which is unnoticeable
even for OLTP workloads as a query ID is calculated once per query
post-parse analysis.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5BHOUhX3zTH/ig6@paquier.xyz
EquivalenceClasses are now understood as applying within a "join
domain", which is a set of inner-joined relations (possibly underneath
an outer join). We no longer need to treat an EC from below an outer
join as a second-class citizen.
I have hopes of eventually being able to treat outer-join clauses via
EquivalenceClasses, by means of only applying deductions within the
EC's join domain. There are still problems in the way of that, though,
so for now the reconsider_outer_join_clause logic is still here.
I haven't been able to get rid of RestrictInfo.is_pushed_down either,
but I wonder if that could be recast using JoinDomains.
I had to hack one test case in postgres_fdw.sql to make it still test
what it was meant to, because postgres_fdw is inconsistent about
how it deals with quals containing non-shippable expressions; see
https://postgr.es/m/1691374.1671659838@sss.pgh.pa.us. That should
be improved, but I don't think it's within the scope of this patch
series.
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/830269.1656693747@sss.pgh.pa.us
Remove RestrictInfo.nullable_relids, along with a good deal of
infrastructure that calculated it. One use-case for it was in
join_clause_is_movable_to, but we can now replace that usage with
a check to see if the clause's relids include any outer join
that can null the target relation. The other use-case was in
join_clause_is_movable_into, but that test can just be dropped
entirely now that the clause's relids include outer joins.
Furthermore, join_clause_is_movable_into should now be
accurate enough that it will accept anything returned by
generate_join_implied_equalities, so we can restore the Assert
that was diked out in commit 95f4e59c3.
Remove the outerjoin_delayed mechanism. We needed this before to
prevent quals from getting evaluated below outer joins that should
null some of their vars. Now that we consider varnullingrels while
placing quals, that's taken care of automatically, so throw the
whole thing away.
Teach remove_useless_result_rtes to also remove useless FromExprs.
Having done that, the delay_upper_joins flag serves no purpose any
more and we can remove it, largely reverting 11086f2f2.
Use constant TRUE for "dummy" clauses when throwing back outer joins.
This improves on a hack I introduced in commit 6a6522529. If we
have a left-join clause l.x = r.y, and a WHERE clause l.x = constant,
we generate r.y = constant and then don't really have a need for the
join clause. But we must throw the join clause back anyway after
marking it redundant, so that the join search heuristics won't think
this is a clauseless join and avoid it. That was a kluge introduced
under time pressure, and after looking at it I thought of a better
way: let's just introduce constant-TRUE "join clauses" instead,
and get rid of them at the end. This improves the generated plans for
such cases by not having to test a redundant join clause. We can also
get rid of the ugly hack used to mark such clauses as redundant for
selectivity estimation.
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/830269.1656693747@sss.pgh.pa.us
Traditionally we used the same Var struct to represent the value
of a table column everywhere in parse and plan trees. This choice
predates our support for SQL outer joins, and it's really a pretty
bad idea with outer joins, because the Var's value can depend on
where it is in the tree: it might go to NULL above an outer join.
So expression nodes that are equal() per equalfuncs.c might not
represent the same value, which is a huge correctness hazard for
the planner.
To improve this, decorate Var nodes with a bitmapset showing
which outer joins (identified by RTE indexes) may have nulled
them at the point in the parse tree where the Var appears.
This allows us to trust that equal() Vars represent the same value.
A certain amount of klugery is still needed to cope with cases
where we re-order two outer joins, but it's possible to make it
work without sacrificing that core principle. PlaceHolderVars
receive similar decoration for the same reason.
In the planner, we include these outer join bitmapsets into the relids
that an expression is considered to depend on, and in consequence also
add outer-join relids to the relids of join RelOptInfos. This allows
us to correctly perceive whether an expression can be calculated above
or below a particular outer join.
This change affects FDWs that want to plan foreign joins. They *must*
follow suit when labeling foreign joins in order to match with the
core planner, but for many purposes (if postgres_fdw is any guide)
they'd prefer to consider only base relations within the join.
To support both requirements, redefine ForeignScan.fs_relids as
base+OJ relids, and add a new field fs_base_relids that's set up by
the core planner.
Large though it is, this commit just does the minimum necessary to
install the new mechanisms and get check-world passing again.
Follow-up patches will perform some cleanup. (The README additions
and comments mention some stuff that will appear in the follow-up.)
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/830269.1656693747@sss.pgh.pa.us
Rename the developer option 'logical_decoding_mode' to the more flexible
name 'logical_replication_mode' because doing so will make it easier to
extend this option in the future to help test other areas of logical
replication.
Currently, it is used on the publisher side to allow streaming or
serializing each change in logical decoding. In the upcoming patch, we are
planning to use it on the subscriber. On the subscriber, it will allow
serializing the changes to file and notifies the parallel apply workers to
read and apply them at the end of the transaction.
We discussed exposing this parameter as a subscription option but
it did not seem advisable since it is primarily used for testing/debugging
and there is no other such parameter. We also discussed having separate
GUCs for publisher and subscriber but for current testing/debugging
requirements, one GUC is sufficient.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Kuroda Hayato, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAy2c=Mx=FTCs+EwUsf2kQL5MmU3N18X84k0EmCXntK4g@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
Split out "ConfigOptionIsVisible" to perform the privilege
check for GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY GUCs (which these days can also
be read by pg_read_all_settings role members), and move the
should-we-show-it checks from GetConfigOptionValues to its
sole caller.
This commit also removes get_explain_guc_options's check of
GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL, which seems to have got cargo-culted in there.
While there's no obvious use-case for marking a GUC both
GUC_EXPLAIN and GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL, if it were set up that way
one would expect EXPLAIN to show it --- if that's not what
you want, then don't set GUC_EXPLAIN.
In passing, simplify the loop logic in show_all_settings.
Nitin Jadhav, Bharath Rupireddy, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMm1aWYgfekpRK-Jz5=pM_bV+Om=ktGq1vxTZ_dr1Z6MV-qokA@mail.gmail.com
Avoid having walreceiver code know explicitly about the precision
and underlying datatype of TimestampTz. (There is still one
calculation that knows that, which should be replaced with use of
TimestampDifferenceMilliseconds; but we need to figure out what to do
about overflow cases first.)
In support of this, provide a TimestampTzPlusSeconds macro, as well
as TIMESTAMP_INFINITY and TIMESTAMP_MINUS_INFINITY macros. (We could
have used the existing DT_NOEND and DT_NOBEGIN symbols, but I judged
those too opaque and confusing.)
Move GetCurrentTimestamp calls so that it's more obvious that we
are not using stale values of "now" anyplace. This doesn't result
in net more calls, and might indeed make for net fewer.
Avoid having a dummy value in the WalRcvWakeupReason enum, so that
we can hope for the compiler to catch overlooked switch cases.
Nathan Bossart and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230125235004.GA1327755@nathanxps13
Eager freezing strategy avoids large build-ups of all-visible pages. It
makes VACUUM trigger page-level freezing whenever doing so will enable
the page to become all-frozen in the visibility map. This is useful for
tables that experience continual growth, particularly strict append-only
tables such as pgbench's history table. Eager freezing significantly
improves performance stability by spreading out the cost of freezing
over time, rather than doing most freezing during aggressive VACUUMs.
It complements the insert autovacuum mechanism added by commit b07642db.
VACUUM determines its freezing strategy based on the value of the new
vacuum_freeze_strategy_threshold GUC (or reloption) with logged tables.
Tables that exceed the size threshold use the eager freezing strategy.
Unlogged tables and temp tables always use eager freezing strategy,
since the added cost is negligible there. Non-permanent relations won't
incur any extra overhead in WAL written (for the obvious reason), nor in
pages dirtied (since any extra freezing will only take place on pages
whose PD_ALL_VISIBLE bit needed to be set either way).
VACUUM uses lazy freezing strategy for logged tables that fall under the
GUC size threshold. Page-level freezing triggers based on the criteria
established in commit 1de58df4, which added basic page-level freezing.
Eager freezing is strictly more aggressive than lazy freezing. Settings
like vacuum_freeze_min_age still get applied in just the same way in
every VACUUM, independent of the strategy in use. The only mechanical
difference between eager and lazy freezing strategies is that only the
former applies its own additional criteria to trigger freezing pages.
Note that even lazy freezing strategy will trigger freezing whenever a
page happens to have required that an FPI be written during pruning,
provided that the page will thereby become all-frozen in the visibility
map afterwards (due to the FPI optimization from commit 1de58df4).
The vacuum_freeze_strategy_threshold default setting is 4GB. This is a
relatively low setting that prioritizes performance stability. It will
be reviewed at the end of the Postgres 16 beta period.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkFok_6EAHuK39GaW4FjEFQsY=3J0AAd6FXk93u-Xq3Fg@mail.gmail.com
Invent separate macros for "invalid" values of these types, so that
we needn't embed knowledge of their representations into calling code.
These are all zeroes anyway ATM, so this is not fixing any live bug,
but it makes the code cleaner and more future-proof.
I (tgl) also chose to move DSM_HANDLE_INVALID into dsm_impl.h,
since it seems like it should live beside the typedef for dsm_handle.
Hou Zhijie, Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB5716860B1454C34E5B179B6694C99@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Previously, a CREATEROLE user without SUPERUSER could not alter
REPLICATION users in any way, and could not set the BYPASSRLS
attribute. However, they could manipulate the CREATEDB property
even if they themselves did not possess it.
With this change, a CREATEROLE user without SUPERUSER can set or
clear the REPLICATION, BYPASSRLS, or CREATEDB property on a new
role or a role that they have rights to manage if and only if
that property is set for their own role.
This implements the standard idea that you can't give permissions
you don't have (but you can give the ones you do have). We might
in the future want to provide more powerful ways to constrain
what a CREATEROLE user can do - for example, to limit whether
CONNECTION LIMIT can be set or the values to which it can be set -
but that is left as future work.
Patch by me, reviewed by Nathan Bossart, Tushar Ahuja, and Neha
Sharma.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobX=LHg_J5aT=0pi9gJy=JdtrUVGAu0zhr-i5v5nNbJDg@mail.gmail.com
Currently dblink and postgres_fdw don't process interrupts during connection
establishment. Besides preventing query cancellations etc, this can lead to
undetected deadlocks, as global barriers are not processed.
Libpqwalreceiver in contrast, processes interrupts during connection
establishment. The required code is not trivial, so duplicating it into
additional places does not seem like a good option.
These aforementioned undetected deadlocks are the reason for the spate of CI
test failures in the FreeBSD 'test_running' step.
For now the helper library is just a header, as it needs to be linked into
each extension using libpq, and it seems too small to be worth adding a
dedicated static library for.
The conversion to the helper are done in subsequent commits.
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220925232237.p6uskba2dw6fnwj2@awork3.anarazel.de
Historically we skipped writing/reading this field, but that no
longer works under WRITE_READ_PARSE_PLAN_TREES since we expanded
the coverage of that option to include utility commands (787102b56).
Remove the special case and just treat this field normally.
Bump catversion out of an abundance of caution --- I do not think
we currently ever store RangeVar nodes in the catalogs, but
perhaps I'm wrong.
Per report from Pavel Stehule.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRAYvYu-qU7-NieqRRyaQZk-yr3UjtHQ2LR62PS9M1dZMA@mail.gmail.com
This adds combine, serial and deserial functions for the array_agg() and
string_agg() aggregate functions, thus allowing these aggregates to
partake in partial aggregations. This allows both parallel aggregation to
take place when these aggregates are present and also allows additional
partition-wise aggregation plan shapes to include plans that require
additional aggregation once the partially aggregated results from the
partitions have been combined.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra, Stephen Frost, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f9sx_6GTcvd6TMuZnNtCh0VhBzhX6FZqw17TgVFH-ga_A@mail.gmail.com
Enforce wal_retrieve_retry_interval on a per-subscription basis,
rather than globally, and arrange to skip that delay in case of
an intentional worker exit. This probably makes little difference
in the field, where apply workers wouldn't be restarted often;
but it has a significant impact on the runtime of our logical
replication regression tests (even though those tests use
artificially-small wal_retrieve_retry_interval settings already).
Nathan Bossart, with mostly-cosmetic editorialization by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221122004119.GA132961@nathanxps13
Until now we used struct timespec for instr_time on all platforms but
windows. Using struct timespec causes a fair bit of memory (struct timeval is
16 bytes) and runtime overhead (much more complicated additions). Instead we
can convert the time to nanoseconds in INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(), making the
remaining operations cheaper.
Representing time as int64 nanoseconds provides sufficient range, ~292 years
relative to a starting point (depending on clock source, relative to the unix
epoch or the system's boot time). That'd not be sufficient for calendar time
stored on disk, but is plenty for runtime interval time measurement.
On windows instr_time already is represented as cycles. It might make sense to
represent time as cycles on other platforms as well, as using cycle
acquisition instructions like rdtsc directly can reduce the overhead of time
acquisition substantially. This could be done in a fairly localized manner as
the code stands after this commit.
Because the windows and non-windows paths are now more similar, use a common
set of macros. To make that possible, most of the use of LARGE_INTEGER had to
be removed, which looks nicer anyway.
To avoid users of the API relying on the integer representation, we wrap the
64bit integer inside struct struct instr_time.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Lukas Fittl <lukas@fittl.com>
Author: David Geier <geidav.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230113195547.k4nlrmawpijqwlsa@awork3.anarazel.de
This is similar to 835d476, except that this one is to add node
attributes related to query jumbling and avoid long lines in the headers
and in the node structures changed by this commit.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5BHOUhX3zTH/ig6@paquier.xyz
This will ease a follow-up move that will generate automatically this
code. The C file is renamed, for consistency with the node-related
files whose code are generated by gen_node_support.pl:
- queryjumble.c -> queryjumblefuncs.c
- utils/queryjumble.h -> nodes/queryjumble.h
Per a suggestion from Peter Eisentraut.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5BHOUhX3zTH/ig6@paquier.xyz
This provides a way to reserve connection slots for non-superusers.
The slots reserved via the new GUC are available only to users who
have the new predefined role pg_use_reserved_connections.
superuser_reserved_connections remains as a final reserve in case
reserved_connections has been exhausted.
Patch by Nathan Bossart. Reviewed by Tushar Ahuja and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20230119194601.GA4105788@nathanxps13
This is in preparation for adding a new reserved_connections GUC,
but aligning the GUC name with the variable name is also a good
idea on general principle.
Patch by Nathan Bossart. Reviewed by Tushar Ahuja and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20230119194601.GA4105788@nathanxps13
This patch largely reverts what I did in commits c9b0c678d and
78e73e875. The maximum cover length limit that I added in 78e73e875
(to band-aid over c9b0c678d's performance issues) creates too many
user-visible behavior discrepancies, as complained of for example in
bug #17691. The real problem with hlCover() is not what I thought
at the time, but more that it seems to have been designed with only
AND tsquery semantics in mind. It doesn't work quite right for OR,
and even less so for NOT or phrase queries. However, we can improve
that situation by building a variant of TS_execute() that returns a
list of match locations. We already get an ExecPhraseData struct
representing match locations for the primitive case of a simple match,
as well as one for a phrase match; we just need to add some logic to
combine these for AND and OR operators. The result is a list of
ExecPhraseDatas, which hlCover can regard as having simple AND
semantics, so that its old algorithm works correctly.
There's still a lot not to like about ts_headline's behavior, but
I think the remaining issues have to do with the heuristics used
in mark_hl_words and mark_hl_fragments (which, likewise, were not
revisited when phrase search was added). Improving those is a task
for another day.
Patch by me; thanks to Alvaro Herrera for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/840.1669405935@sss.pgh.pa.us
The rule system needs "old" and/or "new" pseudo-RTEs in rule actions
that are ON INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE. Historically it's put such entries
into the ON SELECT rules of views as well, but those are really quite
vestigial. The only thing we've used them for is to carry the
view's relid forward to AcquireExecutorLocks (so that we can
re-lock the view to verify it hasn't changed before re-using a plan)
and to carry its relid and permissions data forward to execution-time
permissions checks. What we can do instead of that is to retain
these fields of the RTE_RELATION RTE for the view even after we
convert it to an RTE_SUBQUERY RTE. This requires a tiny amount of
extra complication in the planner and AcquireExecutorLocks, but on
the other hand we can get rid of the logic that moves that data from
one place to another.
The principal immediate benefit of doing this, aside from a small
saving in the pg_rewrite data for views, is that these pseudo-RTEs
no longer trigger ruleutils.c's heuristic about qualifying variable
names when the rangetable's length is more than 1. That results
in quite a number of small simplifications in regression test outputs,
which are all to the good IMO.
Bump catversion because we need to dump a few more fields of
RTE_SUBQUERY RTEs. While those will always be zeroes anyway in
stored rules (because we'd never populate them until query rewrite)
they are useful for debugging, and it seems like we'd better make
sure to transmit such RTEs accurately in plans sent to parallel
workers. I don't think the executor actually examines these fields
after startup, but someday it might.
This is a second attempt at committing 1b4d280ea. The difference
from the first time is that now we can add some filtering rules to
AdjustUpgrade.pm to allow cross-version upgrade testing to pass
despite all the cosmetic changes in CREATE VIEW outputs.
Amit Langote (filtering rules by me)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqEf7gPN4Hn+LoZ4tP2q_Qt7n3vw7-6fJKOf92tSEnX6Gg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/891521.1673657296@sss.pgh.pa.us
Avoid explicitly grouping by columns that we know are redundant
for sorting, for example we need group by only one of x and y in
SELECT ... WHERE x = y GROUP BY x, y
This comes up more often than you might think, as shown by the
changes in the regression tests. It's nearly free to detect too,
since we are just piggybacking on the existing logic that detects
redundant pathkeys. (In some of the existing plans that change,
it's visible that a sort step preceding the grouping step already
didn't bother to sort by the redundant column, making the old plan
a bit silly-looking.)
To do this, build processed_groupClause and processed_distinctClause
lists that omit any provably-redundant sort items, and consult those
not the originals where relevant. This means that within the
planner, one should usually consult root->processed_groupClause or
root->processed_distinctClause if one wants to know which columns
are to be grouped on; but to check whether grouping or distinct-ing
is happening at all, check non-NIL-ness of parse->groupClause or
parse->distinctClause. This is comparable to longstanding rules
about handling the HAVING clause, so I don't think it'll be a huge
maintenance problem.
nodeAgg.c also needs minor mods, because it's now possible to generate
AGG_PLAIN and AGG_SORTED Agg nodes with zero grouping columns.
Patch by me; thanks to Richard Guo and David Rowley for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/185315.1672179489@sss.pgh.pa.us
Add leader_pid to pg_stat_subscription. leader_pid is the process ID of
the leader apply worker if this process is a parallel apply worker. If
this field is NULL, it indicates that the process is a leader apply
worker or a synchronization worker. The new column makes it easier to
distinguish parallel apply workers from other kinds of workers and helps
to identify the leader for the parallel workers corresponding to a
particular subscription.
Additionally, update the leader_pid column in pg_stat_activity as well to
display the PID of the leader apply worker for parallel apply workers.
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Sawada Masahiko, Amit Kapila, Shveta Mallik
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
Presently, restore_command uses a different code path than
archive_cleanup_command and recovery_end_command. These code paths
are similar and can be easily combined, as long as it is possible to
identify if a command should:
- Issue a FATAL on signal.
- Exit immediately on SIGTERM.
While on it, this removes src/common/archive.c and its associated
header. Since the introduction of c96de2c, BuildRestoreCommand() has
become a simple wrapper of replace_percent_placeholders() able to call
make_native_path(). This simplifies shell_restore.c as long as
RestoreArchivedFile() includes a call to make_native_path().
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221227192449.GA3672473@nathanxps13
This makes sure that the internal logic of these functions does not
attempt to change the value of the arguments constified, and it removes
one unconstify() in basic_archive.c.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan, Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230114231126.GA2580330@nathanxps13
Most callers of BufFileRead() want to check whether they read the full
specified length. Checking this at every call site is very tedious.
This patch provides additional variants BufFileReadExact() and
BufFileReadMaybeEOF() that include the length checks.
I considered changing BufFileRead() itself, but this function is also
used in extensions, and so changing the behavior like this would
create a lot of problems there. The new names are analogous to the
existing LogicalTapeReadExact().
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/f3501945-c591-8cc3-5ef0-b72a2e0eaa9c@enterprisedb.com
The code specific to the execution of archive_cleanup_command,
recovery_end_command and restore_command is moved to a new file named
shell_restore.c. The code is split into three functions:
- shell_restore(), that attempts the execution of a shell-based
restore_command.
- shell_archive_cleanup(), for archive_cleanup_command.
- shell_recovery_end(), for recovery_end_command.
This introduces no functional changes, with failure patterns and logs
generated in consequence being the same as before (one case actually
generates one less DEBUG2 message "could not restore" when a restore
command succeeds but the follow-up stat() to check the size fails, but
that only matters with a elevel high enough).
This is preparatory work for allowing recovery modules, a facility
similar to archive modules, with callbacks shaped similarly to the
functions introduced here.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221227192449.GA3672473@nathanxps13
While system_user was stored as an AuthToken in IdentLine, pg_user was
stored as a plain string. This commit changes the code as we start
storing pg_user as an AuthToken too.
This does not have any functional changes, as all the operations on
pg_user only use the string from the AuthToken. There is no regexp
compiled and no check based on its quoting, yet. This is in preparation
of more features that intend to extend its capabilities, like support
for regexps and group membership.
Author: Jelte Fennema
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQRNow4MwkBjgPxywXdJU_K3a9+Pm78JB7De3yQwwkTDew@mail.gmail.com
In commit 8bf6ec3ba I assumed that no code path could reach
ExecGetExtraUpdatedCols without having gone through
ExecInitStoredGenerated. That turns out not to be the case in
logical replication: if there's an ON UPDATE trigger on the target
table, trigger.c will call this code before anybody has set up its
generated columns. Having seen that, I don't have a lot of faith in
there not being other such paths. ExecGetExtraUpdatedCols can call
ExecInitStoredGenerated for itself, as long as we are willing to
assume that it is only called in CMD_UPDATE operations, which on
the whole seems like a safer leap of faith.
Per report from Vitaly Davydov.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d259d69652b8c2ff50e14cda3c236c7f@postgrespro.ru
Commit 60684dd8 left loose ends when it came to maintaining toast
tables or partitions.
For toast tables, simply skip the privilege check if the toast table
is an indirect target of the maintenance command, because the main
table privileges have already been checked.
For partitions, allow the maintenance command if the user has the
MAINTAIN privilege on the partition or any parent.
Also make CLUSTER emit "skipping" messages when the user doesn't have
privileges, similar to VACUUM.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reported-by: Pavel Luzanov
Reviewed-by: Pavel Luzanov, Ted Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20230113231339.GA2422750@nathanxps13
We don't allow different column lists for the same table in the different
publications of the single subscription. A publication with a column list
except for dropped and generated columns should be considered the same as
a publication with no column list (which implicitly includes all columns
as part of the columns list). However, as we were not excluding the
dropped and generated columns from the column list combining such
publications leads to an error "cannot use different column lists for
table ...".
We decided not to backpatch this fix as there is a risk of users seeing
this as a behavior change and also we didn't see any field report of this
case.
Author: Shi yu
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSZPR01MB631091CCBC56F195B1B9ACB0FDFE9@OSZPR01MB6310.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Const qualifiers ensure that we don't do something stupid in the
function implementation. Additionally they clarify the interface. As
an example:
void
slist_delete(slist_head *head, const slist_node *node)
Here one can instantly tell that node->next is not going to be set to
NULL. Finally, const qualifiers potentially allow the compiler to do
more optimizations. This being said, no benchmarking was done for
this patch.
The functions that return non-const pointers like slist_next_node(),
dclist_next_node() etc. are not affected by the patch intentionally.
Author: Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TM2%3D08mNKD9aJg8vEY9hd%2BG4L7%2BNvh30UiNT3kShgRgNg%40mail.gmail.com
The code that handles authentication for user maps was pretty confusing
with its choice of variable names. It involves two types of users: a
system user and a Postgres user (well, role), and these were not named
consistently throughout the code that processes the user maps loaded
from pg_ident.conf at authentication.
This commit changes the following things to improve the situation:
- Rename "pg_role" to "pg_user" and "token" to "system_user" in
IndetLine. These choices are more consistent with the pg_ident.conf
example in the docs, as well. "token" has been introduced recently in
fc579e1, and it is way worse than the choice before that, "ident_user".
- Switch the order of the fields in IdentLine to map with the order of
the items in the ident files, as of map name, system user and PG user.
- In check_ident_usermap(), rename "regexp_pgrole" to "expanded_pg_user"
when processing a regexp for the system user entry in a user map. This
variable does not store a regular expression at all: it would be either
a string or a substitution to \1 if the Postgres role is specified as
such.
Author: Jelte Fennema
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQTkwELHUOAKhvdA+m3tWbUQySHHkExJV8GAZ1pwgbEgXg@mail.gmail.com
A comment in hba.h mentioned that AuthTokens are used when building the
IdentLines from pg_ident.conf, but since 8fea868 that has added support
of regexps for databases and roles in pg_hba.conf, it is also the case
of HBA files. This refreshes the comment to refer to both HBA and ident
files.
Issue spotted while going through a different patch.
This reverts commit 1b4d280ea1.
It's broken the buildfarm members that run cross-version-upgrade tests,
because they're not prepared to deal with cosmetic differences between
CREATE VIEW commands emitted by older servers and HEAD. Even if we had
a solution to that, which we don't, it'd take some time to roll it out
to the affected animals. This improvement isn't valuable enough to
justify addressing that problem on an emergency basis, so revert it
for now.
Switch to a design similar to regular backends, instead of the previous
arrangement where signal handlers did non-trivial state management and
called fork(). The main changes are:
* The postmaster now has its own local latch to wait on. (For now, we
don't want other backends setting its latch directly, but that could
probably be made to work with more research on robustness.)
* The existing signal handlers are cut in two: a handle_pm_XXX() part
that just sets pending_pm_XXX flags and the latch, and a
process_pm_XXX() part that runs later when the latch is seen.
* Signal handlers are now installed with the regular pqsignal()
function rather than the special pqsignal_pm() function; historical
portability concerns about the effect of SA_RESTART on select() are no
longer relevant, and we don't need to block signals anymore.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BZ-HpOj1JsO9eWUP%2Bar7npSVinsC_npxSy%2BjdOMsx%3DGg%40mail.gmail.com
The rule system needs "old" and/or "new" pseudo-RTEs in rule actions
that are ON INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE. Historically it's put such entries
into the ON SELECT rules of views as well, but those are really quite
vestigial. The only thing we've used them for is to carry the
view's relid forward to AcquireExecutorLocks (so that we can
re-lock the view to verify it hasn't changed before re-using a plan)
and to carry its relid and permissions data forward to execution-time
permissions checks. What we can do instead of that is to retain
these fields of the RTE_RELATION RTE for the view even after we
convert it to an RTE_SUBQUERY RTE. This requires a tiny amount of
extra complication in the planner and AcquireExecutorLocks, but on
the other hand we can get rid of the logic that moves that data from
one place to another.
The principal immediate benefit of doing this, aside from a small
saving in the pg_rewrite data for views, is that these pseudo-RTEs
no longer trigger ruleutils.c's heuristic about qualifying variable
names when the rangetable's length is more than 1. That results
in quite a number of small simplifications in regression test outputs,
which are all to the good IMO.
Bump catversion because we need to dump a few more fields of
RTE_SUBQUERY RTEs. While those will always be zeroes anyway in
stored rules (because we'd never populate them until query rewrite)
they are useful for debugging, and it seems like we'd better make
sure to transmit such RTEs accurately in plans sent to parallel
workers. I don't think the executor actually examines these fields
after startup, but someday it might.
Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqEf7gPN4Hn+LoZ4tP2q_Qt7n3vw7-6fJKOf92tSEnX6Gg@mail.gmail.com
There are a number of places where a shell command is constructed with
percent-placeholders (like %x). It's cumbersome to have to open-code
this several times. This factors out this logic into a separate
function. This also allows us to ensure consistency for and document
some subtle behaviors, such as what to do with unrecognized
placeholders.
The unified handling is now that incorrect and unknown placeholders
are an error, where previously in most cases they were skipped or
ignored. This affects the following settings:
- archive_cleanup_command
- archive_command
- recovery_end_command
- restore_command
- ssl_passphrase_command
The following settings are part of this refactoring but already had
stricter error handling and should be unchanged in their behavior:
- basebackup_to_shell.command
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5238bbed-0b01-83a6-d4b2-7eb0562a054e%40enterprisedb.com
Can be set to the empty string, or to either or both of "set" or
"inherit". If set to a non-empty value, a non-superuser who creates
a role (necessarily by relying up the CREATEROLE privilege) will
grant that role back to themselves with the specified options.
This isn't a security feature, because the grant that this feature
triggers can also be performed explicitly. Instead, it's a user experience
feature. A superuser would necessarily inherit the privileges of any
created role and be able to access all such roles via SET ROLE;
with this patch, you can configure createrole_self_grant = 'set, inherit'
to provide a similar experience for a user who has CREATEROLE but not
SUPERUSER.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmobN59ct+Emmz6ig1Nua2Q-_o=r6DSD98KfU53kctq_kQw@mail.gmail.com
This allows left join removals and unique joins to work with partitioned
tables. The planner just lacked sufficient proofs that a given join
would not cause any row duplication. Unique indexes currently serve as
that proof, so have get_relation_info() populate the indexlist for
partitioned tables too.
Author: Arne Roland
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Zhihong Yu, Amit Langote, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c3b2408b7a39433b8230bbcd02e9f302@index.de
Currently, for large transactions, the publisher sends the data in
multiple streams (changes divided into chunks depending upon
logical_decoding_work_mem), and then on the subscriber-side, the apply
worker writes the changes into temporary files and once it receives the
commit, it reads from those files and applies the entire transaction. To
improve the performance of such transactions, we can instead allow them to
be applied via parallel workers.
In this approach, we assign a new parallel apply worker (if available) as
soon as the xact's first stream is received and the leader apply worker
will send changes to this new worker via shared memory. The parallel apply
worker will directly apply the change instead of writing it to temporary
files. However, if the leader apply worker times out while attempting to
send a message to the parallel apply worker, it will switch to
"partial serialize" mode - in this mode, the leader serializes all
remaining changes to a file and notifies the parallel apply workers to
read and apply them at the end of the transaction. We use a non-blocking
way to send the messages from the leader apply worker to the parallel
apply to avoid deadlocks. We keep this parallel apply assigned till the
transaction commit is received and also wait for the worker to finish at
commit. This preserves commit ordering and avoid writing to and reading
from files in most cases. We still need to spill if there is no worker
available.
This patch also extends the SUBSCRIPTION 'streaming' parameter so that the
user can control whether to apply the streaming transaction in a parallel
apply worker or spill the change to disk. The user can set the streaming
parameter to 'on/off', or 'parallel'. The parameter value 'parallel' means
the streaming will be applied via a parallel apply worker, if available.
The parameter value 'on' means the streaming transaction will be spilled
to disk. The default value is 'off' (same as current behaviour).
In addition, the patch extends the logical replication STREAM_ABORT
message so that abort_lsn and abort_time can also be sent which can be
used to update the replication origin in parallel apply worker when the
streaming transaction is aborted. Because this message extension is needed
to support parallel streaming, parallel streaming is not supported for
publications on servers < PG16.
Author: Hou Zhijie, Wang wei, Amit Kapila with design inputs from Sawada Masahiko
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Peter Smith, Dilip Kumar, Shi yu, Kuroda Hayato, Shveta Mallik
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+wyN6zpaHUkCLorEWNx75MG0xhMwcFhvjqm2KURZEAGw@mail.gmail.com
Waken related worker processes immediately at commit of a transaction
that has performed ALTER SUBSCRIPTION (including the RENAME and
OWNER variants). This reduces the response time for such operations.
In the real world that might not be worth much, but it shaves several
seconds off the runtime for the subscription test suite.
In the case of PREPARE, we just throw away this notification state;
it doesn't seem worth the work to preserve it. The workers will
still react after the eventual COMMIT PREPARED, but not as quickly.
Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221122004119.GA132961@nathanxps13
VACUUM normally ends by running vac_update_datfrozenxid(), which
requires a scan of pg_class. Therefore, if one attempts to vacuum a
database one table at a time --- as vacuumdb has done since v12 ---
we will spend O(N^2) time in vac_update_datfrozenxid(). That causes
serious performance problems in databases with tens of thousands of
tables, and indeed the effect is measurable with only a few hundred.
To add insult to injury, only one process can run
vac_update_datfrozenxid at the same time per DB, so this behavior
largely defeats vacuumdb's -j option.
Hence, invent options SKIP_DATABASE_STATS and ONLY_DATABASE_STATS
to allow applications to postpone vac_update_datfrozenxid() until the
end of a series of VACUUM requests, and teach vacuumdb to use them.
Per bug #17717 from Gunnar L. Sadly, this answer doesn't seem
like something we'd consider back-patching, so the performance
problem will remain in v12-v15.
Tom Lane and Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17717-6c50eb1c7d23a886@postgresql.org
We were identifying the updatable generated columns of inheritance
children by transposing the calculation made for their parent.
However, there's nothing that says a traditional-inheritance child
can't have generated columns that aren't there in its parent, or that
have different dependencies than are in the parent's expression.
(At present it seems that we don't enforce that for partitioning
either, which is likely wrong to some degree or other; but the case
clearly needs to be handled with traditional inheritance.)
Hence, drop the very-klugy-anyway "extraUpdatedCols" RTE field
in favor of identifying which generated columns depend on updated
columns during executor startup. In HEAD we can remove
extraUpdatedCols altogether; in back branches, it's still there but
always empty. Another difference between the HEAD and back-branch
versions of this patch is that in HEAD we can add the new bitmap field
to ResultRelInfo, but that would cause an ABI break in back branches.
Like 4b3e37993, add a List field at the end of struct EState instead.
Back-patch to v13. The bogus calculation is also being made in v12,
but it doesn't have the same visible effect because we don't use it
to decide which generated columns to recalculate; as a consequence of
which the patch doesn't apply easily. I think that there might still
be a demonstrable bug associated with trigger firing conditions, but
that's such a weird corner-case usage that I'm content to leave it
unfixed in v12.
Amit Langote and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFshLKNvQUd1DgwJ-7tsTp=dwv7KZqXC4j2wYBV1aCDUA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2793383.1672944799@sss.pgh.pa.us
pg_xact lookups are relatively expensive. Move the xmin/xmax commit
status checks from the point that freeze plans are prepared to the point
that they're actually executed. Otherwise we'll repeat many commit
status checks whenever multiple successive VACUUM operations scan the
same pages and decide against freezing each time, which is a waste of
cycles.
Oversight in commit 1de58df4, which added page-level freezing.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkZpe4K6qMfEt8H4qYJCKc2R7TPvKsBva7jc9w7iGXQSw@mail.gmail.com
Improve comments added by commit 1de58df4 which describe the
lazy_scan_prune "freeze the page" path. These newly revised comments
are based on suggestions from Jeff Davis.
In passing, remove nearby visibility_cutoff_xid comments left over from
commit 6daeeb1f.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ebc857107fe3edd422ef8a65191ca4a8da568b9b.camel@j-davis.com
While on it, newlines are removed from the end of two elog() strings.
The others are simple grammar mistakes. One comment in pg_upgrade
referred incorrectly to sequences since a7e5457.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221230231257.GI1153@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 11
New versions of perl trigger warnings within perl.h with our compiler
flags. At least -Wdeclaration-after-statement, -Wshadow=compatible-local are
known to be problematic.
To avoid these warnings, conditionally use #pragma GCC system_header before
including plperl.h.
Alternatively, we could add the include paths for problematic headers with
-isystem, but that is a larger hammer and is harder to search for.
A more granular alternative would be to use #pragma GCC diagnostic
push/ignored/pop, but gcc warns about unknown warnings being ignored, so every
to-be-ignored-temporarily compiler warning would require its own pg_config.h
symbol and #ifdef.
As the warnings are voluminous, it makes sense to backpatch this change. But
don't do so yet, we first want gather buildfarm coverage - it's e.g. possible
that some compiler claiming to be gcc compatible has issues with the pragma.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221228182455.hfdwd22zztvkojy2@awork3.anarazel.de
Teach VACUUM to decide on whether or not to trigger freezing at the
level of whole heap pages. Individual XIDs and MXIDs fields from tuple
headers now trigger freezing of whole pages, rather than independently
triggering freezing of each individual tuple header field.
Managing the cost of freezing over time now significantly influences
when and how VACUUM freezes. The overall amount of WAL written is the
single most important freezing related cost, in general. Freezing each
page's tuples together in batch allows VACUUM to take full advantage of
the freeze plan WAL deduplication optimization added by commit 9e540599.
Also teach VACUUM to trigger page-level freezing whenever it detects
that heap pruning generated an FPI. We'll have already written a large
amount of WAL just to do that much, so it's very likely a good idea to
get freezing out of the way for the page early. This only happens in
cases where it will directly lead to marking the page all-frozen in the
visibility map.
In most cases "freezing a page" removes all XIDs < OldestXmin, and all
MXIDs < OldestMxact. It doesn't quite work that way in certain rare
cases involving MultiXacts, though. It is convenient to define "freeze
the page" in a way that gives FreezeMultiXactId the leeway to put off
the work of processing an individual tuple's xmax whenever it happens to
be a MultiXactId that would require an expensive second pass to process
aggressively (allocating a new multi is especially worth avoiding here).
FreezeMultiXactId is eager when processing is cheap (as it usually is),
and lazy in the event of an individual multi that happens to require
expensive second pass processing. This avoids regressions related to
processing of multis that page-level freezing might otherwise cause.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkFok_6EAHuK39GaW4FjEFQsY=3J0AAd6FXk93u-Xq3Fg@mail.gmail.com
This is not really complete, but it catches most cases of practical
interest. The main omissions are:
* regtype, regprocedure, and regoperator parse type names by
calling the main grammar, so any grammar-detected syntax error
will still be a hard error. Also, if one includes a type
modifier in such a type specification, errors detected by the
typmodin function will be hard errors.
* Lookup errors are handled just by passing missing_ok = true
to the relevant catalog lookup function. Because we've used
quite a restrictive definition of "missing_ok", this means that
edge cases such as "the named schema exists, but you lack
USAGE permission on it" are still hard errors.
It would make sense to me to replace most/all missing_ok
parameters with an escontext parameter and then allow these
additional lookup failure cases to be trapped too. But that's
a job for some other day.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3342239.1671988406@sss.pgh.pa.us
This is slightly tedious because the adjustments cascade through
a couple of levels of subroutines, but it's not very hard.
I chose to avoid changing function signatures more than absolutely
necessary, by passing the escontext pointer in existing structs
where possible.
tsquery's nuisance NOTICEs about empty queries are suppressed in
soft-error mode, since they're not errors and we surely don't want
them to be shown to the user anyway. Maybe that whole behavior
should be reconsidered.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3824377.1672076822@sss.pgh.pa.us
Historically these input functions just called strtoul or strtoull
and returned the result, with no error detection whatever. Upgrade
them to reject garbage input and out-of-range values, similarly to
our other numeric input routines.
To share the code for this with type oid, adjust the existing
"oidin_subr" to be agnostic about the SQL name of the type it is
handling, and move it to numutils.c; then clone it for 64-bit types.
Because the xid types previously accepted hex and octal input by
reason of calling strtoul[l] with third argument zero, I made the
common subroutine do that too, with the consequence that type oid
now also accepts hex and octal input. In view of 6fcda9aba, that
seems like a good thing.
While at it, simplify the existing over-complicated handling of
syntax errors from strtoul: we only need one ereturn not three.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3526121.1672000729@sss.pgh.pa.us
This enables streaming or serializing changes immediately in logical
decoding. This parameter is intended to be used to test logical decoding
and replication of large transactions for which otherwise we need to
generate the changes till logical_decoding_work_mem is reached.
This helps in reducing the timing of existing tests related to logical
replication of in-progress transactions and will help in writing tests for
for the upcoming feature for parallelly applying large in-progress
transactions.
Author: Shi yu
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Shveta Mallik, Amit Kapila, Dilip Kumar, Kuroda Hayato, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSZPR01MB63104E7449DBE41932DB19F1FD1B9@OSZPR01MB6310.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
ed1a88dda added support functions for the ntile(), percent_rank() and
cume_dist() window functions but neglected to actually add these support
functions to the pg_proc entry for the corresponding window function.
Also, take this opportunity to add these window functions to one of the
regression tests added in ed1a88dda to give the support functions a little
bit of exercise. If I'd done that in the first place then the omission
would have been more obvious.
Bump the catversion, again.
An epoll fd belonging to the parent should be closed in the child. A
kqueue fd is automatically closed by fork(), but we should still adjust
our counter. For poll and Windows systems, nothing special is required.
On all systems we free the memory.
No caller yet, but we'll need this if we start using WaitEventSet in the
postmaster as planned.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BZ-HpOj1JsO9eWUP%2Bar7npSVinsC_npxSy%2BjdOMsx%3DGg%40mail.gmail.com
To be able to handle incoming connections on a server socket with
the WaitEventSet API, we'll need a new kind of event to indicate that
the the socket is ready to accept a connection.
On Unix, it's just the same as WL_SOCKET_READABLE, but on Windows there
is a different underlying kernel event that we need to map our
abstraction to.
No user yet, but a proposed patch would use this.
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2BZ-HpOj1JsO9eWUP%2Bar7npSVinsC_npxSy%2BjdOMsx%3DGg%40mail.gmail.com
The former name was discussed as being confusing, so use "split", as per
a suggestion from Magnus Hagander.
While on it, one of the output arguments is renamed from "segno" to
"segment_number", as per a suggestion from Kyotaro Horiguchi.
The documentation is updated to reflect all these changes.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEytQVaOOhGdoh0D7hGwe3fuKcRF6NthsSW7ww04EmtFgQ@mail.gmail.com
WindowFuncs such as row_number() don't care if it's called with ROWS
UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW or with RANGE UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND
CURRENT ROW. The latter is less efficient as the RANGE option requires
that the executor check for peer rows, so using the ROW option instead
would cause less overhead. Because RANGE is part of the default frame
options for WindowClauses, it means WindowAgg is, by default, working much
harder than it needs to for window functions where the ROWS / RANGE option
has no effect on the window function's result.
On a test query from the discussion thread, a performance improvement of
344% was seen by using ROWS instead of RANGE.
Here we add a new support function node type to allow support functions to
be called for window functions so that the most optimal version of the
frame options can be set. The planner has been adjusted so that the frame
options are changed only if all window functions sharing the same window
clause agree on what the optimized frame options are.
Here we give the ability for row_number(), rank(), dense_rank(),
percent_rank(), cume_dist() and ntile() to alter their WindowClause's
frameOptions.
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing, Erwin Brandstetter, Zhihong Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGHENJ7LBBszxS+SkWWFVnBmOT2oVsBhDMB1DFrgerCeYa_DyA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvohAKEtTXxq7Pc-ic2dKT8oZfbRKeEJP64M0B6+S88z+A@mail.gmail.com
Use a dedicated struct for the XID/MXID cutoffs used by VACUUM, such as
FreezeLimit and OldestXmin. This state is initialized in vacuum.c, and
then passed around by code from vacuumlazy.c to heapam.c freezing
related routines. The new convention is that everybody works off of the
same cutoff state, which is passed around via pointers to const.
Also simplify some of the logic for dealing with frozen xmin in
heap_prepare_freeze_tuple: add dedicated "xmin_already_frozen" state to
clearly distinguish xmin XIDs that we're going to freeze from those that
were already frozen from before. That way the routine's xmin handling
code is symmetrical with the existing xmax handling code. This is
preparation for an upcoming commit that will add page level freezing.
Also refactor the control flow within FreezeMultiXactId(), while adding
stricter sanity checks. We now test OldestXmin directly, instead of
using FreezeLimit as an inexact proxy for OldestXmin. This is further
preparation for the page level freezing work, which will make the
function's caller cede control of page level freezing to the function
where appropriate (where heap_prepare_freeze_tuple sees a tuple that
happens to contain a MultiXactId in its xmax).
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Jeff Davis <pgsql@j-davis.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznS9TxXmz2_=SY+SyJyDFbiOftKofM9=aDo68BbXNBUMA@mail.gmail.com
The previous coding of VA_ARGS_NARGS() always returned 1 on Visual
Studio, because it treats __VA_ARGS__ as a single token unless you jump
through extra hoops. Newer compilers have an option to fix that. Add a
comment about that so that we can remember to clean this up in the
future when our minimum MSVC version advances.
Author: Victor Spirin <v.spirin@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f450fc57-a147-19d0-e50c-33571c52cc13%40postgrespro.ru
This introduces palloc_aligned() and MemoryContextAllocAligned() which
allow callers to obtain memory which is allocated to the given size and
also aligned to the specified alignment boundary. The alignment
boundaries may be any power-of-2 value. Currently, the alignment is
capped at 2^26, however, we don't expect values anything like that large.
The primary expected use case is to align allocations to perhaps CPU
cache line size or to maybe I/O page size. Certain use cases can benefit
from having aligned memory by either having better performance or more
predictable performance.
The alignment is achieved by requesting 'alignto' additional bytes from
the underlying allocator function and then aligning the address that is
returned to the requested alignment. This obviously does waste some
memory, so alignments should be kept as small as what is required.
It's also important to note that these alignment bytes eat into the
maximum allocation size. So something like:
palloc_aligned(MaxAllocSize, 64, 0);
will not work as we cannot request MaxAllocSize + 64 bytes.
Additionally, because we're just requesting the requested size plus the
alignment requirements from the given MemoryContext, if that context is
the Slab allocator, then since slab can only provide chunks of the size
that's specified when the slab context is created, then this is not going
to work. Slab will generate an error to indicate that the requested size
is not supported.
The alignment that is requested in palloc_aligned() is stored along with
the allocated memory. This allows the alignment to remain intact through
repalloc() calls.
Author: Andres Freund, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Maxim Orlov, Andres Freund, John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvpxLPUMV1mhxs6g7GNwCP6Cs6hfnYQL5ffJQTuFAuxt8A%40mail.gmail.com
This is the guts of float4in, callable as a routine to input floats,
which will be useful in an upcoming patch for allowing soft errors in
the seg module's input function.
A similar operation was performed some years ago for float8in in
commit 50861cd683.
Reviewed by Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cee4e426-d014-c0b7-aa22-a659f2cd9130@dunslane.net
1349d279 added query planner support to allow more efficient execution of
aggregate functions which have an ORDER BY or a DISTINCT clause. Prior to
that commit, the planner would only request that the lower planner produce
a plan with the order required for the GROUP BY clause and it would be
left up to nodeAgg.c to perform the final sort of records within each
group so that the aggregate transition functions were called in the
correct order. Now that the planner requests the lower planner produce a
plan with the GROUP BY and the ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregates in mind,
there is the possibility that the planner chooses a plan which could be
less efficient than what would have been produced before 1349d279.
While developing 1349d279, I had in mind that Incremental Sort would help
us in cases where an index exists only on the GROUP BY column(s).
Incremental Sort would just replace the implicit tuplesorts which are
being performed in nodeAgg.c. However, because the planner has the
flexibility to instead choose a plan which just performs a full sort on
both the GROUP BY and ORDER BY / DISTINCT aggregate columns, there is
potential for the planner to make a bad choice. The costing for
Incremental Sort is not perfect as it assumes an even distribution of rows
to sort within each sort group.
Here we add an escape hatch in the form of the enable_presorted_aggregate
GUC. This will allow users to get the pre-PG16 behavior in cases where
they have no other means to convince the query planner to produce a plan
which only sorts on the GROUP BY column(s).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvr1Sm+g9hbv4REOVuvQKeDWXcKUAhmbK5K+dfun0s9CvA@mail.gmail.com
This function takes in input a WAL segment name and returns a tuple made
of the segment sequence number (dependent on the WAL segment size of the
cluster) and its timeline, as of a thin SQL wrapper around the existing
XLogFromFileName().
This function has multiple usages, like being able to compile a LSN from
a file name and an offset, or finding the timeline of a segment without
having to do to some maths based on the first eight characters of the
segment.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Maxim Orlov, Michael
Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACWV=FCddsxcGbVOA=cvPyMr75YCFbSQT6g4KDj=gcJK4g@mail.gmail.com
SCRAM_KEY_LEN was a variable used in the internal routines of SCRAM to
size a set of fixed-sized arrays used in the SHA and HMAC computations
during the SASL exchange or when building a SCRAM password. This had a
hard dependency on SHA-256, reducing the flexibility of SCRAM when it
comes to the addition of more hash methods. A second issue was that
SHA-256 is assumed as the cryptohash method to use all the time.
This commit renames SCRAM_KEY_LEN to a more generic SCRAM_KEY_MAX_LEN,
which is used as the size of the buffers used by the internal routines
of SCRAM. This is aimed at tracking centrally the maximum size
necessary for all the hash methods supported by SCRAM. A global
variable has the advantage of keeping the code in its simplest form,
reducing the need of more alloc/free logic for all the buffers used in
the hash calculations.
A second change is that the key length (SHA digest length) and hash
types are now tracked by the state data in the backend and the frontend,
the common portions being extended to handle these as arguments by the
internal routines of SCRAM. There are a few RFC proposals floating
around to extend the SCRAM protocol, including some to use stronger
cryptohash algorithms, so this lifts some of the existing restrictions
in the code.
The code in charge of parsing and building SCRAM secrets is extended to
rely on the key length and on the cryptohash type used for the exchange,
assuming currently that only SHA-256 is supported for the moment. Note
that the mock authentication simply enforces SHA-256.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Jonathan Katz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5k3Qiweo/1g9CG6@paquier.xyz
A new function pg_stat_get_backend_subxact() can be used to get
information about the number of subtransactions in the cache of
a particular backend and whether that cache has overflowed. This
can be useful for tracking down performance problems that can
result from overflowed snapshots.
Dilip Kumar, reviewed by Zhihong Yu, Nikolay Samokhvalov,
Justin Pryzby, Nathan Bossart, Ashutosh Sharma, Julien
Rouhaud. Additional design comments from Andres Freund,
Tom Lane, Bruce Momjian, and David G. Johnston.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-ut0uwkRJDQJeDPXpVyTWD46m3gt3JDToE02hTfONEN=Q@mail.gmail.com
The building of command completion tags could often be seen showing up in
profiles when running high tps workloads.
The query completion tags were being built with snprintf, which is slow at
the best of times when compared with more manual ways of formatting
strings. Here we introduce BuildQueryCompletionString() to do this job
for us. We also now store the completion tag's strlen in the
CommandTagBehavior struct so that we can quickly memcpy this number of
bytes into the completion tag string. Appending the rows affected is done
via pg_ulltoa_n. BuildQueryCompletionString returns the length of the
built string. This saves us having to call strlen to figure out how many
bytes to pass to pq_putmessage().
Author: David Rowley, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHoyFK-Xwqc-iY52shj0G+8K9FJpse+FuZ36XBKy78wDVnd=Qg@mail.gmail.com
This is mostly straightforward, except that if the range type
has a canonical function, that might throw an error during range
input. (Such errors probably only occur for edge cases: in the
in-core canonical functions, it happens only if a bound has the
maximum valid value for the underlying type.) Hence, this patch
extends the soft-error regime to allow canonical functions to
return errors softly as well. Extensions implementing range
canonical functions will need modification anyway because of the
API change for range_serialize(); while at it, they might want
to do something similar to what's been done here in the in-core
canonical functions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3284599.1671075185@sss.pgh.pa.us
Because we added StaticAssertStmt() first before StaticAssertDecl(),
some uses as well as the instructions in c.h are now a bit backwards
from the "native" way static assertions are meant to be used in C.
This updates the guidance and moves some static assertions to better
places.
Specifically, since the addition of StaticAssertDecl(), we can put
static assertions at the file level. This moves a number of static
assertions out of function bodies, where they might have been stuck
out of necessity, to perhaps better places at the file level or in
header files.
Also, when the static assertion appears in a position where a
declaration is allowed, then using StaticAssertDecl() is more native
than StaticAssertStmt().
Reviewed-by: John Naylor <john.naylor@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/941a04e7-dd6f-c0e4-8cdf-a33b3338cbda%40enterprisedb.com
This referred to the size of the buffers for k_ipad and k_opad in HMAC
computations. This is unused since e6bdfd9, where SCRAM has switched to
the cryptohash routines for its HMAC calculations rather than its own
maths.
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y5gGMjXhyp0oK0mH@paquier.xyz
Commits f92944137 et al. made IsInTransactionBlock() set the
XACT_FLAGS_NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT flag before returning "false",
on the grounds that that kept its API promises equivalent to those of
PreventInTransactionBlock(). This turns out to be a bad idea though,
because it allows an ANALYZE in a pipelined series of commands to
cause an immediate commit, which is unexpected.
Furthermore, if we return "false" then we have another issue,
which is that ANALYZE will decide it's allowed to do internal
commit-and-start-transaction sequences, thus possibly unexpectedly
committing the effects of previous commands in the pipeline.
To fix the latter situation, invent another transaction state flag
XACT_FLAGS_PIPELINING, which explicitly records the fact that we
have executed some extended-protocol command and not yet seen a
commit for it. Then, require that flag to not be set before allowing
InTransactionBlock() to return "false".
Having done that, we can remove its setting of NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT
without fear of causing problems. This means that the API guarantees
of IsInTransactionBlock now diverge from PreventInTransactionBlock,
which is mildly annoying, but it seems OK given the very limited usage
of IsInTransactionBlock. (In any case, a caller preferring the old
behavior could always set NEEDIMMEDIATECOMMIT for itself.)
For consistency also require XACT_FLAGS_PIPELINING to not be set
in PreventInTransactionBlock. This too is meant to prevent commands
such as CREATE DATABASE from silently committing previous commands
in a pipeline.
Per report from Peter Eisentraut. As before, back-patch to all
supported branches (which sadly no longer includes v10).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/65a899dd-aebc-f667-1d0a-abb89ff3abf8@enterprisedb.com
During ALTER TABLE execution, when prep-time handling of subcommands of
certain types determine that execution-time handling requires recursion,
they signal this by changing the subcommand type to a special value.
This can be done in a simpler way by using a separate flag introduced by
commit ec0925c22a, so do that.
Catversion bumped. It's not clear to me that ALTER TABLE subcommands
are stored anywhere in catalogs (CREATE FUNCTION rejects it in BEGIN
ATOMIC function bodies), but we do have both write and read support for
them, so be safe.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220929090033.zxuaezcdwh2fgfjb@alvherre.pgsql
This requires a bit of further infrastructure-extension to allow
trapping errors reported by numeric_in and pg_unicode_to_server,
but otherwise it's pretty straightforward.
In the case of jsonb_in, we are only capturing errors reported
during the initial "parse" phase. The value-construction phase
(JsonbValueToJsonb) can also throw errors if assorted implementation
limits are exceeded. We should improve that, but it seems like a
separable project.
Andrew Dunstan and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bac9841-fe07-713d-fa42-606c225567d6@dunslane.net
Formerly, semantic action functions for the JSON parser returned void,
so that there was no way for them to affect the parser's behavior.
That means in particular that they can't force an error exit except by
longjmp'ing. That won't do in the context of our project to make input
functions return errors softly. Hence, change them to return the same
JsonParseErrorType enum value as the parser itself uses. If an action
function returns anything besides JSON_SUCCESS, the parse is abandoned
and that error code is returned.
Action functions can thus easily return the same error conditions that
the parser already knows about. As an escape hatch for expansion, also
invent a code JSON_SEM_ACTION_FAILED that the core parser does not know
the exact meaning of. When returning this code, an action function
must use some out-of-band mechanism for reporting the error details.
This commit simply makes the API change and causes all the existing
action functions to return JSON_SUCCESS, so that there is no actual
change in behavior here. This is long enough and boring enough that
it seemed best to commit it separately from the changes that make
real use of the new mechanism.
In passing, remove a duplicate assignment of
transform_string_values_scalar.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1436686.1670701118@sss.pgh.pa.us
Replace the error trapping scheme introduced in 5bc450629 with our
shiny new errsave/ereturn mechanism. This doesn't have any real
functional impact (although I think that the new coding is able
to report a few more errors softly than v15 did). And I doubt
there's any measurable performance difference either. But this
gets rid of an ad-hoc, one-of-a-kind design in favor of a mechanism
that will be widely used going forward, so it should be a net win
for code readability.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
This patch converts the input functions for date, time, timetz,
timestamp, timestamptz, and interval to the new soft-error style.
There's some related stuff in formatting.c that remains to be
cleaned up, but that seems like a separable project.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
Pay down some ancient technical debt (dating to commit 022fd9966):
fix a couple of places in datetime parsing that were throwing
ereport's immediately instead of returning a DTERR code that could be
interpreted by DateTimeParseError. The reason for that was that there
was no mechanism for passing any auxiliary data (such as a zone name)
to DateTimeParseError, and these errors seemed to really need it.
Up to now it didn't matter that much just where the error got thrown,
but now we'd like to have a hard policy that datetime parse errors
get thrown from just the one place.
Hence, invent a "DateTimeErrorExtra" struct that can be used to
carry any extra values needed for specific DTERR codes. Perhaps
in the future somebody will be motivated to use this to improve
the specificity of other DateTimeParseError messages, but for now
just deal with the timezone-error cases.
This is on the way to making the datetime input functions report
parse errors softly; but it's really an independent change, so
commit separately.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
More could be done in this line, but I just grabbed some low-hanging
fruit. Principal objective was to remove the need for several ugly
unconstify() usages in formatting.c.
This patch converts the input functions for bool, int2, int4, int8,
float4, float8, numeric, and contrib/cube to the new soft-error style.
array_in and record_in are also converted. There's lots more to do,
but this is enough to provide proof-of-concept that the soft-error
API is usable, as well as reference examples for how to convert
input functions.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
pg_input_is_valid() returns boolean, while pg_input_error_message()
returns the primary error message if the input is bad, or NULL
if the input is OK. The main reason for having two functions is
so that we can test both the details-wanted and the no-details-wanted
code paths.
Although these are primarily designed with testing in mind,
it could well be that they'll be useful to end users as well.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
Postgres' standard mechanism for reporting errors (ereport() or elog())
is used for all sorts of error conditions. This means that throwing
an exception via ereport(ERROR) requires an expensive transaction or
subtransaction abort and cleanup, since the exception catcher dare not
make many assumptions about what has gone wrong. There are situations
where we would rather have a lighter-weight mechanism for dealing
with errors that are known to be safe to recover from without a full
transaction cleanup. This commit creates infrastructure to let us
adapt existing error-reporting code for that purpose. See the
included documentation changes for details. Follow-on commits will
provide test code and usage examples.
The near-term plan is to convert most if not all datatype input
functions to report invalid input "softly". This will enable
implementing some SQL/JSON features cleanly and without the cost
of subtransactions, and it will also allow creating COPY options
to deal with bad input without cancelling the whole COPY.
This patch is mostly by me, but it owes very substantial debt to
earlier work by Nikita Glukhov, Andrew Dunstan, and Amul Sul.
Thanks also to Andres Freund for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3bbbb0df-7382-bf87-9737-340ba096e034@postgrespro.ru
The USER SET flag specifies that the variable should be set on behalf of an
ordinary role. That lets ordinary roles set placeholder variables, which
permission requirements are not known yet. Such a value wouldn't be used if
the variable finally appear to require superuser privileges.
The new flags are stored in the pg_db_role_setting.setuser array. Catversion
is bumped.
This commit is inspired by the previous work by Steve Chavez.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdsLd6E--epnGqXENqLP6dLwuNZrPMcNYb3wJ87WR7UBOQ%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov, Steve Chavez
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov, Steve Chavez
Make the argument types of the File API match stdio better:
- Change the data buffer to void *, from char *.
- Change FileWrite() data buffer to const on top of that.
- Change amounts to size_t, from int.
In passing, change the FilePrefetch() amount argument from int to
off_t, to match the underlying posix_fadvise().
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/11dda853-bb5b-59ba-a746-e168b1ce4bdb%40enterprisedb.com
In commit ffbb7e65a, I added a ModifyTableState member to ResultRelInfo
to save the owning ModifyTableState for use by nodeModifyTable.c when
performing batch inserts, but as pointed out by Tom Lane, that changed
the array stride of es_result_relations, and that would break any
previously-compiled extension code that accesses that array. Fix by
removing that member from ResultRelInfo and instead adding a List member
at the end of EState to save such ModifyTableStates.
Per report from Tom Lane. Back-patch to v14, like the previous commit;
I chose to apply the patch to HEAD as well, to make back-patching easy.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/4065383.1669395453%40sss.pgh.pa.us
After restart, we don't perform streaming of an in-progress transaction if
it was previously decoded and confirmed by the client. To achieve that we
were comparing the END location of the WAL record being decoded with the
WAL location we have already decoded and confirmed by the client. While
decoding the commit record, to decide whether to process and send the
complete transaction, we compare its START location with the WAL location
we have already decoded and confirmed by the client. Now, if we need to
queue some change in the transaction while decoding the commit record
(e.g. snapshot), it is possible that we decide to stream the transaction
but later commit processing decides to skip it. In such a case, we would
needlessly send the changes and later when we decide to skip it, we will
send stream abort.
We also sometimes decide to stream the changes when we actually just need
to process them locally like a change for invalidations. This will lead us
to send empty streams. To avoid this, while queuing each change for
decoding, we remember whether the transaction has any change that actually
needs to be sent downstream and use that information later to decide
whether to stream the transaction or not.
Note, we can't avoid all cases where we have to send empty streams like
the case where the plugin later decides that the change is not
publishable. However, we will no longer need to send stream_abort when we
skip sending a particular transaction.
Author: Dilip Kumar
Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie, Ashutosh Bapat, Shi yu, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFiTN-tHK=7LzfrPs8fbT2ksrOJGQbzywcgXst2bM9-rJJAAUg@mail.gmail.com
Generate a Makefile.global that's complete enough for PGXS to work for some
extensions. It is likely that this compatibility layer will not suffice for
every extension and not all platforms - we can expand it over time.
This allows extensions to use a single buildsystem across all the supported
postgres versions. Once all supported PG versions support meson, we can remove
the compatibility layer.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221005200710.luvw5evhwf6clig6@awork3.anarazel.de
The same code pattern is repeated 21 times for int64 counters (0 for
missing entry) and 5 times for doubles (0 for missing entry) on database
entries. This code is switched to use macros for the basic code
instead, shaving a few hundred lines of originally-duplicated code
patterns. The function names remain the same, but some fields of
PgStat_StatDBEntry have to be renamed to cope with the new style.
This is in the same spirit as 83a1a1b.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y46stlxQ2LQE20Na@paquier.xyz
Currently, information about the permissions to be checked on relations
mentioned in a query is stored in their range table entries. So the
executor must scan the entire range table looking for relations that
need to have permissions checked. This can make the permission checking
part of the executor initialization needlessly expensive when many
inheritance children are present in the range range. While the
permissions need not be checked on the individual child relations, the
executor still must visit every range table entry to filter them out.
This commit moves the permission checking information out of the range
table entries into a new plan node called RTEPermissionInfo. Every
top-level (inheritance "root") RTE_RELATION entry in the range table
gets one and a list of those is maintained alongside the range table.
This new list is initialized by the parser when initializing the range
table. The rewriter can add more entries to it as rules/views are
expanded. Finally, the planner combines the lists of the individual
subqueries into one flat list that is passed to the executor for
checking.
To make it quick to find the RTEPermissionInfo entry belonging to a
given relation, RangeTblEntry gets a new Index field 'perminfoindex'
that stores the corresponding RTEPermissionInfo's index in the query's
list of the latter.
ExecutorCheckPerms_hook has gained another List * argument; the
signature is now:
typedef bool (*ExecutorCheckPerms_hook_type) (List *rangeTable,
List *rtePermInfos,
bool ereport_on_violation);
The first argument is no longer used by any in-core uses of the hook,
but we leave it in place because there may be other implementations that
do. Implementations should likely scan the rtePermInfos list to
determine which operations to allow or deny.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqGjJDmUhDSfv-U2qhKJjt9ST7Xh9JXC_irsAQ1TAUsJYg@mail.gmail.com
The same code pattern is repeated 17 times for int64 counters (0 for
missing entry) and 5 times for timestamps (NULL for missing entry) on
table entries. This code is switched to use a macro for the basic code
instead, shaving a few hundred lines of originally-duplicated code. The
function names remain the same, but some fields of PgStat_StatTabEntry
have to be renamed to cope with the new style.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https:/postgr.es/m/20221204173207.GA2669116@nathanxps13
A couple of places weren't up to speed for this. By sheer good
luck, we didn't fail but just selected a non-memoized join plan,
at least in the test case we have. Nonetheless, it's a bug,
and I'm not quite sure that it couldn't have worse consequences
in other examples. So back-patch to v14 where Memoize came in.
Richard Guo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs48GkNom272sfp0-WeD6_0HSR19BJ4H1c9ZKSfbVnJsvRg@mail.gmail.com
Just because I'm a neatnik, and I'm currently working on
code in this area. It annoys me to not be able to pgindent
my patches without working around unrelated changes.
It seems better to deal with this by explicit annotations on the
fields in question, instead of magic knowledge embedded in the
script. While that creates a risk-of-omission from failing to
annotate fields, the preceding commit should catch any such
oversights.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/263413.1669513145@sss.pgh.pa.us
ri_RootToPartitionMap is currently only initialized for tuple routing
target partitions, though a future commit will need the ability to use
it even for the non-partition child tables, so make adjustments to the
decouple it from the partitioning code.
Also, make it lazily initialized via ExecGetRootToChildMap(), making
that function its preferred access path. Existing third-party code
accessing it directly should no longer do so; consequently, it's been
renamed to ri_RootToChildMap, which also makes it consistent with
ri_ChildToRootMap.
ExecGetRootToChildMap() houses the logic of setting the map appropriately
depending on whether a given child relation is partition or not.
To support this, also add a separate entry point for TupleConversionMap
creation that receives an AttrMap. No new code here, just split an
existing function in two.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqEYUhDXSK5BTvG_xk=eaAEJCD4GS3C6uH7ybBvv+Z_Tmg@mail.gmail.com
For Updates and Deletes, we were not honoring the columns list for old
tuple values while sending tuple data via pgoutput. This results in
pgoutput emitting more columns than expected.
This is not a problem for built-in logical replication as we simply ignore
additional columns based on the relation information sent previously which
didn't have those columns. However, some other users of pgoutput plugin
may expect the columns as per the column list. Also, sending extra columns
unnecessarily consumes network bandwidth defeating the purpose of the
column list feature.
Reported-by: Gunnar Morling
Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 15
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADGJaX9kiRZ-OH0EpWF5Fkyh1ZZYofoNRCrhapBfdk02tj5EKg@mail.gmail.com
The planner will now add a given PartitioPruneInfo to
PlannedStmt.partPruneInfos instead of directly to the
Append/MergeAppend plan node. What gets set instead in the
latter is an index field which points to the list element
of PlannedStmt.partPruneInfos containing the PartitioPruneInfo
belonging to the plan node.
A later commit will make AcquireExecutorLocks() do the initial
partition pruning to determine a minimal set of partitions to be
locked when validating a plan tree and it will need to consult the
PartitioPruneInfos referenced therein to do so. It would be better
for the PartitioPruneInfos to be accessible directly than requiring
a walk of the plan tree to find them, which is easier when it can be
done by simply iterating over PlannedStmt.partPruneInfos.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFGkMSge6TgC9KQzde0ohpAycLQuV7ooitEEpbKB0O_mg@mail.gmail.com
A future commit will move the checkAsUser field from RangeTblEntry
to a new node that, unlike RTEs, will only be created for tables
mentioned in the query but not for the inheritance child relations
added to the query by the planner. So, checkAsUser value for a
given child relation will have to be obtained by referring to that
for its ancestor mentioned in the query.
In preparation, it seems better to expand the use of RelOptInfo.userid
during planning in place of rte->checkAsUser so that there will be
fewer places to adjust for the above change.
Given that the child-to-ancestor mapping is not available during the
execution of a given "child" ForeignScan node, add a checkAsUser
field to ForeignScan to carry the child relation's RelOptInfo.userid.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqGFCs2uq7VRKi7g+FFKbP6Ea_2_HkgZb2HPhUfaAKT3ng@mail.gmail.com
This commit moves the code in charge of deparsing the method and detail
strings fed later to parse_compress_specification() to a common routine,
where the backward-compatible case of only an integer being found (N
= 0 => "none", N > 1 => gzip at level N) is handled.
Note that this has a side-effect for pg_basebackup, as we now attempt to
detect "server-" and "client-" before checking for the integer-only
pre-14 grammar, where values like server-N and client-N (without the
follow-up detail string) are now valid rather than failing because of an
unsupported method name. Past grammars are still handled the same way,
but these flavors are now authorized, and would now switch to consider N
= 0 as no compression and N > 1 as gzip with the compression level used
as N, with the caller still controlling if the compression method should
be done server-side, client-side or is unspecified. The documentation
of pg_basebackup is updated to reflect that.
This benefits other code paths that would like to rely on the same logic
as pg_basebackup and pg_receivewal with option values used for
compression specifications, one area discussed lately being pg_dump.
Author: Georgios Kokolatos, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/O4mutIrCES8ZhlXJiMvzsivT7ztAMja2lkdL1LJx6O5f22I2W8PBIeLKz7mDLwxHoibcnRAYJXm1pH4tyUNC4a8eDzLn22a6Pb1S74Niexg=@pm.me
Previously, we'd compress only when the active range of array entries
reached Max(4 * PROCARRAY_MAXPROCS, 2 * pArray->numKnownAssignedXids).
If max_connections is large, the first term could result in not
compressing for a long time, resulting in much wastage of cycles in
hot-standby backends scanning the array to take snapshots. Get rid
of that term, and just bound it to 2 * pArray->numKnownAssignedXids.
That however creates the opposite risk, that we might spend too much
effort compressing. Hence, consider compressing only once every 128
commit records. (This frequency was chosen by benchmarking. While
we only tried one benchmark scenario, the results seem stable over
a fairly wide range of frequencies.)
Also, force compression when processing RecoveryInfo WAL records
(which should be infrequent); the old code could perform compression
then, but would do so only after the same array-range check as for
the transaction-commit path.
Also, opportunistically run compression if the startup process is about
to wait for WAL, though not oftener than once a second. This should
prevent cases where we waste lots of time by leaving the array
not-compressed for long intervals due to low WAL traffic.
Lastly, add a simple check to keep us from uselessly compressing
when the array storage is already compact.
Back-patch, as the performance problem is worse in pre-v14 branches
than in HEAD.
Simon Riggs and Michail Nikolaev, with help from Tom Lane and
Andres Freund.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALdSSPgahNUD_=pB_j=1zSnDBaiOtqVfzo8Ejt5J_k7qZiU1Tw@mail.gmail.com
When it's given as true, return a 0 in the position of the missing
column rather than raising an error.
This is currently unused, but it allows us to reimplement column
permission checking in a subsequent commit. It seems worth breaking
into a separate commit because it affects unrelated code.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+HiwqFfiai=qBxPDTjaio_ZcaqUKh+FC=prESrB8ogZgFNNNQ@mail.gmail.com
Previously, an idle startup (recovery) process would wake up every 5
seconds to have a chance to poll for promote_trigger_file, even if that
GUC was not configured. That promotion triggering mechanism was
effectively superseded by pg_ctl promote and pg_promote() a long time
ago. There probably aren't many users left and it's very easy to change
to the modern mechanisms, so we agreed to remove the feature.
This is part of a campaign to reduce wakeups on idle systems.
Author: Simon Riggs <simon.riggs@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Ian Lawrence Barwick <barwick@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANbhV-FsjnzVOQGBpQ589%3DnWuL1Ex0Ykn74Nh1hEjp2usZSR5g%40mail.gmail.com
This provides two new predefined roles: pg_vacuum_all_tables and
pg_analyze_all_tables. Roles which have been granted these roles can
perform vacuum or analyse respectively on any or all tables as if they
were a superuser. This removes the need to grant superuser privilege to
roles just so they can perform vacuum and/or analyze.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
Currently a table can only be vacuumed or analyzed by its owner or
a superuser. This can now be extended to any user by means of an
appropriate GRANT.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
Commit b663a4136, which allowed FDWs to INSERT rows in bulk, added to
nodeModifyTable.c code to flush pending inserts to the foreign-table
result relation(s) before completing processing of the ModifyTable node,
but the code failed to take into account the case where the INSERT query
has modifying CTEs, leading to incorrect results.
Also, that commit failed to flush pending inserts before firing BEFORE
ROW triggers so that rows are visible to such triggers.
In that commit we scanned through EState's
es_tuple_routing_result_relations or es_opened_result_relations list to
find the foreign-table result relations to which pending inserts are
flushed, but that would be inefficient in some cases. So to fix, 1) add
a List member to EState to record the insert-pending result relations,
and 2) modify nodeModifyTable.c so that it adds the foreign-table result
relation to the list in ExecInsert() if appropriate, and flushes pending
inserts properly using the list where needed.
While here, fix a copy-and-pasteo in a comment in ExecBatchInsert(),
which was added by that commit.
Back-patch to v14 where that commit appeared.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPmGK16qutyCmyJJzgQOhfBq%3DNoGDqTB6O0QBZTihrbqre%2BoxA%40mail.gmail.com
The code has been assuming already in a few places that the initial
recursion nesting depth is 0, and the recent changes in hba.c (mainly
783e8c6) have relies on this assumption in more places. The maximum
recursion nesting level is assumed to be 10 for hba.c and GUCs.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221124090724.n7amf5kpdhx6vb76@jrouhaud
pg_hba.conf and pg_ident.conf gain support for three record keywords:
- "include", to include a file.
- "include_if_exists", to include a file, ignoring it if missing.
- "include_dir", to include a directory of files. These are classified
by name (C locale, mostly) and need to be prefixed by ".conf", hence
following the same rules as GUCs.
This commit relies on the refactoring pieces done in efc9816, ad6c528,
783e8c6 and 1b73d0b, adding a small wrapper to build a list of
TokenizedAuthLines (tokenize_include_file), and the code is shaped to
offer some symmetry with what is done for GUCs with the same options.
pg_hba_file_rules and pg_ident_file_mappings gain a new field called
file_name, to track from which file a record is located, taking
advantage of the addition of rule_number in c591300 to offer an
organized view of the HBA or ident records loaded.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
When building hash indexes using the spool method, tuples are added to the
index page in hashkey order. Because of this, we can safely skip
performing the binary search on the existing tuples on the page to find
the location to insert the tuple based on its hashkey value. For this
case, we can just always put the tuple at the end of the item array as the
tuples will always arrive in hashkey order.
Testing has shown that this can improve hash index build speeds by 5-15%
with a unique set of integer values.
Author: Simon Riggs
Reviewed-by: David Rowley
Tested-by: David Zhang, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANbhV-GBc5JoG0AneUGPZZW3o4OK5LjBGeKe_icpC3R1McrZWQ@mail.gmail.com
The list of TokenizedAuthLines generated at parsing for the HBA and
ident files is now stored in a static context called tokenize_context,
where only all the parsed tokens are stored. This context is created
when opening the first authentication file of a HBA/ident set (hba_file
or ident_file), and is cleaned up once we are done all the work around
it through a new routine called free_auth_file(). One call of
open_auth_file() should have one matching call of free_auth_file(), the
creation and deletion of the tokenization context is controlled by the
recursion depth of the tokenization.
Rather than having tokenize_auth_file() return a memory context that
includes all the records, the tokenization logic now creates and deletes
one memory context each time this function is called. This will
simplify recursive calls to this routine for the upcoming inclusion
record logic.
While on it, rename tokenize_inc_file() to tokenize_expand_file() as
this would conflict with the upcoming patch that will add inclusion
records for HBA/ident files. An '@' file has its tokens added to an
existing list.
Reloading HBA/indent configuration in a tight loop shows no leaks, as of
one type of test done (with and without -DEXEC_BACKEND).
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y324HvGKiWxW2yxe@paquier.xyz
Some custom table access method may have their tuple format and use custom
executor nodes for their custom scan types. The ability to set a custom slot
would save them from tuple format conversion. Other users of custom executor
nodes may also benefit.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfduJUU6ToecvTyRE_yjxTS80FyPpct4OHaLFk3OEheMTNA@mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov
We're running out of bits for new permissions. This change doubles the
number of permissions we can accomodate from 16 to 32, so the
forthcoming new ones for vacuum/analyze don't exhaust the pool.
Nathan Bossart
Reviewed by: Bharath Rupireddy, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Stephen Frost, Robert
Haas, Mark Dilger, Tom Lane, Corey Huinker, David G. Johnston, Michael
Paquier.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220722203735.GB3996698@nathanxps13
Pass VACUUM parameters (VacuumParams state) to vacuum_set_xid_limits()
directly, rather than passing most individual VacuumParams fields as
separate arguments.
Also make vacuum_set_xid_limits() output parameter symbol names match
those used by its vacuumlazy.c caller.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=TE7gW5DgSahDkf0UEZigFGAoHNNN6EvSrdzC=Kn+hrA@mail.gmail.com
The lwlock wait queue scalability issue fixed in a4adc31f69 was quite hard to
find because of the exponential backoff and because we adjust spins_per_delay
over time within a backend.
To make it easier to find similar issues in the future, add a wait event for
the pg_usleep() in perform_spin_delay(). Showing a wait event while spinning
without sleeping would increase the overhead of spinlocks, which we do not
want.
We may at some later point want to have more granular wait events, but that'd
be a substantial amount of work. This provides at least some insights into
something currently hard to observe.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
https://postgr.es/m/20221120204310.xywrhyxyytsajuuq@awork3.anarazel.de
The Hunspell project moved from Sourceforge to Github sometime
in 2016, so update our links to match the new URL. Backpatch
the doc changes to all supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DC9A662A-360D-4125-A453-5A6CB9C6C4B4@yesql.se
Backpatch-through: v11
I just spent an annoying amount of time reverse-engineering the
100%-undocumented API between ts_headline and the text search
parser's prsheadline function. Add some commentary about that
while it's fresh in mind. Also remove some unused macros in
wparser_def.c.
While at it, I noticed that when commit 78e73e875 added a
CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS call in TS_execute_recurse, it missed
doing so in the parallel function TS_phrase_execute, which
surely needs one just as much.
Back-patch because of the missing CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS.
Might as well back-patch the rest of this too.
The postmaster normally sends SIGQUIT to force-terminate its
child processes after a child crash or immediate-stop request.
If that doesn't result in child exit within a few seconds,
we follow it up with SIGKILL. This patch provides GUC flags
that allow either of these signals to be replaced with SIGABRT.
On typically-configured Unix systems, that will result in a
core dump being produced for each such child. This can be
useful for debugging problems, although it's not something you'd
want to have on in production due to the risk of disk space
bloat from lots of core files.
The old postmaster -T switch, which sent SIGSTOP in place of
SIGQUIT, is changed to be the same as send_abort_for_crash.
As far as I can tell from the code comments, the intent of
that switch was just to block things for long enough to force
core dumps manually, which seems like an unnecessary extra step.
(Maybe at the time, there was no way to get most kernels to
produce core files with per-PID names, requiring manual core
file renaming after each one. But now it's surely the hard way.)
I also took the opportunity to remove the old postmaster -n
(skip shmem reinit) switch, which hasn't actually done anything
in decades, though the documentation still claimed it did.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2251016.1668797294@sss.pgh.pa.us
This switch impacts 9 patterns related to a SQL-mandated special syntax
for function calls:
- LOCALTIME [ ( typmod ) ]
- LOCALTIMESTAMP [ ( typmod ) ]
- CURRENT_TIME [ ( typmod ) ]
- CURRENT_TIMESTAMP [ ( typmod ) ]
- CURRENT_DATE
Five new entries are added to pg_proc to compensate the removal of
SQLValueFunction to provide backward-compatibility and making this
change transparent for the end-user (for example for the attribute
generated when a keyword is specified in a SELECT or in a FROM clause
without an alias, or when specifying something else than an Iconst to
the parser).
The parser included a set of checks coming from the files in charge of
holding the C functions used for the SQLValueFunction calls (as of
transformSQLValueFunction()), which are now moved within each function's
execution path, so this reduces the dependencies between the execution
and the parsing steps. As of this change, all the SQL keywords use the
same paths for their work, relying only on COERCE_SQL_SYNTAX. Like
fb32748, no performance difference has been noticed, while the perf
profiles get reduced with ExecEvalSQLValueFunction() gone.
Bump catalog version.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker, Ted Yu
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YzaG3MoryCguUOym@paquier.xyz
Until now LWLockDequeueSelf() sequentially searched the list of waiters to see
if the current proc is still is on the list of waiters, or has already been
removed. In extreme workloads, where the wait lists are very long, this leads
to a quadratic behavior. #backends iterating over a list #backends
long. Additionally, the likelihood of needing to call LWLockDequeueSelf() in
the first place also increases with the increased length of the wait queue, as
it becomes more likely that a lock is released while waiting for the wait list
lock, which is held for longer during lock release.
Due to the exponential back-off in perform_spin_delay() this is surprisingly
hard to detect. We should make that easier, e.g. by adding a wait event around
the pg_usleep() - but that's a separate patch.
The fix is simple - track whether a proc is currently waiting in the wait list
or already removed but waiting to be woken up in PGPROC->lwWaiting.
In some workloads with a lot of clients contending for a small number of
lwlocks (e.g. WALWriteLock), the fix can substantially increase throughput.
As the quadratic behavior arguably is a bug, we might want to decide to
backpatch this fix in the future.
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221027165914.2hofzp4cvutj6gin@awork3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXktNbG=K8Xi7PSqbofTZozavhaxjatVc14iYaLu4Maag@mail.gmail.com
This commit changes six SQL keywords to use COERCE_SQL_SYNTAX rather
than relying on SQLValueFunction:
- CURRENT_ROLE
- CURRENT_USER
- USER
- SESSION_USER
- CURRENT_CATALOG
- CURRENT_SCHEMA
Among the six, "user", "current_role" and "current_catalog" require
specific SQL functions to allow ruleutils.c to map them to the SQL
keywords these require when using COERCE_SQL_SYNTAX. Having
pg_proc.proname match with the keyword ensures that the compatibility
remains the same when projecting any of these keywords in a FROM clause
to an attribute name when an alias is not specified. This is covered by
the tests added in 2e0d80c, making sure that a correct mapping happens
with each SQL keyword. The three others (current_schema, session_user
and current_user) already have pg_proc entries for this job, so this
brings more consistency between the way such keywords are treated in the
parser, the executor and ruleutils.c.
SQLValueFunction is reduced to half its contents after this change,
simplifying its logic a bit as there is no need to enforce a C collation
anymore for the entries returning a name as a result. I have made a few
performance tests, with a million-ish calls to these keywords without
seeing a difference in run-time or in perf profiles
(ExecEvalSQLValueFunction() is removed from the profiles). The
remaining SQLValueFunctions are now related to timestamps and dates.
Bump catalog version.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YzaG3MoryCguUOym@paquier.xyz
Similar to how the INHERIT option controls whether or not the
permissions of the granted role are automatically available to the
grantee, the new SET permission controls whether or not the grantee
may use the SET ROLE command to assume the privileges of the granted
role.
In addition, the new SET permission controls whether or not it
is possible to transfer ownership of objects to the target role
or to create new objects owned by the target role using commands
such as CREATE DATABASE .. OWNER. We could alternatively have made
this controlled by the INHERIT option, or allow it when either
option is given. An advantage of this approach is that if you
are granted a predefined role with INHERIT TRUE, SET FALSE, you
can't go and create objects owned by that role.
The underlying theory here is that the ability to create objects
as a target role is not a privilege per se, and thus does not
depend on whether you inherit the target role's privileges. However,
it's surely something you could do anyway if you could SET ROLE
to the target role, and thus making it contingent on whether you
have that ability is reasonable.
Design review by Nathan Bossat, Wolfgang Walther, Jeff Davis,
Peter Eisentraut, and Stephen Frost.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmob+zDSRS6JXYrgq0NWdzCXuTNzT5eK54Dn2hhgt17nm8A@mail.gmail.com
Standardize on the name snapshotConflictHorizon for all XID fields from
WAL records that generate recovery conflicts when in hot standby mode.
This supersedes the previous latestRemovedXid naming convention.
The new naming convention places emphasis on how the values are actually
used by REDO routines. How the values are generated during original
execution (details of which vary by record type) is deemphasized. Users
of tools like pg_waldump can now grep for snapshotConflictHorizon to see
all potential sources of recovery conflicts in a standardized way,
without necessarily having to consider which specific record types might
be involved.
Also bring a couple of WAL record types that didn't follow any kind of
naming convention into line. These are heapam's VISIBLE record type and
SP-GiST's VACUUM_REDIRECT record type. Now every WAL record whose REDO
routine calls ResolveRecoveryConflictWithSnapshot() passes through the
snapshotConflictHorizon field from its WAL record. This is follow-up
work to the refactoring from commit 9e540599 that made FREEZE_PAGE WAL
records use a standard snapshotConflictHorizon style XID cutoff.
No bump in XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC, since the underlying format of affected WAL
records doesn't change.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzm2CQUmViUq7Opgk=McVREHSOorYaAjR1ZpLYkRN7_dPw@mail.gmail.com
Implement a data structure that is a List of Bitmapsets, which is
essentially a 2-D boolean array except that the rows need not all
be the same width. Operations such as union and intersection are
meaningful for these, just as they are for Bitmapsets. Eventually
we might build many of the same operations that we have written for
Bitmapsets, but for the first use-case we just need a few.
That first use-case is for antijoin detection: reduce_outer_joins
needs to find the set of Vars that are certain to be non-null in a
successfully joined (not null-extended) left join row, and also
find the set of Vars subject to higher-level IS NULL constraints,
and intersect them. We had been doing this by making Lists of
the Var nodes and then using list_intersect, which works but is
pretty inefficient compared to a bitmapset-like intersection.
Potentially it's O(N^2) if there are a lot of Vars involved,
which fortunately there generally aren't; still it's not great.
Moreover, that method requires the Vars of interest to be exactly
equal() in the join condition and the upper IS NULL condition,
which is problematic for my WIP patch that labels Vars according
to which outer joins have possibly nulled them.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/892228.1668437838@sss.pgh.pa.us
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs4-mvPPCJ1W6iK6dD5HiNwoJdi6mZp=-7mE8N9Sh+cd0tQ@mail.gmail.com
Make heapam WAL records that describe freezing performed by VACUUM more
space efficient by storing each distinct "freeze plan" once, alongside
an array of associated page offset numbers (one per freeze plan). The
freeze plans required for most heap pages tend to naturally have a great
deal of redundancy, so this technique is very effective in practice. It
often leads to freeze WAL records that are less than 20% of the size of
equivalent WAL records generated using the previous approach.
The freeze plan concept was introduced by commit 3b97e6823b, which fixed
bugs in VACUUM's handling of MultiXacts. We retain the concept of
freeze plans, but go back to using page offset number arrays. There is
no loss of generality here because deduplication is an additive process
that gets applied mechanically when FREEZE_PAGE WAL records are built.
More than anything else, freeze plan deduplication is an optimization
that reduces the marginal cost of freezing additional tuples on pages
that will need to have at least one or two tuples frozen in any case.
Ongoing work that adds page-level freezing to VACUUM will take full
advantage of the improved cost profile through batching.
Also refactor some of the details surrounding recovery conflicts needed
to REDO freeze records in passing: make original execution responsible
for generating a standard latestRemovedXid cutoff, rather than working
backwards to get the same cutoff in the REDO routine. Bugfix commit
66fbcb0d2e did it the other way around, which is equivalent but obscures
what's going on.
Also rename the cutoff field from the WAL record/struct (rename the
field cutoff_xid to latestRemovedXid to match similar WAL records).
Processing of conflicts by REDO routines is already completely uniform,
so tools like pg_waldump should present the information driving the
process uniformly. There are two remaining WAL record types that still
don't quite follow this convention (heapam's VISIBLE record type and
SP-GiST's VACUUM_REDIRECT record type). They can be brought into line
by later work that totally standardizes how the cutoffs are presented.
Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC.
Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=XytErMnb8FAyFd+OQEbiipB0Q2FmFdXrggPL4VBnRYQ@mail.gmail.com
This adds a check on the recursion depth when including authentication
configuration files, something that has never been done when processing
'@' files for database and user name lists in pg_hba.conf. On HEAD,
this was leading to a rather confusing error, as of:
FATAL: exceeded maxAllocatedDescs (NN) while trying to open file "/path/blah.conf"
This refactors the code so as the error reported is now the following,
which is the same as for GUCs:
FATAL: could not open file "/path/blah.conf": maximum nesting depth exceeded
This reduces a bit the verbosity of the error message used for files
included in user and database lists, reporting only the file name of
what's failing to load, without mentioning the relative or absolute path
specified after '@' in a HBA file. The absolute path is built upon what
'@' defines anyway, so there is no actual loss of information. This
makes the future inclusion logic much simpler. A follow-up patch will
add an error context to be able to track on which line of which file the
inclusion is failing, to close the loop, providing all the information
needed to know the full chain of events.
This logic has been extracted from a larger patch written by Julien,
rewritten by me to have a unique code path calling AllocateFile() on
authentication files, and is useful on its own. This new interface
will be used later for authentication files included with
@include[_dir,_if_exists], in a follow-up patch.
Author: Michael Paquier, Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/Y2xUBJ+S+Z0zbxRW@paquier.xyz
Add a NodeTag field to struct Bitmapset. This is free because of
alignment considerations on 64-bit hardware. While it adds some
space on 32-bit machines, we aren't optimizing for that case anymore.
The advantage is that data structures such as Lists of Bitmapsets
are now first-class objects to the Node infrastructure, and don't
require special-case code to handle.
This patch includes removal of one such special case, in indxpath.c:
bms_equal_any() can now be replaced by list_member(). There may be
more existing code that could be simplified, but I didn't look very
hard. We also get to drop the read_write_ignore annotations on a
couple of RelOptInfo fields.
The outfuncs/readfuncs support is arranged so that nothing changes
in the string representation of a Bitmapset field; therefore, this
doesn't need a catversion bump.
Amit Langote and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/109089.1668197158@sss.pgh.pa.us
Instead of dozens of mostly-duplicate pg_foo_aclcheck() functions,
write one common function object_aclcheck() that can handle almost all
of them. We already have all the information we need, such as which
system catalog corresponds to which catalog table and which column is
the ACL column.
There are a few pg_foo_aclcheck() that don't work via the generic
function and have special APIs, so those stay as is.
I also changed most pg_foo_aclmask() functions to static functions,
since they are not used outside of aclchk.c.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/95c30f96-4060-2f48-98b5-a4392d3b6066@enterprisedb.com
Instead of dozens of mostly-duplicate pg_foo_ownercheck() functions,
write one common function object_ownercheck() that can handle almost
all of them. We already have all the information we need, such as
which system catalog corresponds to which catalog table and which
column is the owner column.
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/95c30f96-4060-2f48-98b5-a4392d3b6066@enterprisedb.com
It's safe to mark this as immutable, because it does not depend
on the timezone GUC setting. Oversight in commit 600b04d6b.
(There's an argument that timezone definitions do change from
time to time, but we have not worried about that in marking
other timestamp-related functions; for example AT TIME ZONE
has always been considered immutable. The situation is no
worse than our problems with time-varying locales, surely.)
Przemysław Sztoch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/eaa3fabe-50fc-bbe8-b096-ce62ddadab85@sztoch.pl
This routine is designed to write zeros to a file using vectored I/O,
for a size given by its caller, being useful when it comes to
initializing a file with a final size already known.
XLogFileInitInternal() in xlog.c is changed to use this new routine when
initializing WAL segments with zeros (wal_init_zero enabled). Note that
the aligned buffers used for the vectored I/O writes have a size of
XLOG_BLCKSZ, and not BLCKSZ anymore, as pg_pwrite_zeros() relies on
PGAlignedBlock while xlog.c originally used PGAlignedXLogBlock.
This routine will be used in a follow-up patch to do the pre-padding of
WAL segments for pg_receivewal and pg_basebackup when these are not
compressed.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Andres Freund, Thomas Munro, Michael
Paquier
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CALj2ACUq7nAb7%3DbJNbK3yYmp-SZhJcXFR_pLk8un6XgDzDF3OA%40mail.gmail.com
The code in charge of listing and classifying a set of configuration
files in a directory was located in guc-file.l, being used currently for
GUCs under "include_dir". This code is planned to be used for an
upcoming feature able to include configuration files for ident and HBA
files from a directory, similarly to GUCs. In both cases, the file
names, suffixed by ".conf", have to be ordered alphabetically. This
logic is moved to a new file, called conffiles.c, so as it is easier to
share this facility between GUCs and the HBA/ident parsing logic.
Author: Julien Rouhaud, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Y2IgaH5YzIq2b+iR@paquier.xyz
Commit aa0105141 repeated one of the oldest mistakes in our book:
thinking that OID is the same as int32. It isn't of course, and
unsurprisingly the first person who came along with a database
OID above 2 billion broke it. Repair.
Per bug #17677 from Sergey Pankov. Back-patch to v15.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17677-a99fa067d7ed71c9@postgresql.org
Casting the result of palloc etc. to the intended type is more per
project style anyway.
(The fact that cpluspluscheck doesn't notice these problems is
because it doesn't expand any macros, which seems like a troubling
shortcoming. Don't have a good idea about improving that.)
Back-patch to v13, which is as far as the patch applies cleanly;
doesn't seem worth working harder.
David Geier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/aa5d88a3-71f4-3455-11cf-82de0372c941@gmail.com
If we have no special-case code in s_lock.h for the current platform,
but the compiler has __sync_lock_test_and_set, use that instead of
failing. It's unlikely that anybody's __sync_lock_test_and_set
would be so awful as to be worse than our semaphore-based fallback,
but if it is, they can (continue to) use --disable-spinlocks.
This allows removal of the RISC-V special case installed by commit
c32fcac56, which generated exactly the same code but only on that
platform. Usefully, the RISC-V buildfarm animals should now test
at least the int variant of this patch.
I've manually tested both variants on ARM by dint of removing the
ARM-specific stanza. We don't want to drop that, because it already
has some special knowledge and is likely to grow more over time.
Likewise, this is not meant to preclude installing special cases
for other arches if that proves worthwhile.
Per discussion of a request to install the same code for loongarch64.
Like the previous patch, we might as well back-patch to supported
branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/761ac43d44b84d679ba803c2bd947cc0@HSMAILSVR04.hs.handsome.com.cn
We have various requirements when using a dlist_head to keep track of the
number of items in the list. This, traditionally, has been done by
maintaining a counter variable in the calling code. Here we tidy this up
by adding "dclist", which is very similar to dlist but also keeps track of
the number of items stored in the list.
Callers may use the new dclist_count() function when they need to know how
many items are stored. Obtaining the count is an O(1) operation.
For simplicity reasons, dclist and dlist both use dlist_node as their node
type and dlist_iter/dlist_mutable_iter as their iterator type. dclists
have all of the same functionality as dlists except there is no function
named dclist_delete(). To remove an item from a list dclist_delete_from()
must be used. This requires knowing which dclist the given item is stored
in.
Additionally, here we also convert some dlists where additional code
exists to keep track of the number of items stored and to make these use
dclists instead.
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy, Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrtVxr+FXEX0VbViCFKDGxA3tWDgw9oFewNXCJMmwLjLg@mail.gmail.com
This is similar to 7d25958, and this commit takes care of all the
remaining inconsistencies between the initial value used in the C
variable associated to a GUC and its default value stored in the GUC
tables (as of pg_settings.boot_val).
Some of the initial values of the GUCs updated rely on a compile-time
default. These are refactored so as the GUC table and its C declaration
use the same values. This makes everything consistent with other
places, backend_flush_after, bgwriter_flush_after, port,
checkpoint_flush_after doing so already, for example.
Extracted from a larger patch by Peter Smith. The spots updated in the
modules are from me.
Author: Peter Smith, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Tom Lane, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PtHE0XSfjjRQ6D4v7+dqzCw=d+1a64ujra4EX8aoc_Z+w@mail.gmail.com
Here we add a new 'copy' parameter to tuplesort_getdatum so that we can
instruct the function not to datumCopy() byref Datums before returning.
Similar to 91e9e89dc, this can provide significant performance
improvements in nodeSort when sorting by a single byref column and the
sort's targetlist contains only that column.
This allows us to re-enable Datum sorts for byref types which was disabled
in 3a5817695 due to a reported memory leak.
Additionally, here we slightly optimize DISTINCT aggregates so that we no
longer perform any datumCopy() when we find the current value not to be
distinct from the previous value. Previously the code would always take a
copy of the most recent Datum and pfree the previous value, even when the
values were the same. Testing shows a small but noticeable performance
increase when aggregate transitions are skipped due to the current
transition value being the same as the prior one.
Author: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqS6wC5U==k9Hd26E4EQXH3QR67-T4=Q1rQ36NGvjfVSg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqHonfe9G1cVaKeHbDx70R_zCrM3qP2AGXpGrieSKGnhA@mail.gmail.com
This commit moves pg_pwritev_with_retry(), a convenience wrapper of
pg_writev() able to handle partial writes, to common/file_utils.c so
that the frontend code is able to use it. A first use-case targetted
for this routine is pg_basebackup and pg_receivewal, for the
zero-padding of a newly-initialized WAL segment. This is used currently
in the backend when the GUC wal_init_zero is enabled (default).
Author: Bharath Rupireddy
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart, Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACUq7nAb7=bJNbK3yYmp-SZhJcXFR_pLk8un6XgDzDF3OA@mail.gmail.com
These numbers are strictly-monotone identifiers assigned to each rule
of pg_hba_file_rules and each map of pg_ident_file_mappings when loading
the HBA and ident configuration files, indicating the order in which
they are checked at authentication time, until a match is found.
With only one file loaded currently, this is equivalent to the line
numbers assigned to the entries loaded if one wants to know their order,
but this becomes mandatory once the inclusion of external files is
added to the HBA and ident files to be able to know in which order the
rules and/or maps are applied at authentication. Note that NULL is used
when a HBA or ident entry cannot be parsed or validated, aka when an
error exists, contrary to the line number.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
This has the advantage to limit the presence of the GUC values
hba_file and ident_file to the code paths where these files are loaded,
easing the introduction of an upcoming feature aimed at adding inclusion
logic for files and directories in HBA and ident files.
Note that this needs the addition of the source file name to HbaLine, in
addition to the line number, which is something needed by the backend in
two places of auth.c (authentication failure details and auth_id log
when log_connections is enabled).
While on it, adjust a log generated on authentication failure to report
the name of the actual HBA file on which the connection attempt matched,
where the line number and the raw line written in the HBA file were
already included. This was previously hardcoded as pg_hba.conf, which
would be incorrect when a custom value is used at postmaster startup for
the GUC hba_file.
Extracted from a larger patch by the same author.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220223045959.35ipdsvbxcstrhya@jrouhaud
Specifically, when pg_basebackup is invoked with -Tx=y, don't error
out if x could plausibly be an absolute path either on Windows or on
non-Windows systems. We don't know whether the remote system is
running the same OS as the local system, so it's not appropriate to
assume that our local rule about absolute pathnames is the same as
the rule on the remote system.
Patch by me, reviewed by Tom Lane, Andrew Dunstan, and
Davinder Singh.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoY+jC3YiskomvYKDPK3FbrmsDU7_8+wMHt02HOdJeRb0g@mail.gmail.com
AuthToken gains a regular expression, and IdentLine is changed so as it
uses an AuthToken rather than tracking separately the ident user string
used for the regex compilation and its generated regex_t. In the case
of pg_ident.conf, a set of AuthTokens is built in the pre-parsing phase
of the file, and an extra regular expression is compiled when building
the list of IdentLines, after checking the sanity of the fields in a
pre-parsed entry.
The logic in charge of computing and executing regular expressions is
now done in a new set of routines called respectively
regcomp_auth_token() and regexec_auth_token() that are wrappers around
pg_regcomp() and pg_regexec(), working on AuthTokens. While on it, this
patch adds a routine able to free an AuthToken, free_auth_token(), to
simplify a bit the logic around the requirement of using a specific free
routine for computed regular expressions. Note that there are no
functional or behavior changes introduced by this commit.
The goal of this patch is to ease the use of regular expressions with
more items of pg_hba.conf (user list, database list, potentially
hostnames) where AuthTokens are used extensively. This will be tackled
later in a separate patch.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fff0d7c1-8ad4-76a1-9db3-0ab6ec338bf7@amazon.com
These routines have been renamed in a19e5ce. There is no need to keep
the compatibility declarations on HEAD, as once an extension moves to
the new routine name when compiling with v16~ the code would work the
same way when recompiled on v15. No backpatch to v15 for this one,
because ABI compatibility has to be maintained there.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221013194820.ciktb2sbbpw7cljm@awork3.anarazel.de
Per discussion, the existing routine name able to initialize a SRF
function with materialize mode is unpopular, so rename it. Equally, the
flags of this function are renamed, as of:
- SRF_SINGLE_USE_EXPECTED -> MAT_SRF_USE_EXPECTED_DESC
- SRF_SINGLE_BLESS -> MAT_SRF_BLESS
The previous function and flags introduced in 9e98583 are kept around
for compatibility purposes, so as any extension code already compiled
with v15 continues to work as-is. The declarations introduced here for
compatibility will be removed from HEAD in a follow-up commit.
The new names have been suggested by Andres Freund and Melanie
Plageman.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20221013194820.ciktb2sbbpw7cljm@awork3.anarazel.de
Backpatch-through: 15
When creating a cast that uses a conversion function, we've
historically allowed the input and result types to be
binary-compatible with the function's input and result types,
rather than necessarily being identical. This means that the new
cast is logically dependent on the binary-compatible cast or casts
that it references: if those are defined by pg_cast entries, and you
try to restore the new cast without having defined them, it'll fail.
Hence, we should make pg_depend entries to record these dependencies
so that pg_dump knows that there is an ordering requirement.
This is not the only place where we allow such shortcuts; aggregate
functions for example are similarly lax, and in principle should gain
similar dependencies. However, for now it seems sufficient to fix
the cast-versus-cast case, as pg_dump's other ordering heuristics
should keep it out of trouble for other object types.
Per report from David Turoň; thanks also to Robert Haas for
preliminary investigation. I considered back-patching, but
seeing that this issue has existed for many years without
previous reports, it's not clear it's worth the trouble.
Moreover, back-patching wouldn't be enough to ensure that the
new pg_depend entries exist in existing databases anyway.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OF0A160F3E.578B15D1-ONC12588DA.003E4857-C12588DA.0045A428@notes.linuxbox.cz
In the latest version of Apple's macOS SDK, <sys/socket.h>
fails to compile if "REF" is #define'd as something.
Apple may or may not agree that this is a bug, and even if
they do accept the bug report I filed, they probably won't
fix it very quickly. In the meantime, our back branches will all
fail to compile gram.y. v15 and HEAD currently escape the problem
thanks to the refactoring done in 98e93a1fc, but that's purely
accidental. Moreover, since that patch removed a widely-visible
inclusion of <netdb.h>, back-patching it seems too likely to break
third-party code.
Instead, change the token's code name to REF_P, following our usual
convention for naming parser tokens that are likely to have symbol
conflicts. The effects of that should be localized to the grammar
and immediately surrounding files, so it seems like a safer answer.
Per project policy that we want to keep recently-out-of-support
branches buildable on modern systems, back-patch all the way to 9.2.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1803927.1665938411@sss.pgh.pa.us
It can be useful to know when a relation has last been used, e.g., when
evaluating whether an index is still required. It was already possible to
infer the time of the last usage by tracking, e.g.,
pg_stat_all_indexes.idx_scan over time. But far from everybody does so.
To make it easier to detect the last time a relation has been scanned, track
that time in each relation's pgstat entry. To minimize overhead a) the
timestamp is updated only when the backend pending stats entry is flushed to
shared stats b) the last transaction's stop timestamp is used as the
timestamp.
Bumps catalog and stats format versions.
Author: Dave Page <dpage@pgadmin.org>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bruce Momjian <bruce@momjian.us>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+OCxozrVHNFVEPkweUHMZje+t1tfY816d9MZYc6eZwOOusOaQ@mail.gmail.com
The previous patch made addition of new GUCs cheap, but other GUC
operations aren't improved and indeed get a bit slower, because
hash_seq_search() is slower than just scanning a pointer array.
However, most performance-critical GUC operations only need
to touch a relatively small fraction of the GUCs; especially
so for AtEOXact_GUC(). We can improve matters at the cost
of a bit more space by adding dlist or slist links to the
GUC data structures. This patch invents lists that track
(1) all GUCs with non-default "source";
(2) all GUCs with nonempty state stack (implying they've
been changed in the current transaction);
(3) all GUCs due for reporting to the client.
All of guc.c's performance-critical cases can make use of one or
another of these lists to avoid searching the whole hash table.
In particular, the stack list means that transaction end
doesn't take time proportional to the number of GUCs, but
only to the number changed in the current transaction.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
This gets rid of bsearch() in favor of hashed lookup. The main
advantage is that it becomes far cheaper to add new GUCs, since
we needn't re-sort the pointer array. Adding N new GUCs had
been O(N^2 log N), but now it's closer to O(N). We need to
sort only in SHOW ALL and equivalent functions, which are
hopefully not performance-critical to anybody.
Also, merge GetNumConfigOptions() into get_guc_variables(),
because in a world where the set of GUCs isn't fairly static
you really want to consider those two results as tied together
not independent.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
The only real argument for using malloc directly was that we needed
the ability to not throw error on OOM; but mcxt.c grew that feature
awhile ago.
Keeping the data in a memory context improves accountability and
debuggability --- for example, without this it's almost impossible
to detect memory leaks in the GUC code with anything less costly
than valgrind. Moreover, the next patch in this series will add a
hash table for GUC lookup, and it'd be pretty silly to be using
palloc-dependent hash facilities alongside malloc'd storage of the
underlying data.
This is a bit invasive though, in particular causing an API break
for GUC check hooks that want to modify the GUC's value or use an
"extra" data structure. They must now use guc_malloc() and
guc_free() instead of malloc() and free(). Failure to change
affected code will result in assertion failures or worse; but
thanks to recent effort in the mcxt infrastructure, it shouldn't
be too hard to diagnose such oversights (at least in assert-enabled
builds).
One note is that this changes ParseLongOption() to return short-lived
palloc'd not malloc'd data. There wasn't any caller for which the
previous definition was better.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
We lack a version of repalloc() that supports MCXT_ALLOC_NO_OOM
semantics, so invent repalloc_extended() with the usual set of
flags. repalloc_huge() becomes a legacy wrapper for that.
Also, fix dynahash.c so that it can support HASH_ENTER_NULL
requests when using the default palloc-based allocator.
The only reason it didn't do that already was the lack of the
MCXT_ALLOC_NO_OOM option when that code was written, ages ago.
While here, simplify a few overcomplicated tests in mcxt.c.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2982579.1662416866@sss.pgh.pa.us
Commit 3d956d956 allowed the COPY, but it's done by inserting individual
rows to the foreign table, so it can be inefficient due to the overhead
caused by each round-trip to the foreign server. To improve performance
of the COPY in such a case, this patch allows batch insertion, by
extending the multi-insert machinery in CopyFrom() to the foreign-table
case so that we insert multiple rows to the foreign table at once using
the FDW callback routine added by commit b663a4136. This patch also
allows this for postgres_fdw. It is enabled by the "batch_size" option
added by commit b663a4136, which is disabled by default.
When doing batch insertion, we update progress of the COPY command after
performing the FDW callback routine, to count rows not suppressed by the
FDW as well as a BEFORE ROW INSERT trigger. For consistency, this patch
changes the timing of updating it for plain tables: previously, we
updated it immediately after adding each row to the multi-insert buffer,
but we do so only after writing the rows stored in the buffer out to the
table using table_multi_insert(), which I think would be consistent even
with non-batching mode, because in that mode we update it after writing
each row out to the table using table_tuple_insert().
Andrey Lepikhov, heavily revised by me, with review from Ian Barwick,
Andrey Lepikhov, and Zhihong Yu.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bc489202-9855-7550-d64c-ad2d83c24867%40postgrespro.ru
This file needs xlogreader.h only for the XLogReaderState typedef; but
we can dodge that by forward-declaring it. Many files use xlog.h for
reasons other than reading WAL, and it's not good to force all those
files to include xlogreader.h, so take it out.
Surprisingly, there is no fallout in core code from making this change.
Perhaps external code will have to start including xlogreader.h.
Make a common replication origin name formatting function to replace
multiple snprintf() expressions. This also includes logic previously done
by ReplicationOriginNameForTablesync().
This makes the code to generate the origin name consistent among apply
worker and tablesync worker.
Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-By: Aleksander Alekseev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut%2BPsa8hhfSE6ozUK-ih7GkQziAVAf4f3bqiXEj2nQiu-43g%40mail.gmail.com
This is useful as a way for extensions to process COPY TO rows in the
way they see fit (say auditing, analytics, backend, etc.) without the
need to invoke an external process running as the OS user running the
backend through PROGRAM that requires superuser rights. COPY FROM
already provides a similar callback for logical replication. For COPY
TO, the callback is triggered when we are ready to send a row in
CopySendEndOfRow(), which is the same code path as when sending a row
to a frontend or a pipe/file.
A small test module, test_copy_callbacks, is added to provide some
coverage for this facility.
Author: Bilva Sanaba, Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/253C21D1-FCEB-41D9-A2AF-E6517015B7D7@amazon.com
Remove the Trap and TrapMacro macros, which were nearly unused
and confusingly had the opposite condition polarity from the
otherwise-functionally-equivalent Assert macros.
Having done that, it's very hard to justify carrying the errorType
argument of ExceptionalCondition, so drop that too, and just
let it assume everything's an Assert. This saves about 64K
of code space as of current HEAD.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3928703.1665345117@sss.pgh.pa.us
Instead of Abs() for int64, use the C standard functions labs() or
llabs() as appropriate. Define a small wrapper around them that
matches our definition of int64. (labs() is C90, llabs() is C99.)
Reviewed-by: Zhang Mingli <zmlpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4beb42b5-216b-bce8-d452-d924d5794c63%40enterprisedb.com
Previously PgStat_StatReplSlotEntry contained the slotname, which was mainly
used when writing out the stats during shutdown, to identify the slot in the
serialized data (at runtime the index in ReplicationSlotCtl->replication_slots
is used, but that can change during a restart). Unfortunately the slotname was
overwritten when the slot's stats were reset.
That turned out to only cause "real" problems if the slot was active during
the reset, triggering an assertion failure at the next
pgstat_report_replslot(). In other paths the stats were re-initialized during
pgstat_acquire_replslot().
Fix this by removing slotname from PgStat_StatReplSlotEntry. Instead we can
get the slot's name from the slot itself. Besides fixing a bug, this also is
architecturally cleaner (a name is not really statistics). This is safe
because stats, for a slot removed while shut down, will not be restored at
startup.
In 15 the slotname is not removed, but renamed, to avoid changing the stats
format. In master, bump PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID.
This commit does not contain a test for the fix. I think this can only be
tested by a tap test starting pg_recvlogical in the background and checking
pg_recvlogical's output. That type of test is notoriously hard to be reliable,
so committing it shortly before the release is wrapped seems like a bad idea.
Reported-by: Jaime Casanova <jcasanov@systemguards.com.ec>
Author: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YxfagaTXUNa9ggLb@ahch-to
Backpatch: 15-, where the bug was introduced in 5891c7a8ed
Commit c6e0fe1f2 was a shade too trusting that any pointer passed
to pfree, repalloc, etc will point at a valid chunk. Notably,
passing a pointer that was actually obtained from malloc tended
to result in obscure assertion failures, if not worse. (On FreeBSD
I've seen such mistakes take down the entire cluster, seemingly as
a result of clobbering shared memory.)
To improve matters, extend the mcxt_methods[] array so that it
has entries for every possible MemoryContextMethodID bit-pattern,
with the currently unassigned ID codes pointing to error-reporting
functions. Then, fiddle with the ID assignments so that patterns
likely to be associated with bad pointers aren't valid ID codes.
In particular, we should avoid assigning bit patterns 000 (zeroed
memory) and 111 (wipe_mem'd memory).
It turns out that on glibc (Linux), malloc uses chunk headers that
have flag bits in the same place we keep MemoryContextMethodID,
and that the bit patterns 000, 001, 010 are the only ones we'll
see as long as the backend isn't threaded. So we can have very
robust detection of pfree'ing a malloc-assigned block on that
platform, at least so long as we can refrain from using up those
ID codes. On other platforms, we don't have such a good guarantee,
but keeping 000 reserved will be enough to catch many such cases.
While here, make GetMemoryChunkMethodID() local to mcxt.c, as there
seems no need for it to be exposed even in memutils_internal.h.
Patch by me, with suggestions from Andres Freund and David Rowley.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2910981.1665080361@sss.pgh.pa.us
This substantially speeds up building for windows, due to the vast amount of
headers included via windows.h. A cross build from linux targetting mingw goes
from
994.11user 136.43system 0:31.58elapsed 3579%CPU
to
422.41user 89.05system 0:14.35elapsed 3562%CPU
The wins on windows are similar-ish (but I don't have a system at hand just
now for actual numbers). Targetting other operating systems the wins are far
smaller (tested linux, macOS, FreeBSD).
For now precompiled headers are disabled by default, it's not clear how well
they work on all platforms. E.g. on FreeBSD gcc doesn't seem to have working
support, but clang does.
When doing a full build precompiled headers are only beneficial for targets
with multiple .c files, as meson builds a separate precompiled header for each
target (so that different compilation options take effect). This commit
therefore only changes target with at least two .c files to use precompiled
headers.
Because this commit adds b_pch=false to the default_options new build
directories will have precompiled headers disabled by default, however
existing build directories will continue use the default value of b_pch, which
is true.
Note that using precompiled headers with ccache requires setting
CCACHE_SLOPPINESS=pch_defines,time_macros to get hits.
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKG+50eOUbN++ocDc0Qnp9Pvmou23DSXu=ZA6fepOcftKqA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c5736f70-bb6d-8d25-e35c-e3d886e4e905@enterprisedb.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190826054000.GE7005%40paquier.xyz
MemoryContextContains is no longer reliable in the wake of c6e0fe1f2,
because there's no longer very much redundancy in chunk headers.
(It wasn't *completely* reliable even before that, as there was a
chance of a false positive if you passed it something that didn't
point to an mcxt chunk at all. But it was generally good enough.)
Hence, remove it. There is no remaining core code that requires it.
Extensions that have been using it might be able to substitute a
test like "GetMemoryChunkContext(ptr) == context", recognizing that
this explicitly requires that the pointer point to some chunk.
Tom Lane and David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1913788.1664898906@sss.pgh.pa.us
ts_locale.c omitted support for "isalnum" tests, perhaps on the
grounds that there were initially no use-cases for that. However,
both ltree and pg_trgm need such tests, and we do also have one
use-case now in the core backend. The workaround of testing
isalpha and isdigit separately seems quite inefficient, especially
when dealing with multibyte characters; so let's fill in the
missing support.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2548310.1664999615@sss.pgh.pa.us
This optional parameter can be specified in cases where there are nested
PG_TRY() statements within a function in order to stop the compiler from
issuing warnings about shadowed local variables when compiling with
-Wshadow. The optional parameter is used as a suffix on the variable
names declared within the PG_TRY(), PG_CATCH(), PG_FINALLY() and
PG_END_TRY() macros. The parameter, if specified, must be the same in
each component macro of the given PG_TRY() block.
This also adjusts the single case where we have nested PG_TRY() statements
to add a parameter to the inner-most PG_TRY().
This reduces the number of compiler warnings when compiling with
-Wshadow=compatible-local from 5 down to 1.
Author: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvqWGMdB_pATeUqE=JCtNqNxObPOJ00jFEa2_sZ20j_Wvg@mail.gmail.com
In a similar effort to f01592f91, here we mostly rename shadowed local
variables to remove the warnings produced when compiling with
-Wshadow=compatible-local.
This fixes 63 warnings and leaves just 5.
Author: Justin Pryzby, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby
Discussion https://postgr.es/m/20220817145434.GC26426%40telsasoft.com
This reverts commit db0d67db24 and
several follow-on fixes. The idea of making a cost-based choice
of the order of the sorting columns is not fundamentally unsound,
but it requires cost information and data statistics that we don't
really have. For example, relying on procost to distinguish the
relative costs of different sort comparators is pretty pointless
so long as most such comparator functions are labeled with cost 1.0.
Moreover, estimating the number of comparisons done by Quicksort
requires more than just an estimate of the number of distinct values
in the input: you also need some idea of the sizes of the larger
groups, if you want an estimate that's good to better than a factor of
three or so. That's data that's often unknown or not very reliable.
Worse, to arrive at estimates of the number of calls made to the
lower-order-column comparison functions, the code needs to make
estimates of the numbers of distinct values of multiple columns,
which are necessarily even less trustworthy than per-column stats.
Even if all the inputs are perfectly reliable, the cost algorithm
as-implemented cannot offer useful information about how to order
sorting columns beyond the point at which the average group size
is estimated to drop to 1.
Close inspection of the code added by db0d67db2 shows that there
are also multiple small bugs. These could have been fixed, but
there's not much point if we don't trust the estimates to be
accurate in-principle.
Finally, the changes in cost_sort's behavior made for very large
changes (often a factor of 2 or so) in the cost estimates for all
sorting operations, not only those for multi-column GROUP BY.
That naturally changes plan choices in many situations, and there's
precious little evidence to show that the changes are for the better.
Given the above doubts about whether the new estimates are really
trustworthy, it's hard to summon much confidence that these changes
are better on the average.
Since we're hard up against the release deadline for v15, let's
revert these changes for now. We can always try again later.
Note: in v15, I left T_PathKeyInfo in place in nodes.h even though
it's unreferenced. Removing it would be an ABI break, and it seems
a bit late in the release cycle for that.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB586665EB5FB2C3807E893941F5579@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Up to now, the ID values returned by pg_stat_get_backend_idset() and
used by pg_stat_get_backend_activity() and allied functions were just
indexes into a local array of sessions seen by the last stats refresh.
This is problematic for a few reasons. The "ID" of a session can vary
over its existence, which is surprising. Also, while these numbers
often match the "backend ID" used for purposes like temp schema
assignment, that isn't reliably true. We can fairly cheaply switch
things around to make these numbers actually be the sessions' backend
IDs. The added test case illustrates that with this definition, the
temp schema used by a given session can be obtained given its PID.
While here, delete some dead code that guarded against getting
a NULL return from pgstat_fetch_stat_local_beentry(). That can't
happen as long as the caller is careful to pass an in-range array
index, as all the callers are. (This code may not have been dead
when written, but it surely is now.)
Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220815205811.GA250990@nathanxps13
SYSTEM_USER is a reserved keyword of the SQL specification that,
roughly described, is aimed at reporting some information about the
system user who has connected to the database server. It may include
implementation-specific information about the means by the user
connected, like an authentication method.
This commit implements SYSTEM_USER as of auth_method:identity, where
"auth_method" is a keyword about the authentication method used to log
into the server (like peer, md5, scram-sha-256, gss, etc.) and
"identity" is the authentication identity as introduced by 9afffcb (peer
sets authn to the OS user name, gss to the user principal, etc.). This
format has been suggested by Tom Lane.
Note that thanks to d951052, SYSTEM_USER is available to parallel
workers.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion, Joe Conway, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7e692b8c-0b11-45db-1cad-3afc5b57409f@amazon.com
We'd like to use precompiled headers on windows to reduce compile times. Right
now we rely on defining UMDF_USING_NTSTATUS before including postgres.h in a few
select places - which doesn't work with precompiled headers. Instead define
it globally.
When UMDF_USING_NTSTATUS is defined we need to explicitly include ntstatus.h,
winternl.h to get a comparable set of symbols. Right now these includes would
be required in a number of non-platform-specific .c files - to avoid that,
include them in win32_port.h. Based on my measurements that doesn't increase
compile times measurably.
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220927011951.j3h4o7n6bhf7dwau@awork3.anarazel.de
Commits cf112c12 and a0dc8271 were a little too hasty in getting rid of
the pg_ prefixes where we use pread(), pwrite() and vectored variants.
We dropped support for ancient Unixes where we needed to use lseek() to
implement replacements for those, but it turns out that Windows also
changes the current position even when you pass in an offset to
ReadFile() and WriteFile() if the file handle is synchronous, despite
its documentation saying otherwise.
Switching to asynchronous file handles would fix that, but have other
complications. For now let's just put back the pg_ prefix and add some
comments to highlight the non-standard side-effect, which we can now
describe as Windows-only.
Reported-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20220923202439.GA1156054%40nathanxps13
There are still some alignment-related failures in the buildfarm,
which might or might not be able to be fixed quickly, but I've also
just realized that it increased the size of many WAL records by 4 bytes
because a block reference contains a RelFileLocator. The effect of that
hasn't been studied or discussed, so revert for now.
SharedInvalSmgrMsg can't require 8-byte alignment, because then
SharedInvalidationMessage will require 8-byte alignment, which will
then cause ParseCommitRecord to fail on machines that are picky
about alignment, because it assumes that everything that gets
packed into a commit record requires only 4-byte alignment.
Another problem with 05d4cbf9b6.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/3825454.1664310917@sss.pgh.pa.us
The previous macro implementations just cast the argument to a target
type but did not check whether the input type was appropriate. The
function implementation can do better type checking of the input type.
For the *GetDatumFast() macros, converting to an inline function
doesn't work in the !USE_FLOAT8_BYVAL case, but we can use
AssertVariableIsOfTypeMacro() to get a similar level of type checking.
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/8528fb7e-0aa2-6b54-85fb-0c0886dbd6ed%40enterprisedb.com
RelFileNumbers are now assigned using a separate counter, instead of
being assigned from the OID counter. This counter never wraps around:
if all 2^56 possible RelFileNumbers are used, an internal error
occurs. As the cluster is limited to 2^64 total bytes of WAL, this
limitation should not cause a problem in practice.
If the counter were 64 bits wide rather than 56 bits wide, we would
need to increase the width of the BufferTag, which might adversely
impact buffer lookup performance. Also, this lets us use bigint for
pg_class.relfilenode and other places where these values are exposed
at the SQL level without worrying about overflow.
This should remove the need to keep "tombstone" files around until
the next checkpoint when relations are removed. We do that to keep
RelFileNumbers from being recycled, but now that won't happen
anyway. However, this patch doesn't actually change anything in
this area; it just makes it possible for a future patch to do so.
Dilip Kumar, based on an idea from Andres Freund, who also reviewed
some earlier versions of the patch. Further review and some
wordsmithing by me. Also reviewed at various points by Ashutosh
Sharma, Vignesh C, Amul Sul, Álvaro Herrera, and Tom Lane.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobp7+7kmi4gkq7Y+4AM9fTvL+O1oQ4-5gFTT+6Ng-dQ=g@mail.gmail.com
Previously, these were declared in postgres_ext.h, but they are not
needed nearly so widely as the OID declarations, so that doesn't
necessarily make sense. Also, because postgres_ext.h is included
before most of c.h has been processed, the previous location creates
some problems for a pending patch.
Patch by me, reviewed by Dilip Kumar.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoYc8oevMqRokZQ4y_6aRn-7XQny1JBr5DyWR_jiFtONHw@mail.gmail.com
Push the units fields over to the left so that all the single-bit
flags can be together. I considered rearranging the single-bit
flags to try to group flags with similar purposes, but eventually
decided that that involved too many judgment calls.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17385-9ee529fb091f0ce5@postgresql.org
Previously, the transaction-property GUCs such as transaction_isolation
could be reset after starting a transaction, because we marked them
as GUC_NO_RESET_ALL but still allowed a targeted RESET. That leads to
assertion failures or worse, because those properties aren't supposed
to change after we've acquired a transaction snapshot.
There are some NO_RESET_ALL variables for which RESET is okay, so
we can't just redefine the semantics of that flag. Instead introduce
a separate GUC_NO_RESET flag. Mark "seed", as well as the transaction
property GUCs, as GUC_NO_RESET.
We have to disallow GUC_ACTION_SAVE as well as straight RESET, because
otherwise a function having a "SET transaction_isolation" clause can
still break things: the end-of-function restore action is equivalent
to a RESET.
No back-patch, as it's conceivable that someone is doing something
this patch will forbid (like resetting one of these GUCs at transaction
start, or "CREATE FUNCTION ... SET transaction_read_only = 1") and not
running into problems with it today. Given how long we've had this
issue and not noticed, the side effects in non-assert builds can't be
too serious.
Per bug #17385 from Andrew Bille.
Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17385-9ee529fb091f0ce5@postgresql.org
This was used as the returned result type of the generated contents for
the backup_label and backup history files. This is replaced by a simple
string, reducing the cleanup burden of all the callers of
build_backup_content().
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/YzERvNPaZivHEKZJ@paquier.xyz
This change simplifies some of the logic related to the generation and
creation of the backup_label and backup history files, which has become
unnecessarily complicated since the removal of the exclusive backup mode
in commit 39969e2. The code was previously generating the contents of
these files as a string (start phase for the backup_label and stop phase
for the backup history file), one problem being that the contents of the
backup_label string were scanned to grab some of its internal contents
at the stop phase.
This commit changes the logic so as we store the data required to build
these files in an intermediate structure named BackupState. The
backup_label file and backup history file strings are generated when
they are ready to be sent back to the client. Both files are now
generated with the same code path. While on it, this commit renames
some variables for clarity.
Two new files named xlogbackup.{c,h} are introduced in this commit, to
remove from xlog.c some of the logic around base backups. Note that
more could be moved to this new set of files.
Author: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACXWwTDgJqCjdaPyfR7djwm6SrybGcrZyrvojzcsmt4FFw@mail.gmail.com
